JP7715239B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to be configured so that an internal lottery is held when certain lottery conditions are met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the results of the internal lottery.

Specifically, with regard to slot machines, when medals have been bet as gaming media and the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is conducted and the reels begin to spin. If the stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop as a result of the internal lottery, a bonus according to the result is awarded (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707

Here, the gaming machines exemplified above need to be designed to enhance the enjoyment of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

The present invention provides
A plurality of rotating bodies on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be visible;
a start operation means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a drive control means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and for stopping rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a lottery means for holding a lottery to determine whether or not to award a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus corresponding to a result of the lottery drawn by the lottery drawing means;
A gaming machine comprising:
a specific information acquisition means for acquiring specific information when a predetermined acquisition condition is met;
a specific information storage means capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
a specific determination means for executing a specific determination of causing a specific event to occur by using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the lottery result by the lottery means;
a means for executing specific notification of the specific information stored in the specific information storage means by a predetermined notification means before the specific information becomes a target of the specific determination;
Equipped with
The specific information acquisition means
a first means for acquiring the specific information when a first condition is met based on an operation by a player as the acquisition condition;
a second means for acquiring the specific information when a second condition different from the first condition is established based on an operation by a player as the acquisition condition;
Equipped with
the specific determination means is capable of making the specific determination based on a lottery result by the lottery means and the specific information acquired in a game prior to the lottery being performed by the lottery means;
The identification information includes first identification information and second identification information,
The lottery results by the lottery means include a first result and a second result,
The configuration is characterized in that when the specific judgment is made using the first specific information and the first result, it is more likely to result in a result corresponding to causing the specific event than when the specific judgment is made using the second specific information and the first result.

This invention makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of games.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to an embodiment. 1 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door closed. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symbols visible through the display window and the pay lines. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symbols visible through the display window and the pay lines. FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits to be awarded. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits to be awarded. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits to be awarded. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing by the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing lottery processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal gaming state. 10 is a flowchart showing a reel control process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop switches and the winning patterns that are achieved. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining reel stop control. 10 is a flowchart showing RT state processing. A figure showing an example of a lottery table for the first RT state. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop switches and the winning patterns that are achieved. A figure showing an example of a lottery table for the second RT state. A figure showing an example of a lottery table for the third RT state. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop switches and the winning patterns that are achieved. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a BB state. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition relationship between states. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of a display mode. 10 is a flowchart showing lottery result handling processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the lottery process for transition to a favorable zone. 10 is a flowchart showing the first specific role processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the second specific role processing. 10 is a flowchart showing an additional notification process. 10 is a flowchart showing the third specific role processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for a specialized zone. 10 is a diagram for explaining the main results of a lottery relating to an instruction function and the setting difference in winning probability. A figure showing an example of a favorable zone transition lottery table and an AT mode transition lottery table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a premonition game number table. A figure showing an example of an additional lottery table and an additional game number lottery table. This is a diagram to explain the relationship between the actual number of remaining games in the advantageous zone and the displayed number of remaining games. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a later-addition lottery table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of an additional notification timing table. 10 is a flowchart showing a mode transition notification process. An explanatory diagram showing an overview of the push order notification display performed on the auxiliary display unit. This is a flowchart showing the push order role processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a winning result response process. 10 is a flowchart showing a number-of-games management process. 10 is a flowchart showing an end determination process. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining an overview of an instruction monitor and a section indicator. 10 is a flowchart showing a first section display process. 10 is a flowchart showing a second section display process. 10 is a flowchart showing remaining game number management processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a remaining number management process. A diagram to explain the relationship between the start game and end game of the advantageous zone and the display on the zone indicator. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance setting process performed by a sub-side display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a bet effect setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a start-up effect setting process. A flowchart showing the process for notifying the order of pressing buttons. A flowchart showing the setting process for the additional effects. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for setting effects at the time of each stop operation. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for setting effects when all the devices are stopped. This is a flowchart showing the bonus effect setting process. This is a flowchart showing the process for notifying transition trigger roles. 10 is a flowchart showing a continuous performance setting process. A diagram showing the relationship between notification timing and additional effects. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a continuous effect. 10 is a flowchart showing a random number acquisition process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an overview of a lottery information storage area. 10 is a flowchart showing a random number shift process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an AT mode transition lottery table. A diagram showing the relationship between the AT counter value that results in an AT mode transition win and the game lottery result. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for displaying a hold; 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. A diagram showing the relationship between the type of special image as a hold display and the AT counter. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for a reserved shift. A diagram for explaining an overview of the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter and the game lottery results. A diagram for explaining an overview of the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter and the game lottery results. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the difference in the probability of winning a specific role for each game state. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the expectation of a special image for each game state. 10 is a flowchart showing a status display start process. 10 is a flowchart showing a status display update process. 10A and 10B are diagrams for explaining an overview of special images and status displays. 10A and 10B are diagrams for explaining an overview of special images and status displays. 10A and 10B are diagrams for explaining an overview of special images and status displays. 10 is a flowchart showing the hold display process in variant example 1. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining how a special image is displayed. 10 is a flowchart showing a BB winning game adjustment process in Modification 2. 10A and 10B are diagrams for explaining an overview of special images and status displays. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an outline of the arrangement of symbols on each reel in Modification 3. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an overview of a lottery information storage area in the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an AT mode transition lottery table. 10 is a flowchart showing a random number acquisition process. 10 is a flowchart showing a random number shift process. A diagram for explaining an overview of the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter and the game lottery results. A diagram for explaining an overview of the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter and the game lottery results. 10 is a flowchart showing a random number shifting process in Modification 1. A diagram for explaining an overview of the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter and the game lottery results. In the second modification, (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the transition relationship between each state, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the end conditions of each bonus. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an AT mode transition lottery table. A diagram for explaining an overview of the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter and the game lottery results. 13 is a flowchart showing an initial random number acquisition process in the third embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing an initial random number acquisition process in Modification 1. 10 is a flowchart showing an initial random number acquisition process in Modification 2. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a conversion table. 13 is a flowchart showing an initial random number acquisition process in Modification 3. A figure showing an example of a lottery table for the first RT state in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop switches and the winning patterns that are achieved. A figure showing an example of a lottery table for the 4th RT state. 10A is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the bonus awarded, and FIG. 10B is a diagram for explaining the difference in the probability of winning a specific combination for each game state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an AT mode transition lottery table. 10 is a flowchart showing a random number acquisition process. 10 is a flowchart showing a random number shift process. 10 is a flowchart showing a special notification process. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10 is a flowchart showing the fourth RT transition process. (a) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the AT counter stored in each memory area and the cherry counter and watermelon counter, and (b) and (c) are diagrams for explaining the relationship between each 4th RT performance and the expected probability of winning the AT. 10 is a flowchart showing a special notification process in Modification 1. 10 is a flowchart showing the fourth RT transition process. 10 is a flowchart showing a random number acquisition process in Modification 2. 10 is a flowchart showing an integrated value information process. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. A figure showing an example of an AT mode transition lottery table in variant example 3. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the difference in the probability of winning a specific role for each game state. A figure for explaining a specific area in which an AT mode transition win is likely to occur in the fifth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a random number acquisition process. 10 is a flowchart showing a CZ mode process. A diagram to explain the relationship between the AT counters stored in each memory area and the CZ mode presentation.

First Embodiment
An embodiment of the present invention, which is applied to a reel-type gaming machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Figure 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, Figure 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, Figure 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, Figure 4 is a rear view of the front door 12, and Figure 5 is a front view of the cabinet 11.

As shown in Figures 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 that forms its outer shell. The housing 11 is generally formed in a box shape with an open front, and is attached to the so-called island equipment by nailing it when installed in an amusement hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 in an openable and closable manner. A pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a, 13b are provided on the housing 11's left side when viewed from the front, and bearings 14a, 14b are provided on the front door 12 at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a, 13b. When the support shafts 13a, 13b are inserted into the bearings 14a, 14b, the front door 12 is rotatably supported relative to the housing 11 about an opening/closing axis extending vertically between the support shafts 13a, 13b. Rotating the front door 12 allows the front open side of the housing 11 to be opened or closed. The front door 12 is locked and cannot be opened by a locking device 20 provided on its backside. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided at the upper right end of the front door 12, and the locked state can be released by operating a specific key on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 that notifies the player of the game status is provided near the upper center of the front door 12. The game panel 25 has three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R arranged side by side, and the interior of the slot machine 10 can be seen through each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. Note that the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the interior of the housing 11 is divided into two sections, upper and lower, by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting the variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a center reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each formed in a cylindrical (annular) shape. Each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis coincides with the axis of rotation of the corresponding reel. The axes of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis extending approximately horizontally, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one with each display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. Therefore, a portion of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. Furthermore, when reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R as if they are moving from top to bottom.

Here, we will briefly explain the configuration of the reel unit 31.

Each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is connected to a stepping motor, which drives each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to rotate individually, i.e., independently. The stepping motor is configured to rotate once by applying a drive signal (hereinafter referred to as an excitation pulse) of, for example, 504 pulses. This excitation pulse controls the rotational position of the stepping motor, i.e., the rotational position of the reel. Furthermore, the reel unit 31 is equipped with a reel index sensor on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to detect when the reel has rotated once. Each time the reel index sensor detects that the reel has rotated once, it outputs a detection signal to the main control device 101, described below. Therefore, the main control device 101 can check and correct the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal from the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output before that detection signal was input.

Multiple symbols serving as identification information are drawn on the outer periphery of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the direction of its long side (circumference direction). More specifically, 21 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, to switch from one symbol to the next at a specified position, 24 excitation pulses (= 504 pulses ÷ 21 symbols) must be output. Furthermore, the main control unit 101 can determine which symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, and can stop a specified symbol at a position visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, based on the number of excitation pulses output after the reel index sensor detection signal is input.

Next, we will explain the symbols depicted on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figure 6 shows the arrangement of symbols on the left reel 32L, center reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Furthermore, numbers ranging from 0 to 20 are assigned to each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but these numbers are used by the main control device 101 to identify the symbols visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, and are not actually assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, these numbers will be used in the following explanation.

There are 11 types of symbols: "Red Bell" symbol (e.g., number 7 on left reel 32L), "White Bell" symbol (e.g., number 20 on left reel 32L), "First Replay" symbol (e.g., number 19 on left reel 32L), "Second Replay" symbol (e.g., number 6 on left reel 32L), "Red 7" symbol (e.g., number 10 on left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (e.g., number 8 on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (e.g., number 4 on left reel 32L), "Black BAR" symbol (e.g., number 18 on left reel 32L), "White BAR" symbol (e.g., number 17 on left reel 32L), "LUCKY" symbol (e.g., number 5 on left reel 32L), and "Youth" symbol (e.g., number 0 on left reel 32L). As shown in Figure 6, the number and arrangement order of the various symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are completely different.

Each display window 26L, 26M, 26R is shaped so that only three of the 21 symbols on the corresponding reel are visible in their entirety. Therefore, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the display window 26L, 26M, 26R.

In this slot machine 10, the game results of each game are announced using a total of three symbol combinations, one symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, of the visible symbols. As described above, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible, and as shown in Figure 7, the combinations of these three symbols include, for example, the combination of symbols that stop on the upper line L1 connecting the upper symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the combination of symbols that stop on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the combination of symbols that stop on the lower line L3 connecting the lower symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There are also combinations of symbols that stop on a downward-sloping line L4 connecting the top symbol on the left reel 32L, the middle symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the bottom symbol on the right reel 32R, as well as combinations of symbols that stop on an upward-sloping line L5 connecting the bottom symbol on the left reel 32L, the middle symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the top symbol on the right reel 32R. There are also combinations of symbols that stop on a curved line L6 connecting the top symbol on the left reel 32L, the middle symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol on the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are straight lines when the symbols are lined up, while the curved line L6 is a line that bends when the symbols are lined up. There are other combinations of symbols that stop on curved lines besides the curved line L6, but we will not discuss them here.

Of these lines L1 to L6, some are activated and some are not, depending on the number of medals bet. When symbols stop in a predetermined combination on an activated line, i.e., an activated line, a win is achieved and a bonus is awarded in which a predetermined number of medals, which serve as gaming media, are paid out, or a bonus is awarded in which the game state is changed. On the other hand, when symbols stop in a predetermined combination on an inactivated line, a win is not achieved and the bonus is not awarded.

In this slot machine 10, there are three cases where only the downward-sloping right line L4 is an active line, as shown in FIG. 8(a); where the two combined lines, the bottom line L3 and the downward-sloping right line L4, are active lines, as shown in FIG. 8(b); and where only the curved line L6 is an active line, as shown in FIG. 8(c). More specifically, when a game is started with three medals bet, only the downward-sloping right line L4 is an active line. When a game is started with two medals bet, the bottom line L3 and the downward-sloping right line L4 are active lines. Furthermore, when a game is started with one medal bet, only the curved line L6 is an active line. The three combined lines, the top line L1, the middle line L2, and the upward-sloping right line L5, are not active lines. Hereinafter, a game started with three medals bet is referred to as a three-bet game, a game started with two medals bet is referred to as a two-bet game, and a game started with one medal bet is referred to as a one-bet game.

Figures 9 to 11 show the correspondence between winning symbol combinations and the benefits awarded when a winning combination is achieved.

The small prize wins that result in medal payouts are the 1st small prize win through the 41st small prize win.

When the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the first small win is achieved. When the first small win is achieved, nine medals are paid out in a three-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a two-bet game.

For the 2nd small win to the 26th small win, the winning symbol combinations are different, but in a 3-bet game, the winning symbols are the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white BAR" symbol, "red 7" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "white bell" symbol or "LUCKY" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white BAR" symbol, "young man" symbol, "white bell" symbol, "red 7" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the right reel 32R, all stopping on the top line L1, i.e., the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stop on the top line L1. For example, if the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L stops on the top row, the "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops on the middle row, and the "white BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the bottom row, the eighth small win will be achieved. As shown in Figure 6, the "red bell" symbol is located on the middle reel 32M in a position (number 12) adjacent to the "cherry" symbol (number 11) on the upstream side, and the "red bell" symbol is located on the right reel 32R in a position (number 20) one symbol away from the "white BAR" symbol (number 18) on the upstream side. Therefore, when the 8th small win occurs on the downward-sloping right line L4, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R will stop on the upper line L1. When the 2nd to 26th small wins occur, 3 medals will be paid out in a 3-bet game, and 14 medals will be paid out in a 2-bet game.

The 27th minor win is determined by the symbol on the left reel 32L, which is the designated reel among the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Specifically, the 27th minor win occurs when the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops in the upper or lower row. In this case, the symbols on the center reel 32M and right reel 32R do not affect the win determination. In other words, regardless of the symbols on the center reel 32M and right reel 32R, the 27th minor win occurs when the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops in the upper row or stops, i.e., when the "cherry" symbol or the "second replay" symbol stops on an active line. When the 27th minor win occurs, three medals are paid out in a three-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a two-bet game.

The 28th minor win occurs when the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops on the top or bottom row, and the "cherry" symbols stop aligned on the downward-sloping right line L4. More specifically, the 28th minor win occurs when the "cherry" symbol or "second replay" symbol stops on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol, "white bell" symbol or "cherry" symbol stops on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol, "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol stops on the right reel 32R. When the 28th minor win occurs, three medals are paid out in a three-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in a two-bet game.

Additionally, to provide additional information about the relationship between the 27th and 28th small wins, when the "Cherry" or "Second Replay" symbols stop on the left reel 32L, the 27th small win is achieved regardless of the symbols stopped on the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R. However, depending on the symbols stopped on the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R, the 28th small win may be achieved instead of the 27th small win. In other words, although the winning patterns for the 27th small win include the winning patterns for the 28th small win, the 27th and 28th small wins are clearly distinguished when determining whether they are wins.

The 29th small win occurs when the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R all stop on an active line. In other words, if the active line is the downward-sloping line L4, the 29th small win occurs when the "watermelon" symbols all stop in a downward-sloping pattern. When the 29th small win occurs, 5 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

The 30th small win occurs when the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R all stop on the top line L1. More specifically, the 30th small win occurs when the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R all stop on an active line. When the 30th small win occurs, 5 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

When the "Black BAR", "Young Man", "Watermelon" and "First Replay" symbols on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 31st minor win is achieved. When the 31st minor win is achieved, 9 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

For the 32nd to 35th small wins, if they occur in a 3-bet game, 3 medals will be paid out, and in a 2-bet game, 14 medals will be paid out.

The 36th minor winning combination occurs when, for example, a player operates the stop switches 42-44 aiming for the "watermelon" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the "watermelon" symbols on the left reel 32L and center reel 32M, or the left reel 32L and right reel 32R, stop on an active line, while the "watermelon" symbols on the remaining reels do not stop on an active line, resulting in a so-called "watermelon tenpai miss" winning combination. When the 36th minor winning combination is achieved, three medals are paid out in a three-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a two-bet game.

When the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Black BAR," "Watermelon," or "Cherry" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "Red Bell," "White Bell," or "Young Man" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 37th minor win is achieved. As shown in Figure 6, the left reel 32L has the "Second Replay" symbol located adjacent to the "Red Bell" symbol (number 7) downstream (number 6), and the "First Replay" symbol located adjacent to the main "White Bell" symbols (numbers 3, 12, 15, and 20) downstream (numbers 2, 11, 14, and 19). On the right reel 32R, the "First Replay" or "Second Replay" symbols are located adjacent to the "Red Bell" symbols (numbers 2, 5, 12, and 20) and upstream (numbers 3, 6, 16, and 0), respectively. The "First Replay" symbol is located adjacent to the "White Bell" symbol (number 10) and upstream (number 11). Therefore, when the 37th minor win occurs on the downward-sloping right line L4, the "Bell" and "Replay" symbols are generally in tenpai on the left reel 32L and right reel 32R, while the "Bell" and "Replay" symbols on the center reel 32M are not stopped, resulting in a so-called double tenpai miss. When the 37th minor win occurs, three medals are paid out in a three-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a two-bet game.

When the "White BAR," "Young Man," "Watermelon," and "First Replay" symbols on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "First Replay," "Watermelon," and "Black BAR" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 38th minor win is achieved. In a 3-bet game, if the player operates the left stop switch when the number 4 "Cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the top or bottom row, the 38th minor win will occur when the "Red Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the center line L2. If the 38th minor win is achieved, 3 medals will be paid out in a 3-bet game, and 15 medals will be paid out in a 2-bet game.

When the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 39th small win is achieved. The 39th small win is a winning mode that can only be achieved in a 3-bet game. When the 39th small win is achieved, 9 medals will be paid out.

If the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 40th small win will be achieved. The 40th small win is a winning mode that can only be achieved in a 3-bet game. When the 40th small win is achieved, 9 medals will be paid out.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" or "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 41st small win is achieved. When the 41st small win is achieved, 3 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

Winnings that grant the replay privilege, which allows you to play the next game without inserting a medal, include the 1st replay winnings through the 12th replay winnings. Furthermore, if the 2nd replay winnings are achieved, the game state transitions to the 1st RT state; if the 3rd replay winnings are achieved, the game state transitions to the 2nd RT state; and if the 4th or 5th replay winnings are achieved, the game state transitions to the 3rd RT state. Finally, if the 11th or 12th replay winnings are achieved, the game state transitions to the 4th RT state.

State transition wins that only result in a transition of the game state include the 1st BB win, the 2nd BB win, and the CB win.

When the "Red 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stops on an active line, a first BB win is achieved, and the game state transitions to the first BB state. Furthermore, when the "White BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stops on an active line, a second BB win is achieved, and the game state transitions to the second BB state. When the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "Watermelon", "First Replay", and "Black BAR" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, a CB win is achieved. When a CB win is achieved, the game state transitions to the CB state.

In addition, although not a winning combination, there are certain winning combinations that will cause the game state to transition to the first RT state. Specifically, when the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white BAR", "LUCKY", "red 7", "white bell" or "cherry" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "watermelon" or "first replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the game state will transition to the first RT state. Additionally, if the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "White BAR", "Youth", "White Bell", "Red 7", or "Second Replay" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the game state will transition to the first RT state. Hereinafter, the combinations of the above symbols will be referred to as transition results.

A start lever 41 is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25, which is operated to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or a starting operation means that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, i.e., to start the variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begins to rotate.

To the right of the start lever 41 are button-shaped stop switches 42-44 that can be operated to individually stop each of the spinning reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Each stop switch 42-44 is located directly below the display window 26L, 26M, and 26R that corresponds to the reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped.

Stop detection sensors 42a-44a (Figure 12) are connected to the stop switches 42-44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are connected to the main control device 101, which will be described later. The main control device 101 then determines that a stop switch 42-44 has been operated based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a. Specifically, when a stop switch 42-44 has not been operated, the stop detection sensors 42a-44a output a LOW detection signal. When a stop switch 42-44 is operated, this detection signal switches from LOW to HIGH. The main control device 101 detects this signal switch and determines that a stop switch 42-44 has been operated. When the main control device 101 determines that a stop switch 42-44 has been operated, it controls the reel corresponding to the operated switch to stop spinning.

In other words, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the left reel 32L stops spinning, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the middle reel 32M stops spinning, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the right reel 32R stops spinning. The stop switches 42-44 constitute stop operation means that are operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

A medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided below and to the right of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal insertion slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting gaming media. Furthermore, considering that the medal insertion slot 45 involves the player directly inserting medals, it can also be said to constitute a direct input means for directly inputting gaming media.

Medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by a selector 46, which serves as a passage switching means and is located on the back of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is equipped with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided to the storage passage 47. Medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to a hopper device 51 stored inside the housing 11. Meanwhile, medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to a medal tray 50 through a medal discharge port 49 located at the bottom front of the front door 12, and are returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 that stores medals and a payout device 53 that pays out medals to players. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge medals into an opening 48a in the discharge passage 48, and then pays out the medals to a medal tray 50 via the discharge passage 48. A reserve tank 54 is provided to the right of the hopper device 51 to prevent more than a predetermined amount of medals from accumulating in the storage tank 52. A guide plate 52a is provided inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51 to discharge medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54. Therefore, if medals accumulate above the height at which the guide plate 52a is installed, those medals will be stored in the reserve tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal insertion slot 45. If the return switch 55 is operated when a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 becomes stuck in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically linked and operated, and the medal stuck in the selector 46 is returned from the medal ejection slot 49.

A first credit insertion switch 56 is provided on the left below display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R for inserting three credited virtual medals as gaming media at a time. A second credit insertion switch 57 is provided to the right of the first credit insertion switch 56, and a third credit insertion switch 58 is provided to the left of the first credit insertion switch 56. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting one virtual medal, and the third credit insertion switch 58 is for inserting two virtual medals at a time. Together with the medal insertion slot 45, the credit insertion switches 56-58 constitute input means for inputting gaming media. Furthermore, while the medal insertion slot 45 involves the player directly inserting medals, the credit insertion switches 56-58 merely involve the insertion of virtual medals based on stored memory. Considering this, they can also be said to constitute indirect input means for indirectly inputting gaming media.

Between the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57 is provided an effect switch 66 that is operated when an effect occurs. In other words, to the left of the effect switch 66 are the first credit insertion switch 56 and the third credit insertion switch 58, and to the right of the effect switch 66 is the second credit insertion switch 57.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41. In other words, this slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and stores, as virtual medals, any surplus medals inserted up to a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) and medals paid out when a prize is won. If the settlement switch 59 is operated while virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out as real medals from the medal outlet 49. In this case, when focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, the settlement switch 59 can also be said to constitute a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored and stored gaming media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display unit 60 that displays the number of virtual medals that have been credited, a remaining payout number display unit 61 that displays the number of medals remaining to be paid out until the BB state ends, and a payout number display unit 62 that displays the number of medals paid out when a win occurs. These display units 60-62 are made up of 7-segment displays, but can of course be replaced with LCD displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on the gaming panel 25, to the right of the payout number display unit 62, is an instruction monitor 68 that includes a push order indicator that notifies the player of the operation order of the stop switches 42-44, and a zone indicator that notifies the player of the operation order, thereby changing the winning rate of minor winning combinations and indicating advantageous zones that allow the player to play in an advantageous situation. The instruction monitor 68 will be explained in detail later.

The upper part of the front door 12 is provided with an upper lamp 63 that lights up and flashes as the game progresses, a pair of left and right speakers 64 that play various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game status, and an auxiliary display unit 65 that provides various information to the player. The auxiliary display unit 65 is used to perform various display effects as the game progresses, and since the play using each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be considered to be performed by the main display unit, it is referred to as the auxiliary display unit 65 in this embodiment. A display control device 81 for driving the upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 is provided on the back of the auxiliary display unit 65.

A power supply box 70 is provided inside the housing 11 to the left of the hopper device 51. The power supply box 70 houses a power supply unit 91 and is equipped with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is an activation switch that supplies power to the main control device 101 and other components. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting an error state of the slot machine 10. The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by hall managers and others to adjust the medal payout. In other words, hall managers and others can set the winning probability (setting value) of the slot machine 10 by inserting a setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it ON. The reset switch 72 is also operated to change the winning probability of the slot machine 10, in addition to resetting an error state.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that controls and manages the game is attached to the cabinet 11.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a role ratio monitor 77 that indicates the ratio between advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player. The role ratio monitor 77 is installed on the side of the main control unit 101 facing the front of the gaming machine so that it is visible from the front of the gaming machine when the front door 12 is open, but is not visible from the front of the gaming machine when the front door 12 is closed. More specifically, it is housed within the board box that houses the main control unit 101 so that the display screen of the role ratio monitor 77 is visible through the board box. Incidentally, when the front door 12 is closed, the role ratio monitor 77 is not visible through the gaps in the display windows 26L-26R, and the role ratio monitor 77 cannot be viewed unless the front door 12 is unlocked by operating a specific key on the key cylinder 21 and opened. The role ratio monitor 77 will be explained in more detail later.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagrams in Figures 12 and 13.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around the CPU 102, which is the calculation means. In addition to the power supply unit 91, the CPU 102 is connected via an internal bus to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and other components. The main control unit 101 functions as the main board built into the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main control device 101, there are the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects when each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation), the start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a that individually detect the operation of each stop switch 42 to 44, the medal insertion detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45, the payout detection sensor 51a that detects medals paid out from the hopper device 51, and the first credit insertion detection sensor that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56. 56a, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, a third credit insertion detection sensor 58a that individually detects the operation of the third credit insertion switch 58, a settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the settlement switch 59, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects when a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned ON, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104.

In addition, a power supply unit 91 is connected to the input side of the main control unit 101 via the input/output port 104. The power supply unit 91 is equipped with a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to the main control unit 101 and other electronic devices in the slot machine 10, a power outage monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power outage monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power supply interruption state and generates a power outage signal not only during a power outage but also when the power is cut off by the power switch 71. For this reason, the power outage monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage, in this example 12 volts DC, output from the power supply unit 91a, and is configured to determine that the power supply has been cut off when this drive voltage drops to less than 10 volts, for example, and output a power outage signal. The power outage signal is supplied to both the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power outage signal and executes the power outage processing described below. The power outage signal is also supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in control systems such as the main control unit 101, even if the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time for which this stabilized voltage is output is sufficient to allow the main control unit 101 to perform power outage processing.

Connected to the output side of the main control device 101 via input/output port 104 are the reel unit 31 (more specifically, the stepping motor for rotating each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal path switching solenoid 46a provided on the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, the payout number display unit 62, the instruction monitor 68, the winning combination monitor 77, the display control device 81, and an external centralized terminal board 121 that can send information to a hall management device (not shown), etc.

The above-mentioned CPU 102 contains ROM 105, which stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 102, and RAM 106, which provides a working area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in ROM 105. As well as these, the CPU 102 also contains various processing circuits (not shown) required for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit, as well as various counters, such as a credit counter that counts the number of credits. ROM 105 and RAM 106 form a main memory as a storage means, and the programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-mentioned ROM 105 as part of the control program.

RAM 106 is configured to receive a backup voltage from power supply 91 and retain (back up) data even after power to slot machine 10 is cut off. RAM 106 is provided with a backup area as well as memory for temporarily storing various data, a win flag storage area 106a for storing the results of the lottery, a stop information storage area 106b for storing stop information used when controlling the stop of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a status information storage area 106c for storing game statuses such as the BB state.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer at the time of power interruption (including power interruption by operating the power switch 71; the same applies below) in the event that power is interrupted due to a power outage or other reason. When the power outage is resolved (including power on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies below), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state it was in before power was interrupted based on the information in the backup area. Writing to the backup area is performed by the power outage processing (see Figure 14) when power is interrupted, and the values written to the backup area are restored during main processing when power is turned on.

The CPU 102's NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) is configured to receive a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b when power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. When power is cut off, NMI interrupt processing, which serves as a power outage flag generation process, is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181, which is a calculation processing means. The CPU 181 contains a ROM 182 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 181, and a RAM 183 that provides a working area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182.

The display control device 81 is provided with input/output ports (not shown), with the main control device 101 connected to the input side and the upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 connected to the output side. The display control device 81 drives and controls the upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 based on various commands input from the main control device 101. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that performs auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101, which is the main board that manages the overall game. In other words, by providing a sub-board for indirect game-related sounds, lamps, and displays, the burden on the main board is reduced.

The display control device 81 is connected to an input side of the effect switch 66 (more specifically, an effect switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the effect switch 66). The various display units 60-62, 68 may also be configured to be driven and controlled by the display control device 81.

Next, we will explain the various control processes executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101. The processes performed by the CPU 102 can be broadly divided into main processing, which is activated when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing, which is activated periodically (every 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt processing, which is activated when a power outage signal is input to the NMI terminal. Below, we will explain the processes related to the progress of the game, i.e., timer interrupt processing, and the normal processing performed in the main processing.

Figure 14 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process that is periodically executed by the main control unit 101. The CPU 102 of the main control unit 101 generates a timer interrupt, for example, every 1.49 msec.

First, in the register save process shown in step S101, the values of all registers in the CPU 102 used in normal processing, which will be described later, are saved to the backup area of RAM 106. In step S102, it is checked whether the power outage flag is set, and if the power outage flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103, where power outage processing is executed.

Here, we will provide an overview of how to handle power outages.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply unit 91, and this power outage signal is input to the main control unit 101 via the NMI terminal. When the power outage signal is input, the main control unit 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power outage flag in the power outage flag storage area provided in RAM 106.

The power outage process first determines whether command transmission has finished. If transmission has not finished, the process ends, returns to timer interrupt processing, and ends command transmission. If command transmission has finished, the value of the stack pointer in CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of RAM 106. The output status of the output port in I/O port 104 is then cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Next, a RAM judgment value is calculated to determine whether the data in RAM 106 is normal when the power outage is resolved, and saved in the backup area, thereby prohibiting further RAM access. After performing the above process, an infinite loop is entered to prepare for a complete power outage that would prevent further processing. Note that, in case the power outage flag is erroneously set due to noise, for example, a check is made to see if a power outage signal is being output before entering the infinite loop. If the power outage signal is not being output, this indicates that the power outage has been recovered, and writing to RAM 106 is permitted, the power outage flag is reset, and the process returns to timer interrupt processing. If the power outage signal continues to be output, the process enters the infinite loop. Incidentally, even in an infinite loop, it checks whether the power outage signal is being output, and if the power outage signal is no longer being output, it transitions to the main processing.

Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt process, if the power outage flag is not set in step S102, various processes from step S104 onwards are performed.

That is, in step S104, a watchdog timer clear process is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer, which monitors for malfunctions. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed, which allows the CPU 102 itself to set the next timer interrupt. In step S106, a stepping motor control process is performed to drive the stepping motors that drive each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R in order to spin each reel. In step S107, a sensor monitoring process is performed to read the status of various sensors connected to the input/output port 104, such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a (see Figure 12), and to monitor whether the read results are normal. In step S108, a timer calculation process is performed to subtract values from each counter and timer. In step S109, a counter process is performed to count the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out, and output the results to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process is performed to send various commands, such as lottery result commands (described later), to the display control device 81. In step S111, a segment data setting process is performed to set the segment data to be displayed in the credit display unit 60, remaining payout number display unit 61, and payout number display unit 62. In step S112, a segment data display process is performed to supply the segment data set in the segment data setting process to each display unit 60-62, 68 and display the corresponding numbers, symbols, etc. In step S113, a port output process is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104. In step S114, the values of each register saved to the backup area in the previous step S101 are restored to the corresponding register in the CPU 102. Thereafter, in step S115, an interrupt enable process is performed to enable the next timer interrupt, ending this series of timer interrupt processes.

Next, we will explain the normal processing that performs the main control related to gameplay based on the flowchart in Figure 15.

First, in step S201, an interrupt permission process is performed to allow the next timer interrupt. In step S202, pre-start processing is performed to enable play. In the pre-start processing, the system waits until the display control device 81 and other devices have completed initialization. Once initialization of the display control device 81 and other devices has completed, the system performs the game management process shown in steps S203 to S215.

As part of the game management process, in step S203, various game information and other data stored in RAM 106 (such as random number values used in the previous game) are cleared. Then, in step S204, a start wait process is performed.

The start waiting process determines whether any replay wins were achieved in the previous game. If any replay wins were achieved, an automatic insertion process is performed to automatically insert virtual medals in the same number as the previous bet, and the start waiting process ends. Specifically, for example, if a replay win is achieved in a three-bet game, a process to automatically insert three virtual medals is performed, and if a replay win is achieved in a one-bet game, a process to automatically insert one virtual medal is performed.

In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed in the credit display unit 60. In other words, if any replay win was achieved in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals they own or inserting any medals. If no replay win was achieved, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to check whether any abnormalities have occurred in the sensor reading results obtained in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interrupt process. If an abnormality has occurred, an abnormality occurrence process is performed to put the slot machine 10 into an error state and notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the sensor reading results are normal, it is determined whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated. If the settlement switch 59 has been operated, a medal return process is performed to pay out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals.

After the medal return process is completed or if the settlement switch 59 has not been operated, a determination is made as to whether medals have been inserted or credit insertion switches 56-58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either has been done, a medal insertion process is carried out to change the number of bets, etc., and the start waiting process ends. Furthermore, if neither medals have been inserted nor credit insertion switches 56-58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process ends immediately.

After the start waiting process is completed, step S205 determines whether the number of medals bet has reached the specified number. In this slot machine 10, the specified number in the CB state is set to "2," and the specified numbers in gaming states other than the CB state (specifically, the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, the fourth RT state, and the BB state) are set to "1" and "3." That is, in the CB state, a positive determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of medals bet is "2," and in states other than the CB state, a positive determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of medals bet is "1" or "3." In other words, in gaming states other than the CB state, if no medals have been bet, or if the number of medals bet is "2," a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of medals has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes from the sensor abnormality confirmation process onward are performed.

If the number of bets has reached the specified number, mode transition notification processing is executed in step S206. This mode transition notification processing will be explained in detail later.

After processing step S206, a bet command including information on the processing result of step S206 and information on the number of bets for which a positive judgment was made in step S205 is set as an output target to the display control device 81, which serves as a sub-control device. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 in step S110 of the timer interrupt processing. The processing of the display control device 81 that receives the bet command will be explained in detail later.

After executing the processing of step S207, it is determined in step S208 whether the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processing from the sensor abnormality confirmation process onwards is carried out.

On the other hand, if the start lever 41 is operated, this means that a start command has been issued to start play, as the system is configured to allow play to begin when the start lever 41 is operated when a specified number of medals have been bet. In this case, in step S209, an active line setting process is performed to set the combination of lines corresponding to the number of bets as the active line. That is, in a 3-bet game, only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as the active line, and in a 2-bet game, the downward line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are set as the active lines. Furthermore, in a 1-bet game, the bent line L6 is set as the active line. In step S210, the medal path switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-energized state, thereby prohibiting bet acceptance. Thereafter, the following processes are executed in order: lottery processing in step S211, reel control processing in step S212, medal payout processing in step S213, RT state processing in step S214, and bonus state processing in step S215, and then the system returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S211 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 16.

In step S301, a random number is obtained to be used when determining whether a winning combination has been achieved. In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuitry latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number between 0 and 65535, and after the CPU 102 confirms the operation of the start lever 41, it stores the value latched by the hardware circuitry in RAM 106. This configuration makes it possible to quickly obtain a random number when the start lever 41 is operated, thereby avoiding problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuitry of this slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table is selected to determine whether the winning combination has been achieved. This slot machine 10 has six gaming states, broadly categorized as the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, the fourth RT state, the BB state, and the CB state, and a lottery table is set for each gaming state.

In other words, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the number of bets and the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and gaming state is selected. For example, if the number of bets is "3" and the setting flag is not set in the state information storage area 106c, the current gaming state is determined to be the normal gaming state, and a lottery table for the normal gaming state is selected. Furthermore, this slot machine 10 has six pre-prepared winning probabilities, from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6." By inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole and turning it ON, and performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to set which winning probability the internal processing will be based on. In step S302, when the setting state is "Setting 1," a lottery table with the lowest expected medal payout value is selected, and when the setting state is "Setting 6," a lottery table with the highest expected medal payout value is selected.

Here, we will provide additional explanation about the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed by the main processing launched by the main control device 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is launched after the initialization process when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned ON. In the winning probability setting process, the setting value is updated by one each time the start lever 41 is operated. For example, each time the start lever 41 is operated, the setting value is updated as follows: "Setting 1" → "Setting 2" → "Setting 3" → "Setting 4" → "Setting 5" → "Setting 6" → "Setting 1." Each setting value is displayed, for example, on the credit display unit 60, and the display is updated each time the setting value is updated. Then, operating the start lever 41 while the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned OFF is considered a confirmation operation of the setting value, and the setting value at that time is set as the current setting value, thereby terminating the winning probability setting process. Upon completion of the winning probability setting process, the display on the credit display unit 60 also terminates. The setting values set in the winning probability setting process are stored in RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, a lottery table is selected based on these stored setting values.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. Figure 17 shows the lottery table for normal game mode, which is selected in the normal game mode of "Setting 3." The lottery table has index values IV set, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and is also set with a point value PV.

After selecting a lottery table, in step S303, the index value IV is set to 1, and in the following step S304, a judgment value DV is set to be used when determining whether a role has been won or lost. In this judgment value setting process, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the current judgment value DV to set a new judgment value DV. Note that in the initial judgment value setting process, the random number value obtained in step S301 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV (1) is added to this random number value to set a new judgment value DV.

Then, in step S305, a win/loss determination is made for the combination corresponding to the index value IV. The combination win/loss determination is made by determining whether the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, in step S306, a determination is made as to whether the first BB, second BB, or CB has been won. Specifically, a determination is made as to whether a positive determination was made in step S305 for an index value IV (IV = 34 to 54) that includes any of the first BB, second BB, or CB. If a positive determination is made in step S306, a process is performed in which the corresponding bonus win flag (first BB win flag, second BB win flag, CB win flag) is set in the win flag storage area 106a in step S307. If a negative determination is made in step S306, or after the process of step S307 has been performed, in step S308, a process is performed in which the win flag for each minor combination corresponding to the index value IV determined to be positive in step S305 is set in the win flag storage area 106a. For example, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65,535 when IV = 34, the 1st BB win flag is set in step S307, and the 28th small win flag, the 33rd small win flag, and the 35th small win flag are set in step S308. Also, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65,535 when IV = 17, win flags indicating that the 30th and 41st small wins have been won are set in the win flag storage area 106a in step S308.

Incidentally, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag indicating that the first BB has been won (first BB winning flag) or a winning flag indicating that the second BB has been won (second BB winning flag), the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a will be reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag was set has ended (see S203 in the normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is a first BB winning flag or a second BB winning flag, these winning flags will be reset when the corresponding winning is achieved as one of the conditions. In other words, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid across multiple games.

In addition, in steps S306 to S308 when the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than 1st BB, 2nd BB, or CB is achieved, the corresponding winning flag is set; if a winning combination other than 1st BB, 2nd BB, or CB is not achieved, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, if the 1st BB winning flag is carried over and the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 34, the 1st BB winning flag is not set, and the 28th small win flag, the 33rd small win flag, and the 35th small win flag are set. Also, if the 1st BB winning flag is carried over and the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 35, the 2nd BB winning flag is not set, and the 28th small win flag, the 33rd small win flag, and the 35th small win flag are set.

It is also possible to prepare a separate lottery table for when the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over, and perform the lottery process using this separately prepared lottery table when the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over. In this case, it is recommended to set the index values IV and point values PV in this separately prepared lottery table so that the first BB, second BB, and CB are not won.

If the judgment value DV does not exceed 65,535 in step S305, this means that the hand corresponding to the index value IV has not been won. In such a case, in step S309, the index value IV is incremented by 1, and in the following step S310, it is determined whether there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, i.e., whether there is a target for judgment as to whether it is a hit or a miss. Specifically, it is determined whether the index value IV incremented by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a target for judgment as to whether it is a hit or a miss, the process returns to step S304, and the judgment of the hit or miss of the hand continues. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used to judge whether the previous hand was a hit or a miss (i.e., the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, and in step S305, the hit or miss of the hand is judged based on this judgment value DV. 17, the probability of winning a normal replay (probability of winning when IV = 1) is approximately 1 in 7.3, the probability of winning a strong cherry (probability of winning when IV = 15) is approximately 1 in 300, and the probability of winning a weak cherry (probability of winning when IV = 16) is approximately 1 in 183. The probability of winning a strong watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 17) is approximately 1 in 300, the probability of winning a weak watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 18) is approximately 1 in 218, the probability of winning Chance A (probability of winning when IV = 19) is approximately 1 in 252, and the probability of winning Chance B (probability of winning when IV = 20) is approximately 1 in 252. The probability of winning the middle bell (probability of winning when IV = 21) is approximately 1 in 32,800, and the probability of winning the no-question bell (probability of winning when IV = 22) is approximately 1 in 65,500. The probability of winning the forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, and pinch push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 23 to 26) is approximately 1 in 43.7, and the probability of winning the middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, right push bell 1, and right push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 27 to 30) is approximately 1 in 21.8. The probability of winning a strong cherry duplicate 1 (probability of winning when IV = 34) is approximately 1 in 21,800, the probability of winning a strong cherry duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 35) is approximately 1 in 21,800, the probability of winning a weak cherry duplicate 1 (probability of winning when IV = 36) is approximately 1 in 32,800, and the probability of winning a weak cherry duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 37) is approximately 1 in 32,800. The probability of winning a strong watermelon duplicate 1 (probability of winning when IV = 38) is approximately 1 in 32,800, and the probability of winning a strong watermelon duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 39) is approximately 1 in 32,800. The probability of winning a weak watermelon duplicate 1 (probability of winning when IV = 40) is approximately 1 in 65,500, and the probability of winning a weak watermelon duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 41) is approximately 1 in 65,500. The probability of winning Chance A Duplicate 1, Chance A Duplicate 2, Chance B Duplicate 1, and Chance B Duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 42-45) is approximately 1 in 32,800. The probability of winning Middle Bell Duplicate 1 and Middle Bell Duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 46, 47) is approximately 1 in 21,800. The probability of winning Special Reply A Duplicate 1 (probability of winning when IV = 48) is approximately 1 in 1,010, and the probability of winning Special Reply A Duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 49) is approximately 1 in 1,310. The probability of winning Special Reply AB Duplicate 1 (probability of winning when IV = 50) is approximately 1 in 1,010, and the probability of winning Special Reply AB Duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 51) is approximately 1 in 1,310. The probability of winning 1st BB or 2nd BB alone (probability of winning when IV = 52 or 53) is approximately 1 in 32,800. The probability of winning CB (probability of winning when IV = 54) is approximately 1 in 19.9. Additionally, the probability of losing and not winning any of the roles is approximately 1 in 1.96.

In the lottery table for normal game mode, 0 is set for point values PV for IV = 2 to 14, 31 to 33, and 55 to 58. Therefore, in normal game mode, these index values IV do not result in a win.

After the winning flag is set in step S308, or if it is determined in step S310 that there are no targets to be judged, this means that the judgment of the winning combination has been completed. In such cases, the process proceeds to step S311, where a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period of time.

In the following step S312, lottery result response processing is performed. In lottery result response processing, processing such as whether to transition the game state depending on the results of the lottery in steps S301 to S311 and processing to notify the push order role is performed. This lottery result response processing will be explained in detail later.

After executing the processing of step S312, a lottery result command is set in step S313. Here, the lottery result command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the result of the hand win/loss judgment. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are simply set in the ring buffer, and no command is sent to the display control device 81. Commands are sent to the display control device 81 during the command output processing (step S110) of the timer interrupt processing described above.

Then, in step S314, a stop information setting process is executed to set symbols that can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery results of this game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information corresponding to the possible winning combinations is set based on the win flags set in steps S306 to S308. For example, if a strong cherry is won (won when IV = 15) and the strong cherry win flag is set, stop symbol information is set so that symbols corresponding to the 28th small combination, 32nd small combination, and 35th small combination wins can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Furthermore, if a strong cherry overlap 1 is won (won when IV = 34) and the strong cherry win flag and the first BB win flag are set, stop symbol information is set so that symbols corresponding to the 28th small combination, 33rd small combination, 35th small combination, and first BB win can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the following step S315, if multiple stoppable symbol information was set in step S314, a priority setting process is executed to set their priorities. For example, if multiple roles out of small win, replay, and bonus have been won, the following priorities are set. If a small win and a bonus have been won, the priority is set so that the small win takes priority, and if a small win cannot be won, a bonus win will be won. If a replay and a bonus have been won, the priority is set so that the replay win takes priority.

For example, if Strong Cherry Duplicate 1 is won and stop symbol information corresponding to the 28th, 33rd, and 35th minor symbols and the 1st BB win is set, priority is set so that the 28th, 33rd, and 35th minor symbols win take priority over the 1st BB win. Also, if Special Replay A Duplicate 1 is won and stop symbol information corresponding to the 9th replay and the 1st BB win is set, priority is set so that the 9th replay win takes priority over the 1st BB win. And, for example, if the 1st BB win is carried over and a regular replay is won and stop symbol information corresponding to the 1st BB win and the 1st replay win is set, priority is set so that the 1st replay win takes priority over the 1st BB win.

Here, if a replay is won, the winning symbol combinations are set so that one of the winning replays is guaranteed to win. In other words, if a replay is won, a replay win is guaranteed, and no misses will occur. Therefore, if the stop symbol information for replays and bonuses is set, one of the set replays will always win, and a bonus win will never be achieved.

Furthermore, if multiple small wins or multiple replays result in a winning combination, which symbol corresponding to the small win or replay will stop on the active line depends on the timing of the stop operation. For example, if a strong watermelon is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 30th and 41st small wins is set, as described above, the target symbol on the left reel 32L for the 30th and 41st small wins is the same, the "watermelon" symbol. Therefore, the timing of the stop operation for the left reel 32L does not determine which small win will be achieved. On the other hand, the target symbols on the center reel 32M and right reel 32R for the 30th small win are both the "red bell" symbol, and for the 41st small win, the center reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol and the "black BAR" symbol, and the right reel 32R is the "watermelon" symbol. For example, in a 3-bet game, if the middle stop switch 43 is operated to stop the middle reel 32M when the fourth "watermelon" symbol through the seventh "red bell" symbol reach the middle row, both the seventh "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 30th minor win, and the "black BAR" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 41st minor win, can be stopped in the middle row on the active line. In this case, in this embodiment, the stop symbol information is set to prioritize stopping of symbols with fewer slips. As a result, in the above case, stop drive control is performed to stop the "red bell" symbol in the middle row, preventing the 41st minor win and allowing the 30th minor win.

On the other hand, if the middle stop switch 43 is operated to stop the 8th "black BAR" symbol through the 12th "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M when they reach the middle row, it will be possible to stop both the 8th "black BAR" symbol and the 11th "cherry" symbol, which are the target symbols for the 41st minor win, and the 12th "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 30th minor win, in the middle row. In this case, the stop symbol information is set to prioritize symbols with fewer slips, so the 8th "black BAR" symbol or the 11th "cherry" symbol will stop in the middle row, preventing the 30th minor win and allowing the 41st minor win.

The same is true for the right reel 32R; depending on the timing of the stop operation of the right stop switch 44, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbol with the least number of slips between the "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 30th minor win, and the "watermelon" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 41st minor win, will stop on the lower row, which is the active line. Note that if the right stop switch 44 is stopped when the 6th "first replay" symbol and the 7th "black BAR" symbol reach the active position on the right reel 32R, neither the "watermelon" symbol nor the "red bell" symbol will be able to stop, and in this case, no minor win will be achieved, resulting in a so-called missed win.

After executing the processing of step S315, the first section display processing is executed in step S316, and then the lottery processing ends. The first section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and the role ratio monitor 77, and this processing will be explained in detail later.

Next, the reel control process in step S212 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 18.

In the reel control process, first, in step S401, a spin effect process is performed. The spin effect process is a process for performing an effect using reel control during an invalid period, based on the results of the freeze lottery process performed in step S311 above. In the following step S402, a spin start process is performed to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

The spin start process checks whether a predetermined wait time (e.g., 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reels began spinning during the previous game. If not, the process waits until the wait time has elapsed. If the wait time has elapsed, the process resets the wait time for the next game and performs motor control initialization processing, which sets spin start information in the motor control storage area in RAM 106. By performing this processing, the stepping motor acceleration process is initiated in the stepping motor control process (step S106) of the timer interrupt process, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R begins spinning. Therefore, even if a player bets the required number of medals and operates the start lever 41, each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R may not immediately begin spinning. The process then waits until each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R begins spinning at a predetermined constant speed, and the spin start process ends. Additionally, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R reaches a constant speed, the CPU 102 lights up the lamps (not shown) of each stop switch 42-44 to notify the player that it is now possible to issue a stop command.

Following the spin start process, in step S403, it is determined whether any of the stop switches 42-44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42-44 have been operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If it is determined that one of the stop switches 42-44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, where it is determined whether the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel has been operated, i.e., whether a stop command has been issued. If a stop command has not been issued, the process returns to step S403, where it waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If a stop command has been issued, a stop command command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to indicate which stop switch was operated to issue the stop command. If a stop command command has been set, the stop control process shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the spinning reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position (the lower row in this embodiment) at the time the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time the reel index sensor detection signal is input. In the following step S407, the number of reel slips to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, five stop patterns are available for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when the stop switches 42-44 are operated: a stop pattern in which the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as is; a stop pattern in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding one symbol; a stop pattern in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding two symbols; a stop pattern in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding three symbols; and a stop pattern in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding four symbols. Therefore, in step S407, a value between 0 and 4 is calculated as the slip count based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. Then, in step S408, the calculated slip count is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol that will actually stop at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol on the reel to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal. If they are equal, a reel stop process is performed in step S410 to stop the reel rotation. Then, in step S411, it is determined whether all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. If all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have not stopped, a second stop information setting process is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process for changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of RAM 106 after the reels have stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set win flag and the stop outcome of the stopped reels. In this slot machine 10, for example, if a win occurs when IV = 23 to 30, that is, if a win occurs on sequential push bell 1, sequential push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, center push bell 1, center push bell 2, right push bell 1, and right push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order bells") (see Figure 17), the second stop information setting process is performed to change the winning pattern established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command.

Figure 19 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order in which stop switches 42-44 are operated, and the winning patterns that are achieved. For example, if center push bell 1 is won, stop information is set so that the second, seventh, or ninth small win will be achieved if the left stop switch 42 is operated first; stop information is set so that the first small win will be achieved if the middle stop switch 43 is operated first; and stop information is set so that the second, seventh, or ninth small win will be achieved if the right stop switch 44 is operated first. However, even when stop information is set in this way, the corresponding win may not be achieved depending on the operation timing of stop switches 42-44.

A brief description of the symbol arrangement on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R follows. In this slot machine 10, in a game state other than the CB state (a three-bet game), reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can slide up to four symbols from the timing of operation of stop switches 42-44 before stopping, with only the downward-sloping right line L4 set as the active line. Therefore, when symbols of the same type are arranged on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R with a spacing of four symbols or less between them, a winning symbol can be stopped on the active line regardless of the timing of operation of stop switch 43. On the other hand, for symbols arranged so that they form a section five symbols or more apart, the player must operate stop switches 42-44 while aiming at the symbol in order to stop it on the active line.

We will explain an example where center push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42, center stop switch 43, and right stop switch 44 are operated in that order. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop in order to achieve the second, seventh, or ninth small win.

The second minor win symbols on the left reel 32L are the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol. The "red bell" and "white bell" symbols also function as the seventh and ninth minor win symbols. The second minor win symbols on the left reel 32L are arranged so that the distance between adjacent second minor win symbols (between adjacent seventh minor win symbols and between adjacent ninth minor win symbols) is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol will stop on the top row regardless of the timing of the operation. For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated when the number four "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L has reached the middle row, the number seven "red bell" symbol will stop on the top row, as shown in Figure 20(a). As a result, there is still room for the second, seventh, or ninth small win to occur on the downward-sloping right line L4.

The second small win symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "white BAR" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "white BAR" symbol is located only at position 18. The seventh small win symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "red 7" symbol is located only at position 14. The ninth small win symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "cherry" symbol is located only at position 11. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, the second small win symbol, the seventh small win symbol, or the ninth small win symbol may stop on an active line, or none of the second small win symbol, the seventh small win symbol, or the ninth small win symbol may stop on an active line.

Specifically, if the middle stop switch 43 is operated when any of the "First Replay" symbols (numbered 13 through 17) reach the bottom row, the "White BAR" symbol, which is the second small win symbol, will stop in the middle row. As a result, there will be room for the second small win symbol to be achieved on the downward-sloping right line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated when any of the "Second Replay" symbols (numbered 9 through 13) reach the bottom row, the "Red 7" symbol, which is the seventh small win symbol, will stop in the middle row, as shown in Figure 20(b). As a result, there will be room for the seventh small win symbol to be achieved on the downward-sloping right line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated when any of the "White Bell" symbols (numbered 6 through 10) reach the bottom row, the "Cherry" symbol, which is the ninth small win symbol, will stop in the middle row. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at any other time, the second, seventh, and ninth small win symbols cannot be stopped in the middle row, even if the middle reel 32M is stopped after sliding four symbols. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at such a time, the number 2 "LUCKY" symbol or the number 6 "white bell" symbol will stop in the middle row.

If the 7th small win symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the 7th small win symbol can be achieved.

The seventh minor win symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white bell" symbol. The "white bell" symbol is located only at the number 10 position on the right reel 32R. Therefore, depending on the timing of operation of the right stop switch 44, the seventh minor win symbol may or may not stop on the active line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated when any of the "first replay" symbols (number 6) through the "white bell" symbol (number 10) has reached the bottom row, the seventh minor win symbol, the "white bell" symbol, will stop on the bottom row, as shown in Figure 20(c). As a result, a seventh minor win is achieved on the downward-sloping right line L4. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at any other time, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol will stop on the bottom row. For example, if the right stop switch 44 is operated when the No. 3 "Second Replay" symbol reaches the bottom row, the No. 4 "Watermelon" symbol will stop in the bottom row, as shown in Figure 20(d). The combination of the "Red Bell" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, and "Watermelon" symbol from the left is a transition result, as shown in Figure 11.

If the 9th minor winning symbol on the center reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the 9th minor winning symbol can be achieved.

The ninth minor winning symbol on the right reel 32R is a "Youth" symbol. The "Youth" symbol is located at position 15 on the right reel 32R. Therefore, depending on the timing of operation of the right stop switch 44, the ninth minor winning symbol may or may not stop on the active line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated when any of the "First Replay" symbols (number 11) through the "Youth" symbols (number 15) have reached the bottom row, the "Youth" symbol, which is the ninth minor winning symbol, will stop on the bottom row. As a result, the ninth minor winning symbol is achieved on the downward-sloping right line L4. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at any other time, the "Watermelon" symbol or the "First Replay" symbol will stop on the bottom row. The combination of the "White Bell" symbol ("Red Bell" symbol), "Cherry" symbol, and "Watermelon" symbol ("First Replay" symbol) from left to right results in a transition outcome, as shown in Figure 11.

When the second small win symbol on the center reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the second small win symbol can be achieved.

The second small win symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white BAR" symbol. The "white BAR" symbol is located at position 18 on the right reel 32R. Therefore, depending on the timing of operation of the right stop switch 44, the second small win symbol may or may not stop on the active line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated when any of the "watermelon" symbol (number 14) through the "white BAR" symbol (number 18) has reached the bottom row, the "white BAR" symbol, which is the second small win symbol, will stop on the bottom row. As a result, the second small win symbol is achieved on the downward-sloping right line L4. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at any other time, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol will stop on the bottom row. From left to right, the combination of "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "white BAR" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) is a transition result as shown in Figure 11.

If the second, seventh, and ninth small win symbols on the middle reel 32M do not stop in the middle row, i.e., if the "LUCKY" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the "watermelon" symbol or "first replay" symbol stops in the bottom row.

The "watermelon" and "first replay" symbols are arranged on the right reel 32R so that the distance between each "watermelon" and "first replay" symbol is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the "watermelon" or "first replay" symbol will stop on the bottom row regardless of the timing of the operation. The combination of the "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "LUCKY" symbol ("white bell" symbol), and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from left to right is a transition result, as shown in Figure 11.

In this way, if center push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → center stop switch 43 → right stop switch 44 are operated in this order, the second small win will be achieved, the seventh small win will be achieved, the ninth small win will be achieved, or the transition result will stop.

Next, we will explain an example where center push bell 1 is won and the center stop switch 43, left stop switch 42, and right stop switch 44 are operated in that order. In this case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop in order to achieve the first small win.

The "red bell" symbols, which are the first minor winning symbols, are arranged on the middle reel 32M so that the spacing between each "red bell" symbol is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "red bell" symbols will stop in the middle row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the left reel 32L, the first minor winning symbols, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol, are arranged so that the distance between each first minor winning symbol is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol will stop on the top row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the right reel 32R, the first minor winning symbols, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol, are arranged so that the distance between each first minor winning symbol is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated third, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol will stop on the bottom row regardless of the timing of the operation.

As described above, if center push bell 1 is won and the center stop switch 43, left stop switch 42, and right stop switch 44 are operated in this order, the first small win will be achieved regardless of the timing of the operations.

If the push order bell is won, and the stop switches 42-44 are operated in one or two predetermined operating sequences, the first small win will be achieved regardless of the timing of the operation. If the stop switches 42-44 are operated in any other operating sequence, a small win will be achieved or the transition result will stop on an active line depending on the timing of the operation. Incidentally, if the middle bell is won, the 38th small win will be achieved regardless of the operating sequence or timing, and if the no-question bell is won, the first small win will be achieved regardless of the operating sequence or timing.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S411 that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process for setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that a winning combination of symbols is lined up on an active line. In the payout determination process, the symbol combination formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the symbols stopped on the lower rows of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and it is determined whether a winning combination has been formed on the active line. If a winning combination has been formed, it is further determined whether the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the win flag storage area 106a. If the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the payout amount corresponding to the winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the win flag, the slot machine 10 enters an error state and an error notification process is performed. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After the payout determination process is performed, the winning result response process is performed in step S414. This winning result response process involves processes such as transitioning the game state based on the winning result. This winning result response process will be explained in detail later.

After the winning result processing is performed, the second section display processing is executed in step S415. The second section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and this processing will be explained in detail later. Next, in step S416, random number acquisition processing is executed to acquire a random number to be used in the display mode transition lottery. The random number acquisition seed processing will also be explained in detail later. Thereafter, in step S417, a winning result command is set to allow the display control device 81 to determine the winning combination for this game, and the reel control processing is terminated.

Next, we will provide an overview of the medal payout process in step S213.

The medal payout process determines whether the payout number set in the payout information storage area is 0. If the payout number is 0, this means that the previous payout determination process determined that no small wins were achieved. In such a case, based on the winning combinations set in the payout determination process, it is determined whether any of the 1st to 8th replay wins have been achieved. If none of the replay wins have been achieved, the medal payout process ends. If any of the replay wins has been achieved, the replay setting process is performed to change the game state to a replay state, and the medal payout process ends. Note that in the start waiting process (step S204) described earlier, if it is determined that the current game state is a replay state, the automatic insertion process is performed.

On the other hand, if the payout number set in the payout information storage area is not 0, medals equal to the payout number are paid out, and the medal payout process ends. Specifically, when the credit counter count has not reached its upper limit (50 medals stored), the payout number is added to the credit counter count, and the resulting value is displayed on the credit display unit 60. If the credit counter count has reached its upper limit, or if the count reaches its upper limit while adding the payout number, the medal payout rotating plate is driven, and medals are paid out from the hopper device 51 to the medal tray 50 via the medal discharge port 49. The medal payout process also involves changing the payout number displayed in the payout number display unit 62 in accordance with the medal payout. If the current game state is BB, the payout number is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter (described below), and the remaining payout number displayed in the remaining payout number display unit 61 is also subtracted.

Next, the RT state processing in step S214 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 21.

In step S501, it is determined whether the gaming state is the fourth RT state by checking whether the fourth RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of RAM 106. If the gaming state is the fourth RT state, the process proceeds to step S502, where a subtraction process is performed for the fixed number of RT games. As will be explained in detail later, the fourth RT state is a RT state in which the number of games that can be played is predetermined, and the process of step S502 is a process for subtracting the number of remaining games that can be played. In the following step S503, based on the result of the process of step S502, it is determined whether the number of remaining games that can be played in the fourth RT state has become 0. If it has become 0, the fourth RT setting flag is cleared in step S504, and then the RT state process is terminated. By performing the process of step S504, the gaming state transitions to the normal gaming state. If a negative determination is made in step S503, the RT state process is terminated. In this case, the fourth RT state continues.

If a negative judgment is made in step S501, a determination is made in step S505 as to whether the transition result has stopped on an active line. If the transition result has stopped, the process proceeds to step S506, where a determination is made as to whether the current gaming state is a normal gaming state. If the current gaming state is a normal gaming state, a first RT setting flag is set in the status information storage area 106c of RAM 106 in step S507. This processing then terminates. If a determination is made in step S505 that the transition result has not stopped on an active line, the process proceeds to step S508, where a determination is made as to whether a second replay win has been achieved, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout judgment processing. If a second replay win has been achieved, the RT setting flag set in the status information storage area 106c is cleared in step S509, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S507. This processing then terminates. Furthermore, if the transition result stops on an active line in a game state other than the fourth RT state or the normal game state, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S509, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S507, and this process ends.

If the first RT setting flag is set in step S507, the game state transitions to the first RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the first RT state based on the fact that the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table for the first RT state is selected.

Figure 22 is a lottery table for the first RT state selected in the first RT state of "Setting 3." When compared to the lottery table for the normal game state (see Figure 17), the lottery table for the first RT state has different point values PV for IV = 1 to 5, with the same point values PV set for other index values IV. Therefore, when using this lottery table to determine whether a winning combination will be achieved, the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 58 is equal to the respective winning probabilities in normal game state; the probability of winning when IV = 1 is approximately 1 in 67.0, and the probability of winning when IV = 2 to 5 is approximately 1 in 32.8. The probability of losing, i.e. not winning any combination, is approximately 1 in 1.94.

Here, as shown in FIG. 22, if a win occurs when IV = 1, it is a normal replay win; if a win occurs when IV = 2, it is a first promotion replay 1 win; if a win occurs when IV = 3, it is a first promotion replay 2 win; if a win occurs when IV = 4, it is a first promotion replay 3 win; and if a win occurs when IV = 5, it is a first promotion replay 4 win. The probability of winning when IV = 1 to 5 is approximately 1 in 7.30. The probability of winning a normal replay under normal gaming mode is also approximately 1 in 7.30. In other words, when the gaming mode transitions to the first RT mode, the winning probability for each of the roles of small win, replay, and bonus is the same as in normal gaming mode, but the winning pattern for awarding the replay privilege changes to one different from that under normal gaming mode. More specifically, in normal game mode, only the first replay win, which does not result in a transition to the game mode, is achieved, and in the first RT mode, in addition to the first replay win, a third replay win, which results in a transition to the second RT mode, is achieved.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), in addition to when the above-mentioned push order bell is won, when First Promotion Replay 1 to First Promotion Replay 4 are won, stop information is set to change the winning pattern that is achieved depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command.

Figure 23(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles, the operation sequence of stop switches 42-44, and the winning patterns that are achieved. When First Promotion Replay 1 to First Promotion Replay 4 are won, unlike when the push order bell is won, the first replay win or third replay win is always achieved regardless of the operation timing of stop switches 42-44. For First Promotion Replay 1 to First Promotion Replay 4, one of the six operation sequences is associated with the third replay, and the other operation sequences are associated with the first replay.

In addition, in the first promotion replays 2 to 4, in addition to the first and third replays, the sixth, seventh, and eighth replays are also assigned as winning combinations. However, these sixth to eighth replays are not associated with any of the six operation sequences mentioned above. Therefore, even if the sixth to eighth replays are winning combinations in the first promotion replays 2 to 4, they will not win, regardless of the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44.

More specifically, for First Promotion Replays 1-4, First Promotion Replay 1 is assigned the first replay and the third replay, First Promotion Replay 2 is assigned the sixth replay in addition to the first replay and the third replay, First Promotion Replay 3 is assigned the seventh replay in addition to the first replay and the third replay, and First Promotion Replay 4 is assigned the eighth replay in addition to the first replay and the third replay, but for any of First Promotion Replays 1-4, the winning replay is either the first replay or the third replay. This is to make it difficult to understand the sequence of operations required to achieve a third replay win. In other words, for example, if there is only one type of first promotion replay, there will also be only one type of operation sequence corresponding to the third replay win, and when the first promotion replay is won, it may be possible to intentionally achieve the third replay win. Note that this relationship is not limited to the relationship between first promotion replays 1 to 4, and the same can be said for other overlapping roles.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state processing, if it is determined in step S508 that a second replay win has not been achieved, the process proceeds to step S510, where it is determined whether a third replay win has been achieved based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If a third replay win has been achieved, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S511, and the second RT setting flag is set in step S512, terminating this processing.

If the second RT setting flag is set in step S512, the game state transitions to the second RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the second RT state based on the fact that the second RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table for the second RT state is selected.

Figure 24 shows the lottery table for the second RT state selected in the second RT state of "Setting 3." Compared to the lottery table for the first RT state (see Figure 22), the lottery table for the second RT state has different point values PV for IV = 1 to 10, with the same point values PV set for other index values IV. Therefore, when using this lottery table to determine whether a winning combination is a winning combination, the probability of winning when IV = 11 to 58 is equal to the winning probability in the first RT state. The probability of winning when IV = 1 is approximately 1 in 11.0, the probability of not winning when IV = 2 to 5, the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 8 are approximately 1 in 15.5, and the probability of winning when IV = 9 and 10 are approximately 1 in 8.90. The probability of losing, i.e., not winning any combination, is approximately 1 in 150. In other words, when the game transitions to the second RT state, the probability of a miss is lower than in the normal game state and the first RT state, giving the player an advantage. Also, in the second RT state, in addition to the first replay win, which does not result in a transition to the game state, the second replay win, which transitions to the first RT state, and the fourth and fifth replay wins, which transition to the third RT state, are possible.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), in addition to the above-mentioned cases where the first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4 are won, stop information is set to change the winning pattern that is achieved depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command, even when the fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, second promotion replay 1, or second promotion replay 2 is won.

Figure 23(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles, the order in which stop switches 42-44 are operated, and the winning patterns that result. If Fall Replay 1 to Fall Replay 3 are won, the first replay win or the second replay win will always be achieved, regardless of the timing of stop switches 42-44 operation. If Second Promotion Replay 1 is won, either the first replay win, the fourth replay win, or the fifth replay win will always be achieved, regardless of the timing of stop switches 42-44 operation. If Second Promotion Replay 2 is won, either the first replay win or the fourth replay win will always be achieved, regardless of the timing of stop switches 42-44 operation.

The numbers assigned to the 4th replay in the diagram correspond to the symbol combination that results in the 4th replay winning. "1" corresponds to the symbol combination that results in a scatter, and "2" corresponds to the symbol combination that results in a red 7, red 7, and black BAR stopping in the middle row (see Figure 11). For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated first when the 2nd promotion replay 1 is won, the symbol combination that results in a scatter will stop, resulting in the 4th replay winning, or the symbol combination that results in a red 7, red 7, and black BAR stopping in the middle row will stop, resulting in the 4th replay winning.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state processing, if it is determined in step S510 that a third replay win has not been achieved, the process proceeds to step S513, where it is determined whether a fourth replay win or a fifth replay win has been achieved, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If a fourth replay win or a fifth replay win has been achieved, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S514, and the third RT setting flag is set in step S515, terminating this processing.

If the third RT setting flag is set in step S515, the game state transitions to the third RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the third RT state based on the fact that the third RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table for the third RT state is selected.

Figure 25 shows the lottery table for the third RT state selected in the third RT state of "Setting 3." Compared to the lottery table for the second RT state (see Figure 24), the lottery table for the third RT state differs in the point values PV for IV = 9-12, while the same point values PV are set for other index values IV. Therefore, when using this lottery table to determine whether a winning combination will result, the probability of winning when IV = 1-8 and 13-58 is equal to the respective winning probabilities in the second RT state, while winning is not achieved when IV = 9 or 10, and the probability of winning when IV = 11 or 12 is approximately 1 in 7.00. The probability of losing, i.e., not winning any combination, is approximately 1 in 150. In other words, when the gaming state transitions to the third RT state, the winning probability for each combination of small combinations, replays, and bonuses is the same as in the second RT state, but the winning pattern for awarding the replay bonus changes to one different from the second RT state. More specifically, in the third RT state, in addition to the first replay win, which does not result in a transition to the game state, and the second replay win, which results in a transition to the first RT state, the sixth replay win, the seventh replay win, and the eighth replay win, which do not result in a transition to the game state, and the third replay win, which results in a transition to the second RT state, are achieved.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), even if BAR Replay 1 or BAR Replay 2 is won, stop information is set to change the winning pattern that is achieved depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42-44 that generated the stop command.

Figure 23(c) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order in which stop switches 42-44 are operated, and the winning patterns that result. If BAR Replay 1 is won, regardless of the timing of stop switches 42-44 operation, one of the following will always be achieved: 1st Replay Win, 6th Replay Win, 7th Replay Win, or 3rd Replay Win. If BAR Replay 2 is won, regardless of the timing of stop switches 42-44 operation, one of the following will always be achieved: 1st Replay Win, 6th Replay Win, 8th Replay Win, or 3rd Replay Win.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state processing, if it is determined in step S513 that the 4th replay win or the 5th replay win has not been achieved, the process proceeds to step S516, where it is determined whether the 11th replay win or the 12th replay win has been achieved, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If neither the 11th replay win nor the 12th replay win has been achieved, the RT state processing ends. If the 11th replay win or the 12th replay win has been achieved, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S517, the 4th RT setting flag is set in step S518, and the fixed RT game number setting process is executed in step S519, after which the process ends. Step S519 is the process of setting the number of games that can be played in the 4th RT state. Specifically, in step S519, a specified value (e.g., 10) is input to the fixed RT counter provided in the various counter area 106e. In step S502 above, the fixed RT counter is decremented, and when the counter reaches 0, processing to end the fourth RT state is executed in step S503.

Next, the bonus state processing in step S215 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 26.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a bonus state, i.e., whether the current gaming state is a BB state or a CB state. If the current gaming state is not a bonus state, the bonus determination process shown in steps S602 to S613 is performed.

In the bonus determination process, step S602 determines whether any of the first BB win flag, second BB win flag, or CB win flag is set. If any of the win flags is set, proceed to step S603, where it is determined whether a CB win has occurred based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If a CB win has occurred, step S604 sets a CB setting flag in the status information storage area 106c. In step S605, the remaining payout counter, which is provided in the status information storage area 106c and counts the number of medals remaining that can be paid out during the bonus state, is set to 15. By performing steps S604 and S605, the game state transitions to CB state.

Here, we will briefly explain CB and CB states.

A CB win occurs when the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon," "First Replay," or "Black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line. The CB symbols are positioned on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R so that the spacing between them is four symbols or less. Therefore, if a CB win occurs, the CB win occurs regardless of the order or timing of operation of the stop switches 42-44.

When the CB setting flag is set in the status information storage area 106c, the main control device 101 determines that the game status is CB status. Then, in step S205 of the normal processing, it determines whether the number of medals bet has reached "2" instead of "3," and in the active line setting processing (step S209), it sets the bottom line L3 and the right-downward line L4 as active lines.

In step S302 of the lottery process, a lottery table for the CB state is selected. While the CB state lottery table is not shown, in the CB state lottery table, the point value PV for IV = 1 to 52 is set to "0," and the point value for IV = 55 to 58 is set to "16384" (see Figure 17, etc. for the correspondence between IV and winning roles). Therefore, in the CB state, the probability of winning CB small/medium role 1 (the probability of winning when IV = 55) is approximately 1 in 4.00, the probability of winning CB small/medium role 2 (the probability of winning when IV = 56) is approximately 1 in 4.00, the probability of winning CB small/medium role 3 (the probability of winning when IV = 57) is approximately 1 in 4.00, and the probability of winning CB small/medium role 4 (the probability of winning when IV = 58) is approximately 1 in 4.00. No losing events occur.

Figure 27(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the operation order of stop switches 42-44, and the winning patterns that are achieved. While detailed explanations are omitted, regardless of the order and timing of operation of stop switches 42-44, whether CB small/medium combination 1 to CB small/medium combination 4 is won, some kind of small combination win will always be achieved. Because CB state is a two-bet game, if the first small combination win, the 27th small combination win, the 31st small combination win, or the 36th to 38th small combination wins are achieved, 15 medals will be paid out. If the second to 26th small combination wins, the 28th to 30th small combination wins, or the 32nd to 35th small combination wins are achieved, 14 medals will be paid out. In other words, when the game transitions to CB state, 14 or 15 medals will always be paid out.

In addition to or instead of CB as a winning combination and the CB state as a game state, a single bonus (SB) may be provided, which allows one game (JAC game) to be played as a winning combination, and an SB state to which a player transitions based on the winning of the single bonus (winning).

Returning to the explanation of the bonus state processing, if it is determined in step S603 that a CB win has not been achieved, this means that a bonus win flag other than CB has been set. In such a case, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S608, and it is determined in step S609 whether a first BB win or a second BB win has been achieved.

If any of the BB wins is achieved, the BB win flag set in the win flag storage area 106a of RAM 106 is cleared in step S610, and a BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S611. Then, in step S612, the remaining payout counter is set to 216, and 216 is displayed in the remaining payout display unit 61. The value set in step S612 corresponds to the upper limit payout number in the BB state, and the BB state ends when medals equal to or greater than this value have been paid out in the BB state.

By performing steps S610 to S612, the game state transitions to BB state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, the current game state is determined to be BB state based on the BB setting flag being set in the state information storage area 106c, and the corresponding BB state lottery table is selected.

Figure 28 shows the lottery table for the first BB state, which is selected in the first BB state to which a player transitions upon winning the first BB prize, and the lottery table for the second BB state, which is selected in the second BB state to which a player transitions upon winning the second BB prize. In the lottery table for the first BB state and the lottery table for the second BB state, the point value PV for IV = 1 to 14, 22 to 30, and 34 to 58 is set to "0." Therefore, in either the first BB state or the second BB state, these IV = 1 to 14, 22 to 30, and 34 to 58 do not result in a win. Furthermore, in the lottery table for the first BB state and the lottery table for the second BB state, the point values for IV = 19-21 and 31-33 are set to the same point values in both tables, and in both the first BB state and the second BB state, the probability of winning Chance A with IV = 19 is approximately 1 in 65.5, the probability of winning Chance B with IV = 20 is approximately 1 in 65.5, the probability of winning the middle bell with IV = 21 is approximately 1 in 1,310, the probability of winning the first role in BB with IV = 31 is approximately 1 in 2.12, the probability of winning the second role in BB with IV = 32 is approximately 1 in 13.1, and the probability of winning the third role in BB with IV = 33 is approximately 1 in 13.1.

On the other hand, in the lottery table for the first BB state and the lottery table for the second BB state, different point values are set for IV = 15 to 18, and the probability of winning a strong cherry with IV = 15 is approximately 1 in 21.8 in the first BB state, while it is approximately 1 in 93.6 in the second BB state, making it easier to win a strong cherry in the first BB state than in the second BB state. Furthermore, the probability of winning a weak cherry with IV = 16 is approximately 1 in 6.56 in the first BB state, while it is approximately 1 in 26.2 in the second BB state, making it easier to win a weak cherry in the first BB state than in the second BB state.

The probability of winning a strong watermelon with IV=17 is approximately 1 in 93.6 in the first BB state, but approximately 1 in 21.8 in the second BB state, making it easier to win a strong watermelon in the second BB state than in the first BB state. Furthermore, the probability of winning a weak cherry with IV=18 is approximately 1 in 26.2 in the first BB state, but approximately 1 in 6.56 in the second BB state, making it easier to win a weak watermelon in the second BB state than in the first BB state.

In other words, in the first BB state and second BB state, the probability of winning a lottery result that results in a so-called rare combination, such as a strong cherry or a strong watermelon, is higher than in the normal game mode or other states such as the first RT state to the third RT state. Furthermore, when comparing the first BB state and the second BB state, it is set so that it is easier to win a strong cherry or a weak cherry in the first BB state than in the second BB state, and easier to win a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon in the second BB state than in the first BB state.

In addition, strong cherries, weak cherries, strong watermelons, weak watermelons, etc. are awarded based on the timing of operation of stop switches 42-44. If the switches are operated at a timing that does not correspond to a winning combination, the winning combination will not be awarded and the player will miss out.

Figure 27(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles, the operation sequence of stop switches 42-44, and the winning mode that can be achieved. As mentioned above, the first small win is a winning mode that can be achieved regardless of the operation timing of stop switches 42-44. Therefore, if the first role in BB is won, either the first small win, the 39th small win, or the 40th small win will always be achieved, regardless of the operation sequence and operation timing of stop switches 42-44. In contrast, for the second role in BB and the third role in BB, the first small win is associated with four of the six operation sequences, and the 40th and 41st small wins are associated with two of the six operation sequences. In other words, for the second or third role in BB, if the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 matches the first small role, the first small role win is achieved, and if the operation order matches the 40th or 41st small role, the 40th or 41st small role win is achieved instead of the first small role. In a 3-bet game in BB state, if the first or 40th small role win is achieved, nine medals are paid out, and if the 41st small role win is achieved, three medals are paid out. In other words, if the first role in BB is won, the first small role win is achieved regardless of the operation order, and nine medals are paid out, and if the second role in BB is won, the first or 40th small role win is achieved depending on the operation order, and nine medals are paid out. If the third role in BB is won, either the first or the 41st small role will be won depending on the operation order. If the first small role is won, nine medals will be paid out, and if the 41st small role is won, three medals will be paid out. In other words, for the third role in BB, the number of medals paid out will differ depending on the operation order of stop switches 42-44.

If a negative judgment is made in step S609 and any BB win has been achieved, a carryover command is set in step S613. The carryover command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to indicate that a bonus win has not been achieved in the bonus winning game and a so-called carryover state has occurred. This carryover command is output to the display control device 81 in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process.

As already explained, in games played in the carryover state, the ability to win other bonuses is restricted. More specifically, in the lottery table for the normal play state (Figure 17), if a combination of bonuses (1st BB, 2nd BB, CB) with IV = 34 to 51 is won, the win flags corresponding to these bonuses will not be set. Therefore, for example, if a combination of minor bonuses or replay with IV = 34 to 51 is won, the win flags for these minor bonuses and replay will be set, but the win flags corresponding to the bonuses will not be set, and only the minor bonus win will be valid. In other words, the carryover state can be said to be a state in which the ability to win bonuses is restricted.

If the game state transitions to the CB state or the BB state, a positive determination is made in step S601, and an end determination process is performed in step S614. In the end determination process, it is determined whether the value of the remaining payout counter has reached 0, and if it has reached 0, the CB setting flag or the BB setting flag is cleared. Furthermore, in the end determination process, if the BB setting flag is cleared, an end flag is set, indicating that the BB state has ended for this game. This end determination process will be explained in detail later.

As shown in steps S602 to S614, when a CB win occurs and a CB win is achieved, the CB setting flag is set without clearing the RT setting flag. Therefore, when the CB setting flag is cleared, i.e., when the CB state ends, the game state at the time the CB win occurred will be restored. For example, if a CB win occurs during normal game mode, the game will return to the normal game mode after the CB state ends, and if a CB win occurs during the third RT state, the game will return to the third RT state after the CB state ends. On the other hand, when the first BB or second BB is won, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S608 regardless of whether the corresponding BB win occurred. Therefore, when the BB setting flag is cleared, i.e., when the BB state ends, the game will transition to the normal game mode even if a first BB win occurs during the second RT state. If the game transitions to CB mode, the player can expect to receive an increase of 13 (= 15 - 2) or 25 (= 14 - 2 + 15 - 2) medals before the CB mode ends. If the game transitions to BB mode, the player can expect to receive an increase of up to 144 (= 9 x 24 - 3 x 24) medals before the BB mode ends.

As described above, if a strong cherry or strong watermelon is won in BB state, the winning combination may not be achieved depending on the timing of operation of the stop switches 42-44. If a winning combination is not achieved, no medals will be paid out for that game. Furthermore, if the third combination during BB is won, either nine or three medals will be paid out depending on the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44. In other words, if a maximum payout limit is set in BB state (step S216) and nine medals are paid out per game, a maximum increase of 144 medals can be expected, as described above. While the BB state ends after 24 games, depending on the lottery results for each game in BB state and the timing and order of operation of the stop switches 42-44 for that game, the number of medals increased when the maximum payout limit is reached may be less than the maximum number, or the number of games played until the maximum payout limit is reached may be greater.

If none of the first BB win flag, second BB win flag, or CB win flag is set (NO in step S602), if none of the first BB win, second BB win, or CB win is achieved and a carryover command is set (step S613 is executed), if a predetermined value is set in the remaining payout counter in steps S605 and S612, or if an end determination process is performed in step S614, the process proceeds to step S606 and sets a status command. Here, a status command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to indicate the game status at the end of the game (i.e., the game status of the next game). In step S606, a status command corresponding to the setting flag set in the status information storage area 106c is set. After setting the status command, in step S607, an external signal setting process is performed to set an external signal to be output from the external centralized terminal board 121 to the outside of the slot machine 10. This process then ends.

<Overview of game state transitions and display modes>
Here, the transition of the gaming state will be explained using Figure 29. Note that the CB state is not shown in the figure.

If the game state is BB state, when the number of medals paid out in that BB state reaches 216, the BB state ends and the game state transitions to the normal game state.

When the game state is in the normal game state, the game state transitions to the first RT state when the transition result stops on an active line, and the game state transitions to the BB state when a BB win is achieved. The transition result stops on an active line when a miss occurs in a game in which the push order bell is won. In the lottery process using the normal game state lottery table, the first promotion replays 1 to 4, which trigger a transition to the second RT state, the second promotion replays 1 and 2, which trigger a transition to the third RT state, and the transition replays 1 and 2, which trigger a transition to the fourth RT state, are not won, so the game does not transition from the normal game state to the second RT state to the fourth RT state (see Figure 17).

When the gaming state is in the first RT state, the establishment of a third replay win causes the gaming state to transition to the second RT state. The third replay win occurs when one of the first promotion replays 1 to 4 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined sequence (see Figure 23(a)). Furthermore, when the gaming state is in the first RT state, the establishment of an eleventh replay win or a twelfth replay win causes the gaming state to transition to the fourth RT state. As already explained, the fourth RT state is a fixed RT state with a fixed number of games. Therefore, even if the transition result stops in the fourth RT state, the state does not transition to the first RT state. In the lottery process using the first RT state lottery table, the second promotion replays 1 and 2, which trigger a transition to the third RT state, are not won, so the state does not transition from the first RT state to the third RT state.

However, in this embodiment, the first RT state is set so that transition replays 1 and 2, which trigger a transition to the fourth RT state, are not won. Therefore, there is no transition from the first RT state to the fourth RT state. In this embodiment, the system is set so that transition to the fourth RT state does not occur not only from the first RT state, but also from other game states. The fourth RT state will be explained in detail when explaining an embodiment in which the system is set so that this transition is possible.

If a BB win is not achieved in a game for which a BB win flag is set, i.e., if the BB win flag is carried over, the game state will transition to the normal game state, and if a BB win is achieved in a game for which a BB win flag is set, the game state will transition to the BB state.

When the game state is in the second RT state, the game state transitions to the third RT state when the fourth replay win or the fifth replay win is achieved. Furthermore, when the second replay win is achieved or when the transition result stops on an active line, the game state transitions to the first RT state. The fourth replay win and the fifth replay win are achieved when the second promotion replay 1 or second promotion replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the specified order of operation (see Figure 23 (b)). The second replay win is achieved when one of the fall replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the specified order of operation (see Figure 23 (b)). The transition result stops on an active line when a miss occurs in the game that wins the push order bell. In addition, if a BB win is not achieved in a game for which a BB win flag is set, i.e., if the BB win flag is carried over, the game state will transition to the normal game state, and if a BB win is achieved in a game for which a BB win flag is set, the game state will transition to the BB state.

When the game state is in the third RT state, the game state transitions to the second RT state when a third replay win is made. Furthermore, when a second replay win is made or when the transition result stops on an active line, the game state transitions to the first RT state. The third replay win is made when BAR Replay 1 or BAR Replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the specified order (see Figure 23(c)). The second replay win is made when any of Fall Replay 1 to Fall Replay 3 is won and the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the specified order (see Figure 23(b)). The transition result stops on an active line when a miss occurs in a game that wins the push order bell. In addition, if a BB win is not achieved in the game for which a win flag is set, i.e., if the BB win flag is carried over, the game state will transition to the normal game state, and if a BB win is achieved in the game for which a BB win flag is set, the game state will transition to the BB state.

In this slot machine 10, the main control unit 101 manages six gaming states: normal gaming state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, fourth RT state, BB state, and CB state. The main control unit 101 also manages five display modes, broadly classified as normal mode, AT mode (assist time mode), VB mode (virtual bonus mode, pseudo bonus mode), and BB mode.

Figure 30 shows the transitions between display modes.

BB mode is a display mode that is entered when the first or second BB win is achieved, and ends when the BB state ends. In other words, BB mode is a display mode that corresponds to the BB state. Therefore, when entering BB mode, players can expect to receive an increase of up to 144 medals.

When transitioning from normal mode to BB mode, a lottery to transition to AT mode may be held in that BB mode. If you win the lottery to transition to AT mode, you will transition to AT mode after BB mode ends. If you do not win the lottery to transition to AT mode, you will transition to normal mode after BB mode ends. When transitioning from AT mode to BB mode, you will return to AT mode after BB mode ends. When transitioning from VB mode to BB mode, you will return to VB mode after BB mode ends.

Normal mode is a display mode in which the operation order of stop switches 42-44 is not announced when the push order bell is won, or when 1st Promotion Replay 1 to 1st Promotion Replay 4, Fall Replay 1 to Fall Replay 3, 2nd Promotion Replay 1, 2nd Promotion Replay 2, BAR Replay 1, BAR Replay 2, Transition Replay 1, Transition Replay 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order replays") are won. In normal mode, a lottery is held to transition to AT mode. If the lottery to transition to AT mode is won, the system will transition from normal mode to AT mode. There is no transition from normal mode to VB mode.

Normal mode corresponds to each of the game states: normal game state, 1st RT state, 2nd RT state, 3rd RT state, 4th RT state, and CB state. However, in normal mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42-44 is not announced when the push order bell or push order replay is won, so transitions to the 2nd RT state to the 4th RT state are rare, and the game almost always corresponds to the normal game state or the 1st RT state. In normal mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state, 1st RT state, or 4th RT state, you can expect to lose approximately 1.59 medals per game, and if the game state at that time is the 2nd RT state to the 3rd RT state, you can expect to lose approximately 0.06 medals per game.

AT mode is a display mode in which the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44 is displayed when the push order bell is won or when the push order replay is won. AT mode is made up of four AT modes, LV.1 mode to LV.4 mode, which have different probabilities of transitioning to VB mode, and in all AT modes, the probability of transitioning to VB mode is higher than in normal mode. If the lottery for transitioning to VB mode is won, the game will transition from AT mode to VB mode. If a predetermined number of games (e.g., 50 times) have been played without winning the lottery for transitioning to VB mode, the game will transition from AT mode to normal mode.

LV.1 mode to LV.4 mode are set so that the probability of winning the lottery to transition to VB mode differs. More specifically, the probability of winning the lottery to transition to VB mode is set so that LV.4 mode has the highest probability of winning and LV.1 mode has the lowest probability of winning, with the probability of winning the lottery to transition to VB mode increasing in the order of LV.1 mode, LV.2 mode, LV.3 mode, and LV.4 mode.

AT mode corresponds to each of the following game states: normal game state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, fourth RT state, and CB state. However, in AT mode, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44 is notified when the push order bell is won or when the push order replay is won. Therefore, if the player operates the stop switches 42-44 in the notified operation sequence, it corresponds to the second RT state and the third RT state. In AT mode, if the game state at that time is normal game state, first RT state, or fourth RT state, the player can expect to gain approximately 0.61 medals per game. If the game state at that time is second RT state or third RT state, the player can expect to gain approximately 1.90 medals per game. Since AT mode continues for at least 50 games after the game state transitions to the second RT state, the player can expect to gain approximately 100 medals when transitioning to AT mode.

VB mode, like AT mode, is a display mode in which the operation sequence of stop switches 42-44 is announced when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won. The difference between VB mode and AT mode is that when the second promotion replay 1 or second promotion replay 2 is won, the operation sequence for achieving the first replay win is announced in AT mode, while the operation sequence for achieving the fourth replay win or fifth replay win is announced in VB mode (see Figure 23 (b)).

VB mode corresponds to each of the following game states: normal game state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, fourth RT state, and CB state. However, in VB mode, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44 is notified when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won. Therefore, VB mode corresponds to the third RT state when the player operates the stop switches 42-44 in the notified operation sequence. In VB mode, if the game state at that time is normal game state, first RT state, or fourth RT state, the player can expect to gain approximately 0.61 medals per game. If the game state at that time is second RT state or third RT state, the player can expect to gain approximately 1.90 medals per game. VB mode continues for at least 25 games after the game state transitions to the third RT state, so if the game state transitions to VB mode, the player can expect to gain approximately 50 more medals.

Explaining the transition of display modes when a player's owned medals increase, the typical flow is to transition from normal mode to AT mode, and then from AT mode back to normal mode. In AT mode, a lottery is held to transition to VB mode, so if a loop occurs in which the player transitions from AT mode to VB mode and then back to AT mode, the player can expect to increase their owned medals even more.

In addition, AT mode is set to LV.1 mode to LV.4 mode, and the probability of winning the lottery to transition to VB mode differs for each AT mode. When transitioning from normal mode to AT mode, the game generally transitions to LV.1 mode. In LV.1 mode, a lottery to transition to VB mode is held, and a lottery to transition to LV.2 mode is also held. If the lottery to transition to LV.2 mode is won, the game transitions to LV.2 mode, and the probability of winning the lottery to transition to VB mode increases. In LV.2 mode, a lottery to transition to VB mode is held, and a lottery to transition to LV.3 mode is also held. If the lottery to transition to LV.3 mode is won, the game transitions to LV.3 mode, and the probability of winning the lottery to transition to VB mode increases. In LV.3 mode, a lottery to transition to VB mode is held, and a lottery to transition to LV.4 mode is also held. If the lottery to transition to ATLV.4 mode is won, the game transitions to LV. 4 mode, and your chances of winning the lottery to transition to VB mode will increase.

Therefore, when switching to AT mode, the AT mode is promoted from LV.1 mode → LV.2 mode → LV.3 mode → LV.4 mode, which increases the probability of switching to VB mode, making it more likely that a loop between AT mode and VB mode will occur.

As described above, this slot machine 10 is configured so that players can increase their owned medals in each of the display modes: AT mode, VB mode, and BB mode. In conjunction with each display mode, multiple RT states and multiple states such as BB state and CB state are switched back and forth depending on the winning combinations of each replay or the stopping of transition results. As described above, when a push order replay win or push order bell win is won, the order in which stop switches 42-43 are operated determines whether the corresponding replay win is achieved or the transition result is stopped. Furthermore, in AT mode or VB mode, when a push order bell win is won, the order of operation that will result in the first minor combination win is announced, allowing players to expect to increase their owned medals.

When the display mode is AT mode or VB mode, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44 is announced when the push order bell or push order replay is won, as described above. When in normal mode, the operation sequence when the push order bell or push order replay is won is not announced. Therefore, from the perspective of whether or not the operation sequence when the push order bell or push order replay is won is announced, AT mode and VB mode are more advantageous to the player than normal mode. In other words, AT mode and VB mode are included in advantageous zones, which are zones in which the operation sequence is announced, changing the winning rate of small winning combinations, etc., and allowing the player to play in an advantageous situation. This slot machine 10 is configured so that a lottery for transitioning to AT mode is held by transitioning to an advantageous zone, and a transition to AT mode or VB mode can occur. In other words, a transition to AT mode or VB mode does not occur in normal zones, which are not advantageous zones.

Incidentally, while a lottery for transitioning to AT mode is held in advantageous zones, a lottery for transitioning to AT mode is not held in normal zones. Therefore, the state before transitioning to AT mode in advantageous zones or before winning AT mode can also be called chance zone mode (CZ mode), as it is a state in which transitioning to AT mode is more likely to occur.

The display mode configuration is explained below.

The display mode configuration can be broadly divided into (1) processing related to the display mode transition lottery, (2) processing for transitioning the game state based on the results of the display mode transition lottery, (3) processing for transitioning the display mode based on the winning result, and (4) processing related to the notification effects on the sub-side. These will be explained in order below.

<Processing for lottery for transitioning display modes>
<Lottery result processing>
The process related to the display mode transition lottery in (1) is performed in the lottery result response process (step S312) of the lottery process (FIG. 16) by the main control device 101. Hereinafter, the lottery result response process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S701, random number shift processing is performed. This processing is for random numbers used in AT mode lottery, and will be explained in detail later.

In the following step S702, it is determined whether the current game is in an advantageous zone by determining whether an advantageous zone flag has been set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. The advantageous zone flag is set based on winning the lottery for transitioning to an advantageous zone, including the above-mentioned AT mode and VB mode, and is cleared when the advantageous zone ends. If the advantageous zone flag has not been set, the process proceeds to step S703, where advantageous zone transition lottery processing is executed, and the lottery result response processing is then terminated.

In the advantageous zone transition lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 32, first, in step S801, the lottery results for the current game are determined. Then, in step S802, a favorable zone transition lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105. As shown in FIG. 39, the advantageous zone transition lottery table is set so that the transition rate to the advantageous zone (the probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery) varies depending on the lottery results for each game. As shown in FIG. 38, the trigger roles for the transition lottery to the advantageous zone are strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, Chance A, Chance B, and middle bell (hereinafter, collectively referred to as "transition trigger roles"). Regardless of the setting value, these transition trigger roles have the same set point value PV, and there is no difference in the winning probability. Furthermore, there is no difference in the winning probability of the advantageous zone transition lottery. In other words, the advantageous zone transition lottery is configured so that there is no difference in the winning probability for transition trigger roles with the same appearance rate, and the transition rate to the advantageous zone is common. By doing this, regardless of the settings of the gaming machines, of which there may be multiple machines installed in an amusement hall, players will have an equal chance of moving into the advantageous zone, eliminating inequality between players.

After obtaining the lottery table in step S802, a process for obtaining a random number for the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed in step S803. The random number for the advantageous zone transition lottery is generated using a dedicated counter in the various counter area 106e. This dedicated counter is updated at a predetermined interval, and the most recent updated value of the counter is obtained in step S803. Then, in step S804, an advantageous zone transition lottery is executed, and in step S805, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery has been won. If not, the lottery process is terminated. If the transition lottery has been won, in step S806, a process for setting the advantageous zone flag described above is executed. This process enables a positive determination to be made in step S702 of the lottery result response process (Figure 31) for the next game or later. In the following step S807, a process for setting an advantageous zone winning game flag is executed in the various flag storage area 106d. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine whether the transition lottery to the advantageous zone has been won in the current game. After executing the processing of step S807, this advantageous zone transition lottery process ends.

If it is determined in step S702 during the lottery result response processing that the advantageous zone flag is set, i.e., if the lottery for transitioning to the advantageous zone was won in the previous game or before, the process proceeds to step S704. In step S704, it is determined whether either the AT mode win flag or the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. The AT mode win flag is a flag that the CPU 102 uses to determine that the lottery for transitioning to AT mode has been won. It is set when the lottery for transitioning to AT mode is won and is cleared when transitioning to AT mode. The AT mode flag is a flag that the CPU 102 uses to determine that the display mode is AT mode. It is set when transitioning to AT mode and is cleared when AT mode finally ends (excluding transitions from AT mode to VB mode, specialized zone, or BB mode). If a negative determination is made in step S704, the first specific role process is executed in step S705.

<First specific winning combination process>
The first specific winning process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the first specific role processing, a transition lottery is held to determine whether or not to transition the display mode to AT mode. That is, in step S901, the lottery result for the current game is determined. Then, in step S902, an AT mode transition lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105. In the AT mode transition lottery table, the probability of transitioning to AT mode is set according to the type of lottery result (winning role).

Specifically, the mode lottery table for the advantageous zone stored in the various table storage area 105a is set so that the probability of winning each mode transition lottery varies depending on the current display mode and the type of game result that triggers the lottery.

Here, as shown in Figure 39, in addition to the transition trigger roles mentioned above, normal replays, push order replays, and push order bells are set as game results that trigger the mode transition lottery during the advantageous zone. In other words, the transition lottery to the advantageous zone is set so that there is no difference in the transition rate depending on the setting value, and the transition lottery is conducted based on the game results of so-called rare roles, which have a particularly low probability of winning. Meanwhile, for the transition lottery to AT modes and other modes included in the advantageous zone, there are chances of winning in addition to these rare roles, increasing the sense of anticipation for each game. In the following explanation, normal replays, push order replays, push order bells, and transition trigger roles are collectively referred to as "specific roles" as roles that trigger the lottery for the instruction functions during the advantageous zone.

In the AT mode transition lottery table, the probability of winning the transition lottery is set for each type of specific role. As shown in Figure 39, for example, if the specific role is a strong cherry, there is an approximately 51% probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery, while if the specific role is a weak cherry, there is an approximately 15% probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery. The lower the winning probability (appearance rate) for each game, the easier it is to win the AT mode transition lottery.

After obtaining the AT mode transition lottery table in step S902, processing is executed to obtain a random number for the AT mode transition lottery in step S903. In step S903, the random number for the AT mode transition lottery is obtained from the lottery information storage area 106f in RAM 106. The configuration of the lottery information storage area 106f and the processing for storing the random number for the AT mode transition lottery in this area 106f will be explained in detail later, but the processing for obtaining the random number for the AT mode transition lottery in step S903 differs from the configuration for obtaining the latest counter value at the time of the lottery, as in other lotteries (for example, the advantageous zone transition lottery).

Then, in step S904, an AT mode transition lottery is executed, and in step S905, it is determined whether or not the AT mode transition lottery has been won. If the AT mode transition lottery has been won, in step S906, a process is executed to set an AT mode win flag in the various flag storage area 106d. By setting the AT mode win flag, a positive determination is made in step S704 in the lottery result response process (Figure 31) described above. In the following step S907, it is determined whether or not the AT mode that has been won this time is SAT mode. SAT mode is an AT mode that starts after passing through the bonus-specialized zone. For example, if the initial number of games in the normal AT mode is 50, in SAT mode, the AT mode starts with the initial number of games of 50 plus the number of games added in the bonus-specialized zone. Therefore, the degree of advantage to the player differs between normal AT mode and SAT mode, and SAT mode is more advantageous to the player than AT mode.

The lottery for transitioning to SAT mode is held when the lottery for transitioning to AT mode is won (when the lottery processing in step S904 is won), and this lottery is held based on the transition lottery table for SAT mode, which is set according to the transition trigger role and the type of display mode. As shown in Figure 39, the transition lottery table for SAT mode indicates that the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to AT mode triggered by a strong watermelon is approximately 51%, and if the lottery for transitioning to SAT mode is won, there is an approximately 5% chance that the player will win.

If it is determined in step S907 that the SAT mode has been won, the process of setting the specialized zone win flag is executed in step S908. If a negative determination is made in step S907, or after the process of step S908 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S906. The processes of steps S909 to S912 are processes for setting the premonition mode.

Premonition mode is a mode in which winning indication effects suggesting that an AT mode or the like has been won are more likely to occur, and after each game in the premonition mode, a winning notification that an AT mode or the like has been won is made. The premonition mode lasts for 0 to 32 games, and the number of games that the premonition mode continues is set to vary depending on the type of AT mode or the like that has been won and whether or not a bonus has also been won. Note that if an AT mode or the like has been won at the same time as a bonus, a bonus winning notification is made after the premonition mode has been played, and after the bonus state has ended, a notification that an AT mode or the like has been won is made. Furthermore, if the number of premonition games is set to 0, a winning notification will be made without going through the premonition mode.

Specifically, in step S909, a process is first performed to retrieve a premonition game count table from the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105. As shown in FIG. 40, the premonition game count table is set up so that the number of premonition games selected varies depending on the display mode that is won. Specifically, for example, when the AT mode is won, 0 games are selected 30% of the time, 1 to 5 games are selected 60% of the time, and 6 to 10 games are selected 10% of the time. Meanwhile, when the SAT mode is won, 0 games are selected 10% of the time, 1 to 5 games are selected 70% of the time, 6 to 10 games are selected 10% of the time, and 11 to 20 games are selected 10% of the time. The number of premonition games is set up so that when the SAT mode, which is more advantageous for the player, is won, the number of premonition games is more likely to be higher.

In this embodiment, simultaneous wins of a bonus and an AT mode, etc. are not stipulated, but in a configuration in which simultaneous wins occur, the number of premonition games may be varied depending on whether or not simultaneous wins occur. The number of premonition games may also be varied depending on the game result that triggered the win.

In step S910, a process is performed to draw the number of games to be played in the current premonition mode based on the premonition game number table obtained in step S909 and the lottery counter obtained from the various counter areas 106e of RAM 106. The lottery counter for the premonition game number is updated at a predetermined interval, just like the random number (counter) for the advantageous zone transition lottery, and the most recent updated value of the counter is obtained and used in the lottery in step S910. In the following explanation, unless otherwise specified, the lottery random number (counter) used for other lotteries (e.g., VB mode transition lottery, AT mode additional lottery, additional game number lottery, specialized zone transition lottery, etc.) will also be configured in the same way as the random number (counter) for the advantageous zone transition lottery, and the most recent updated value will be obtained in the lottery.

Then, in step S911, a process is performed in which the number of premonition games is input into the premonition counter provided in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. The premonition counter is a counter that is decremented by one for each game, and when the premonition counter reaches 0, the premonition mode ends and a winning notification is issued indicating that the player has won the lottery to transition to AT mode, etc.

In step S912, a process is executed to set the premonition command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is the sub-side control device. The premonition command contains information on the lottery result that triggered the premonition mode and the number of premonition games. The processing on the display control device 81 side based on receiving the premonition command will be explained in detail later. After the processing of step S912 is executed, the first specific role processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S905 that the lottery to transition to AT mode has not been won, the first specific role processing is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result response processing (Figure 31), if a positive judgment is made in step S704, the process proceeds to step S706. In step S706, it is determined whether either the VB mode win flag or the VB mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. The VB mode win flag is set when the VB mode transition lottery is won, and is cleared when transitioning to VB mode. The VB mode flag is a flag used by the CPU 102 to identify that the display mode is VB mode, and is set when transitioning to VB mode and is cleared when VB mode ends. If a negative judgment is made in step S706, a second specific role process is executed in step S707. Furthermore, if a positive judgment is made in step S706, a third specific role process is executed in step S708.

<Second specific winning combination process>
The second specific winning process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The second specific role processing involves a lottery to determine whether to increase the number of AT mode jackpots, and whether to transition the display mode to VB mode or an additional jackpot special zone. "Adding" refers to adding (increasing) the number of continuing games (remaining number) in AT mode, etc., and the number of additional jackpots corresponds to the value added (increased) to the number of continuing games. The additional jackpot special zone indicates a state in which the number of continuing games in AT mode is highly likely to be increased over multiple games. The second specific role processing also involves a lottery to determine whether to advance the AT mode level, and also involves processing to increase the number of continuing games in AT mode.

That is, in step S1001, the AT mode level is determined. As already explained, in this embodiment, four AT mode levels, LV.1 mode to LV.4 mode, are provided, and the probability of transitioning to VB mode differs for each level. Therefore, step S1001 determines whether the current AT mode level is LV.1 mode to LV.4 mode.

In step S1002, a VB mode lottery table corresponding to the AT mode level determined in step S1001 is retrieved from the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105. In the VB mode lottery table, the probability of transitioning to VB mode is set according to the type of game result that triggers the lottery. As shown in FIG. 39, for example, between a strong cherry and a weak cherry, the probability of transitioning to VB mode is set higher for a strong cherry than for a weak cherry. Furthermore, in the VB mode lottery table for each level, the probability of transitioning to VB mode varies overall, and is set so that the probability of transitioning to VB mode is higher for LV.2 mode than for LV.1 mode, the probability of transitioning to VB mode is higher for LV.3 mode than for LV.2 mode, and the probability of transitioning to VB mode is higher for LV.4 mode than for LV.3 mode.

In step S1003, a VB mode transition lottery is performed using the table obtained in step S1002 and the random number (counter) for the lottery obtained from the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. Then, in step S1004, it is determined whether the lottery result of step S1003 corresponds to a VB mode win. If a positive determination is made in step S1004, a VB mode win flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106 in step S1005. Thereafter, in steps S1006 to S1009, processing for setting the number of premonition games is performed. That is, in step S1006, a premonition game number table is obtained, in step S1007, the number of premonition games is drawn, in step S1008, the number of premonition games is set, and in step S1009, the premonition command is set, and then the second specific role processing ends.

If it is determined in step S1004 that the result of the VB mode lottery process is not a VB mode win, proceed to step S1010. Steps S1010 to S1013 are processes for upgrading the AT mode level.

In step S1010, an AT mode promotion lottery process is performed. In this process, a promotion lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105, and a random number (counter) for the lottery is obtained from the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. Multiple promotion lottery tables are provided according to the AT mode level. Specifically, there are three tables for promotion lottery, one for LV.1 mode, one for LV.2 mode, and one for LV.3 mode (promotion lottery is not performed when the player is in LV.4 mode). Each table has a different winning probability for the promotion lottery depending on the type of game result that triggers the lottery. For example, between strong and weak cherries, the winning probability for strong cherries is set higher than that for weak cherries. Furthermore, the tables for each AT mode are set so that the promotion probability is lower in the LV.2 mode table than in the LV.1 mode table. The table for LV. 3 mode is set to have a lower promotion probability than the table for LV. 2 mode, and as the AT mode level increases, it becomes more difficult to advance to the next level.

In step S1011, it is determined whether the result of the lottery in step S1010 was a promotion win. If a promotion win was found, in step S1012, AT mode promotion processing is performed. In this processing, the level flag set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106 is rewritten from the level flag corresponding to the current AT mode level to the level flag one level higher. Then, in step S1013, a promotion command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The promotion command includes information about the AT mode to be promoted to. Upon receiving the promotion command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., to perform an AT mode effect for the promoted level. For example, a different background color effect is set depending on the AT mode level as the AT mode effect in the auxiliary display unit 65. When the display control device 81 receives the promotion command, it notifies the user that the AT mode level has been promoted and controls the display control device 81 to perform an AT mode effect with a background color corresponding to the promoted level.

If it is determined in step S1011 that the player has not won the promotion lottery, or after the processing of step S1013 has been executed, processing to add to the number of continuing games in AT mode is performed in steps S1014 to S1021.

That is, in step S1014, a lottery process for adding on the number of games in AT mode is performed. In this lottery process, a table for the AT mode add-on lottery is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105, and a random number (counter) for the lottery is obtained from the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. As shown in Figure 41, the table for the AT mode add-on lottery is set so that the probability of winning the add-on lottery varies depending on the type of lottery result.

In this embodiment, the lottery for adding the number of games in the AT mode is triggered by specific roles, including the push order bell, push order replay, and normal replay, as transition trigger roles. As shown in Figure 41, among the specific roles, the push order bell, push order replay (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order roles"), and normal replay are set to have a lower probability of winning the lottery for adding the number of games in the AT mode compared to the transition trigger role. Therefore, the appearance of a transition trigger role is more likely to result in an addition to the number of games in the AT mode than the appearance of a push order role or normal replay as the lottery result for each game. As a result, players are likely to proceed with the game based on this assumption, hoping to win the transition trigger role. On the other hand, the push order role and normal replay have a higher probability of winning in each game compared to the transition trigger role, and can be said to be relatively common game results. By configuring roles in this way, the presence of the push order role and normal replay as transition trigger roles is reduced, thereby increasing the surprise when an addition occurs. Furthermore, these opportunities for bonuses based on push order roles and normal replays are realistically possible during AT mode (more specifically, the probability of this occurring is such that it will occur once if you play the initial number of 50 games 2-3 times). This makes it possible to optimally generate unexpected bonuses, such as bonuses triggered by push order roles and normal replays like the ones mentioned above.

Then, in step S1015, it is determined whether or not the bonus lottery has been won. If it is determined that the bonus lottery has been won, in step S1016, it is determined whether or not the bonus win flag has been set. If the bonus win flag has not been set, the process proceeds to step S1017, where a lottery process for the number of bonus games in AT mode is performed. In this lottery process for the number of bonus games, a table for lottery for the number of bonus games in AT mode is obtained from the various table storage area 105a in ROM 105, and a random number (counter) for the lottery is obtained from the various counter area 106e in RAM 106. The table for lottery for the number of bonus games in AT mode is set so that the number of bonus games varies depending on the type of specific combination, as shown in FIG. 41. For example, a strong cherry adds 20 to 200 games to the AT mode, with the average number of bonus games being 30. Additionally, weak cherries add between 5 and 300 games, with the average number of added games being 20. While there are cases where a greater number of games is selected for weak cherries than for strong cherries, the average number of games is set to be greater for strong cherries.

In step S1018, processing is performed to add to the number of games played in AT mode. In this processing, a value corresponding to the number of additional games drawn in step S1017 is added to a counter that manages the number of games continued in AT mode (more specifically, an AT mode continuation counter provided in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106). In the following step S1019, processing is performed to notify the player that they have won the additional lottery and the number of games played.

<Additional notification processing>
Here, in this slot machine 10, a plurality of modes of notification of addition when an addition occurs to the number of continuing games in the AT mode are set. More specifically, as modes of notification of addition, there are a plurality of modes in which the game in which the addition is made is different, and there are set a case in which the addition is made in the game in which the addition occurred or in a series of games triggered by the game in which the addition occurred (also referred to as "immediate addition notification" in the following explanation), and a case in which the addition is made in a game after the game in which the addition occurred and the notification game is determined ex post (also referred to as "later addition notification" in the following explanation).

In the context of instant bonus notifications, a series of games triggered by a game in which bonuses were added refers to, for example, cases in which a premonition mode or a continuous effect occurs as a result of the game in which bonuses were added. A series of games refers to games that can continue over multiple games from the game in which bonuses were added. This series of games also includes cases in which continuous effects do not occur. For example, in cases in which a corresponding effect does not occur in the game in which bonuses were added, and a bonus notification occurs in the next game or multiple games later, the game in which bonuses were added and the games up until the bonus notification occurred are considered to be a series of games, and such bonus notification situations are also considered to be instant bonus notifications.

On the other hand, in the case of later bonus notifications, the notification game, which is a game that comes after the game in which the bonus occurred and is determined ex post, is different from the series of games in the above-mentioned immediate bonus notifications in that the notification timing is determined ex post as the AT mode progresses, such as a game near the end of the AT mode, rather than being determined in the game in which the bonus occurred. In other words, the notification game can be said to be a game that is set without being triggered by the game in which the bonus occurred.

With reference to Figure 42, we will now provide an overview of the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 for the immediate loading notification and later loading notification.

As described above, the immediate add-on notification notifies a portion of the number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. (number of remaining games in the advantageous zone, ZG), while the later add-on notification notifies the number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. later. If the number of games notified first is the display remaining number counter HG and the number of games notified later is the later add-on counter BG, the number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. (number of remaining games in the advantageous zone, ZG) will be equal to the sum of the display remaining number counter HG and the later add-on counter BG. The display remaining number counter HG is decremented by one each time a game is played, and the later add-on counter BG is not decremented even if a game is played unless a later add-on notification occurs.

As shown in Figure 42, in this embodiment, when the remaining number of games displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 (remaining number of games display ZGP) reaches a predetermined number (1) while the AT mode is being played, i.e., when the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined number (1), a later-add notification is generated. The later-add notification notifies the player that the number of games corresponding to the later-add counter BG (150 in the figure) has been added. In this case, the later-add counter BG is decremented by the notification amount (returning to 0 in the figure), and the display remaining number counter HG is updated by adding the amount notified by the later-add notification, and the remaining number of games display ZGP in the auxiliary display unit 65 also becomes a value corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG (150 in the figure after one game has been played).

In this way, when an additional win is won, if the later-addition notification is selected, a difference may occur between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. (number of remaining games in the advantageous zone ZG). On the other hand, if the immediate-addition notification is selected, no difference occurs between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. (number of remaining games in the advantageous zone ZG). In this slot machine 10, the later-addition counter BG is referenced when an additional win is won, and whether the later-addition notification or the immediate-addition notification is selected depends on the current value of the later-addition counter BG.

The add-on notification process in step S1019 above sets the game for which the add-on notification will be made, and if an add-on notification is to be made for that game, sets the timing for executing the add-on notification. That is, as shown in FIG. 35, first, in step S1101, a process is performed to determine the value of the add-on counter BG in the various counter area 106e. In the following step S1102, a notification game lottery process is executed. The notification game lottery process is a lottery process to determine whether the current add-on notification will be a add-on notification or an immediate add-on notification. In the notification game lottery process, a add-on lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to make a add-on notification based on the value of the add-on counter BG determined in step S1101.

As shown in Figure 43, the add-on lottery table is set up so that the probability of selecting the add-on notification varies depending on the value of the add-on counter BG and the type of specific role that triggered the add-on win. For example, when a strong cherry triggers an add-on, if the add-on counter BG is less than 30, there is a 20% chance that the add-on notification will be selected (80% chance that the immediate add-on notification will be selected), whereas if the add-on counter BG is between 30 and 100, there is a 10% chance that the add-on notification will be selected, and if the add-on counter BG is 100 or more, there is a 5% chance that the add-on notification will be selected. In other words, the higher the value of the add-on counter BG, the lower the selection rate of the add-on notification.

Furthermore, the types of specific roles that trigger additional wins are set so that the rate of selection of additional wins when the value of the additional win counter BG is small is higher for so-called normal roles (high probability trigger results, high probability results) that have a relatively high probability of winning, such as various push order replays and various push order bells, than for so-called rare roles (low probability trigger results, low probability results) that have a relatively low probability of winning, such as strong cherries, weak cherries, strong watermelons, and weak watermelons. More specifically, in the notification game lottery process triggered by various push order replays and various push order bells, when the additional win counter BG is less than 30, the additional win notification will be selected with a 100% probability.

As mentioned above, the add-on counter BG is decremented by the amount indicated by the add-on notification after the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, generally, as AT mode play progresses, the value of the add-on counter BG will often increase; conversely, in the early stages of AT mode play, the value of the add-on counter BG is likely to be 0 or a small value.

In other words, if an additional win occurs in the early stages of play in AT mode, there is a high probability that the later win notification will be selected. In particular, if an additional win occurs as a result of a normal role that is not a rare role, such as a push order replay or push order bell, the later win notification will always be selected in the early stages of AT mode. As a result, after the AT mode starts, the later win counter BG tends to fill up relatively quickly.

After executing the notification game lottery process in step S1102, it is determined in step S1103 whether or not a later-additional win has been made. If a later-additional win has not been made and immediate-additional win notification has been selected, in step S1104, a process is performed to add the current additional-additional winning game to the display remaining number counter HG provided in the various counter area 106e. Then, in step S1105, a notification timing setting process is executed to set the timing at which the additional-additional win notification will be made in the current game. The notification timing setting process is a process for setting the timing at which the additional-additional win notification will be made in the current game.

In a single game, the timing of the additional bonus notification is set to vary depending on the number of additional bonus games. Specifically, as shown in the execution timing table in Figure 44, the execution timing of the additional bonus notification in the current game is set to be when the first reel is stopped, when the second reel is stopped, and when the third reel is stopped, assuming that the stop operation order for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is the first reel, the second reel, and the third reel. Furthermore, the timing of the stop ON operation, which is when the stop switch 42-44 is pressed, and the stop OFF operation, which is when the pressing operation is terminated, are set.

Here, we will provide additional information about the operation of the stop switches 42-44. The stop switches 42-44 can be moved from an initial position, located at the frontmost position, to an operating position, located at the backmost position. When placed in the initial position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are in a LOW state. When the stop switches are moved from the initial position to the operating position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a switch from a LOW signal to a HIGH signal. The main control device 101 then determines that a stop ON operation has been performed, which means that a stop switch 42-44 has been pressed, based on the detection signal switching from a LOW signal to a HIGH signal.

The stop switches 42-44 are also biased toward their initial positions by springs or other means. Therefore, when you release your hand from the stop switches 42-44 and no longer apply the operating force (pressing force) that pushed them toward their operating positions, the biasing force of the springs or other means causes the stop switches 42-44 to return to their initial positions. In this case, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a switch from HI to LOW. When the detection signals switch from HI to LOW, the main control device 101 determines that the stop OFF operation has been performed, which means that the pressing of the stop switches 42-44 has ended.

The bonus notification is set to occur when each stop switch 42-44 is operated to either stop ON or stop OFF. In other words, in games where bonus notifications occur, the bonus effect can occur not only when a stop switch 42-44 is pressed, but also when the pressing operation ends.

In the timing table for executing the bonus notification, when a relatively small number of bonus games are added, for example 5 to 10 games, the timing when the stop ON operation for the first reel is performed is selected 5% of the time, the stop OFF operation for the first reel is selected 10%, the stop ON operation for the second reel is selected 15%, the stop OFF operation for the second reel is selected 20%, the stop ON operation for the third reel is selected 20%, and the stop OFF operation for the third reel (when all reels are stopped) is selected 30% of the time. In this case, the stop OFF operation for each reel is more likely to be selected than the stop ON operation, and the operation on the back is more likely to be selected.

On the other hand, when the number of added games is relatively large, for example, 100 or more games, the timing when the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected 5% of the time, the stop OFF operation of the first reel is selected 10%, the stop ON operation of the second reel is selected 5%, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is selected 30%, the stop ON operation of the third reel is selected 5%, and the stop OFF operation of the third reel (when all reels are stopped) is selected 45% of the time. In this case, too, the stop OFF operation of each reel is more likely to be selected than the stop ON operation, and the operation on the latter side is relatively more likely to be selected.

In other words, in this embodiment, the system is set up so that an additional bonus notification occurs more easily when the reels are turned off than when they are turned on. Furthermore, when comparing the first to third reels, the system is set up so that the third reel's stop operation (ON operation, OFF operation) is most likely to be selected, the second reel's stop operation is next most likely to be selected, and the first reel's stop operation is least likely to be selected.

In relation to the number of added games, the greater the number of added games, the easier it is to select the timing for the third reel stop OFF operation. In other words, if a player knows in advance that an added game notification will occur, and the added game notification does not occur by the time the third reel stop ON operation is performed, the player is likely to perform the third reel stop OFF operation, with high hopes that a large number of games will be added.

In step S1105, the execution timing of the additional bonus notification for the current game is set based on the execution timing table for the additional bonus notification. After that, this additional bonus notification process is terminated. In this case, information that the current additional bonus will be notified in the current game as an immediate additional bonus notification, and information regarding the execution timing of the additional bonus notification for the current game, are set in the additional bonus command in the additional bonus command set process (step S1020) executed following this additional bonus notification process. The display control device 81, which receives the additional bonus command containing this information, sets the additional bonus notification presentation based on this information. This process will be explained later.

If it is determined in step S1103 that the player has won the bonus lottery, the process proceeds to step S1106. In step S1106, the process adds the current number of bonus games to the bonus counter BG provided in the various counter area 106e. Then, in step S1107, the process sets the bonus flag in the various flag storage area 106d, and then the bonus notification process ends.

The later addition flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 to recognize that a later addition notification should be made when the value of the later addition counter BG is greater than 0 and the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined value. In this case, in the setting process of the add-on command that is executed following this add-on notification process, information that no add-on notification will be made in the current game is set in the add-on command. When the display control device 81 receives an add-on command containing this information, it controls so that no add-on notification will be made in the current game.

Returning to the explanation of the second specific role processing (Figure 34), after the processing for the additional bonus notification is executed in step S1019, processing is performed in step S1020 to set an additional bonus command including the processing result of the additional bonus notification processing as the target for output to the display control device 81, and then the second specific role processing is terminated. The additional bonus command includes information that an additional bonus has occurred, the number of additional bonus games, and the target for the additional bonus.

If the bonus win flag is set in step S1016, the process proceeds to step S1021. In step S1021, an AT mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106, and then the second specific combination process is terminated. The AT mode addition flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine that the conditions for adding the number of AT mode games have been met. As will be described in detail below, if the bonus ends while the AT mode addition flag is set, an AT mode addition is performed at the end of the bonus. In other words, the game in which the addition notification is made is set to differ depending on whether or not a bonus is won simultaneously.

If step S1015 determines that the additional lottery was not won, the process proceeds to step S1022. In step S1022, a lottery for transition to the specialized zone is executed. That is, if a specific combination is won during AT mode but the lottery for transition to VB mode or the lottery for additional game counts in AT mode is not won, a lottery for transition to the specialized zone is executed. In the specialized zone lottery process, a table for the specialized zone transition lottery is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105, and a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to transition the display mode to the specialized zone using a random number (counter) or the like for the lottery. As shown in Figure 39, the table for the specialized zone transition lottery is set so that the probability of winning the transition lottery varies depending on the type of specific combination. For example, a special zone transition lottery based on a strong cherry has a winning probability of approximately 5%, while a special zone transition lottery based on a weak cherry has a winning probability of approximately 0.8%. On the other hand, the special zone transition lottery based on strong watermelons has a winning probability of about 2%, while the special zone transition lottery based on weak watermelons has a winning probability of about 0.8%.

In step S1023, based on the processing result of step S1022, it is determined whether or not the lottery for transition to the specialized zone has been won. If the lottery has been won, in step S1024 a process is performed to set a specialized zone win flag in the various flag storage area 106d. Then, in step S1025 a process is performed to obtain the premonition game number table, in step S1026 a process is performed to draw the premonition game number, in step S1027 a process is performed to set the premonition game number, and in step S1028 a process is performed to set the premonition command, after which the second specific role processing is terminated. The processing of steps S1025 to S1028 is similar to the processing of steps S1006 to S1009, for example, and is processing for setting the premonition mode.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1023 and the player has not won any of the lottery for transitioning to VB mode, the lottery for adding more games to the AT mode, or the lottery for transitioning to the specialized zone, a pseudo-addition notification process is performed in step S1029, and then the second specific role processing is terminated. The pseudo-addition notification process is a process for maintaining a sense of anticipation by generating an effect similar to that which occurs when a player wins, even if the player has not won any of these lotteries.

<Third specific winning combination processing>
Next, the third specific combination process executed in step S708 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The third specific role processing involves processing to add to the number of games played in AT mode and a lottery to determine whether to transition to a specialized zone. That is, in step S1201, a lottery process to add to the number of games played in AT mode is performed. This process is the same as the process in step S1014. Note that the winning probability of the additional lottery may be different between the lottery process in step S1014 and the lottery process in step S1201.

In step S1202, it is determined whether the result of the lottery in step S1201 was a win for the bonus. If it is determined that the bonus lottery was won, in step S1203 it is determined whether the bonus win flag is set. If the bonus win flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1204, where a lottery process for the number of bonus games in AT mode is performed. Then, in step S1205, the number of games in AT mode is added, in step S1206, the bonus notification process is performed, and in step S1207, the bonus command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the third specific role process is terminated. The processes in steps S1203 to S1207 are the same as the processes in steps S1016 to S1020. Note that the number of bonus games may be different in the lottery process in step S1016 and the lottery process in step S1204.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1202, proceed to step S1209. In step S1209, a lottery for transition to the specialized zone is executed. That is, if a specific combination is won during VB mode but the AT mode game number addition lottery is not won, a lottery for transition to the specialized zone is also executed. The specialized zone lottery process is the same as the process in step S1022 above, and is performed based on a table for the specialized zone transition lottery (Figure 39). The processes in steps S1210 to S1216 are the same as the processes in steps S1023 to S1029 above. Furthermore, if it is determined in step S1203 that the bonus win flag is set, the AT mode addition flag is set in step S1207, and then the third specific combination process is terminated. The AT mode addition flag is as described above.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result response processing (Figure 31), after executing any of the processing in steps S705, S707, and S708, in step S709, it is determined whether the result of this lottery processing was a press order replay or a press order bell press order combination win. If a press order combination win was determined, press order combination processing is executed in step S710. Such press order combination processing will be explained in detail later.

If a negative judgment is made in step S709, or after the processing of step S710 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S711. In step S711, it is determined whether a specialized zone flag corresponding to the added specialized zone has been set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. As described above, the specialized zone flag is a flag that is set when a transition to the specialized zone occurs (when the seventh re-play win is achieved) after the specialized zone win flag has been set based on winning the transition lottery to SAT mode or the transition lottery to the specialized zone. If the specialized zone flag is set in step S711, specialized zone processing is executed in step S712. If a negative judgment is made in step S711, or after the processing of step S712 has been executed, this lottery result response processing is terminated.

<Specialized zone treatment>
The specialized zone process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the specialized zone processing, first, in step S1301, the result of the current lottery processing is determined. In the following step S1302, a lottery processing for the number of additional games in AT mode is performed. In the following step S1303, processing for adding the number of games in AT mode is performed. Then, in step S1304, processing for notifying the addition is executed, and in step S1305, an addition command is set, and then the specialized zone processing ends. The processing of steps S1302 to S1305 is the same as the processing of steps S1017 to S1020. However, the number of games selected in the lottery processing for the number of additional games in step S1302 is greater than the number of games selected in the lottery processing for the number of additional games in step S1017 (Figure 41). Furthermore, in the specialized zone, the number of games in AT mode is always added regardless of the game result (Figure 41).

As described above, in the lottery result response processing, if the player is not in an advantageous zone, a lottery for transitioning to an advantageous zone is held; if the player is in an advantageous zone, a lottery for transitioning to AT mode or VB mode and processing for increasing the number of games continued in AT mode are carried out. In other words, even if a specific role is won, if the player is in a normal zone rather than an advantageous zone, the lottery for transitioning to AT mode or VB mode and processing for increasing the number of games continued in AT mode are generally not carried out, and their implementation is restricted. In other words, compared to advantageous zones, the normal zone can be said to be a zone in which the execution of processing related to instruction functions such as AT mode is restricted. If the lottery for transitioning to AT mode or VB mode is won, a premonition game will be played before a notification that the lottery for transitioning to AT mode has been won. Therefore, the processing for transitioning the game state based on the results of the display mode transition lottery will be explained below.

<Process for transitioning the gaming state based on the result of the lottery for transitioning the display mode>
(2) In the process for transitioning the gaming state based on the result of the lottery for transitioning the display mode, a process for notifying the player that the lottery for transitioning the display mode has been won and a process for notifying the player that the gaming state has been transitioned are performed. Therefore, first, the process for notifying the player that the lottery for transitioning the display mode has been won will be described.

<Mode transition notification processing>
The notification of winning the transition lottery is performed in the mode transition notification process (step S206) in the normal process (FIG. 15). The mode transition notification process is performed when a predetermined bet operation is performed (when it is determined that the number of bets in step S205 is the specified number). The mode transition notification process will be described below with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S1401, it is determined whether the number of premonition games is 0. The number of premonition games is counted in the winning result response processing described below, and the number of premonition games is decremented by 1 each time a game is played. If the number of premonition games is not 0, the mode transition notification processing is terminated.

If the number of premonition games is 0, step S1402 determines whether the bonus win flag is set. That is, it determines whether the current premonition mode was a premonition mode triggered by a bonus win. If the bonus win flag is set, step S1403 sets a bonus win notification command to be output to the display control device 81, and then ends the mode transition notification process. Upon receiving the bonus win notification command, the display control device 81 notifies the player that a bonus has been won, for example, by displaying "BONUS CONFIRMED!!" on the auxiliary display unit 65. Note that the type of bonus that has been won (either 1st BB or 2nd BB) may also be notified.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, if a bonus and an AT mode, etc., are simultaneously won, an AT mode, etc., win notification is made when the bonus notified in step S1403 ends. The process related to such win notifications will be explained in detail later, but if an AT mode, etc., win notification is made in conjunction with a bonus win notification, it is recommended to set an AT mode, etc., win notification command in conjunction with the bonus win notification command set in step S1403.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1404. In step S1404, it is determined whether the AT mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether the current premonition mode was a premonition mode triggered by an AT mode winning. If the AT mode winning flag is set, the AT mode winning flag is cleared in step S1405. Then, in step S1406, an AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. The AT notification flag is a flag for transitioning the gaming state to the second RT state in response to a win in the AT mode transition lottery. Thereafter, in step S1407, an AT mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. Upon receiving the AT mode winning notification command, the display control device 81 notifies the player that the AT mode transition lottery has been won via the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. Such notification will be described in detail later. After executing step S1407, the mode transition notification process ends.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the winning notification mode in SAT mode is different from the winning notification mode in AT mode. Therefore, in step S1407, it is preferable to set the AT mode winning notification command so that it includes information on whether or not the mode is SAT mode. The winning notification mode in AT mode and the winning notification mode in SAT mode need only be different enough to be distinguishable by the player, and more preferably, the winning notification mode in SAT mode, which has a higher advantage, should be more flashy than the winning notification mode in AT mode.

It is also possible to configure the winning notification format for AT mode and SAT mode to be the same. By doing so, it is possible to make it appear as if the winning content has been promoted from AT mode to SAT mode between the AT mode winning notification game and the start notification game, eliminating the delay caused by the AT mode winning notification game and the start notification game being different.

If it is determined in step S1404 that the AT mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1408 whether the VB mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether the current premonition mode was a premonition mode triggered by a VB mode winning. If the VB mode winning flag is set, the VB mode winning flag is cleared in step S1409. Then, in step S1410, a VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. The VB notification flag is a flag for transitioning the gaming state to the third RT state upon winning the VB mode transition lottery. Then, in step S1411, a VB mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. Upon receiving the VB mode winning notification command, the display control device 81 notifies the player that the VB mode transition lottery has been won via the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. Such notification will be described in detail later. After step S1411 is executed, the mode transition notification process ends.

If it is determined in step S1408 that the VB mode win flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1412. In step S1412, it is determined whether the specialized zone win flag is set. If it is not set, the mode transition notification process ends. If it is set, the specialized zone win flag is cleared in step S1413. Then, in step S1414, a specialized zone notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The specialized zone notification flag is a flag for executing a push order notification corresponding to the 7th replay win. After executing the process of step S1414, in step S1415, a specialized zone win notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the mode transition notification process ends. Upon receiving the specialized zone win notification command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 to notify that the specialized zone has been won.

In other words, for the AT mode, VB mode, and specialized zone, which transition via the premonition mode, only a notification that the AT mode transition lottery or VB mode transition lottery has been won is made based on the bet operation when the number of premonition games in the premonition mode reaches 0; the AT mode, VB mode, or specialized zone will not start even if the number of premonition games reaches 0. This is because the AT mode and VB mode as display modes involve a transition in the game state; specifically, the AT mode is started by transitioning to the second RT state, and the VB mode is started by transitioning to the third RT state. Note that for the specialized zone, there are cases where a transition in the game state is not involved (third RT state → third RT state), but in this embodiment, the seventh replay winning game in the third RT state is set as the starting game, resulting in the above processing configuration.

As already explained, a transition to the second RT state occurs when the first promotion replays 1-4 are won and the third replay win is achieved, and a transition to the third RT state occurs when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won and the fourth and fifth replay wins are achieved. When the first promotion replays 1-4 are won and the third replay win is achieved, or when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won and the fourth and fifth replay wins are achieved, this occurs when the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44 at the time of winning these promotion replays corresponds to the third replay win, etc. Therefore, when a player wins the lottery for transitioning to AT mode or VB mode, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44 is notified in the game that subsequently wins the winning combination that will transition the game state. This allows the game state to transition. Furthermore, from the time a notification is issued that the player has won the lottery to switch to AT mode or VB mode, until the AT mode or VB mode starts (until the game state switches), a notification indicating the preparation state (for example, a notification that says "preparing") will be issued.

<Explanation about transitioning display modes>
The notification process for transitioning the game state is performed in the push order role process (step S710) in the lottery result corresponding process (FIG. 31). Prior to explaining the push order role process, an overview of the case where the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified will be explained with reference to FIG.

<Outline of the push order announcement>
Notification of the operation order when a push order role is won (push order notification, push order notification effect, sequence notification, mode notification) is mainly performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the instruction monitor 68. Here, the push order notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 will be explained using the example of a case where a push order role is won when the operation order to be notified this time is center → right → left. The push order notification on the instruction monitor 68 will be explained in detail later.

As shown in Figure 46(a), in the auxiliary display unit 65, of the three parallel button displays corresponding to the stop switches 42-44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated first (in the figure, the middle button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43) is marked with the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. Each button display is also displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for a bell, blue for a replay, etc.). This allows the player to recognize the winning combination for this game and that the middle stop switch 43 is the stop switch that should be operated first. Furthermore, in the auxiliary display unit 65, the right button display is displayed with the number 2 and the left button display is displayed with the number 3, indicating that the next stop switch that should be operated is the right stop switch 44 and the last stop switch that should be operated is the left stop switch 42.

When a player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in Figure 46 (b), the center button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 is displayed large. This allows the player to confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 has been completed, and that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in Figure 46 (c), the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the left button display corresponding to the left stop switch 42 is displayed larger. This allows the player to confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 has been completed, and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42.

Explaining the timing of the push order notification, the notification is set to be executed during the inactive period of the stop switches 42-44, from when the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R begins, through an acceleration period, and up to a constant speed rotation. By configuring the notification to be executed before the operation of the stop switches 42-44 becomes effective, it is possible to recognize the operation order of the stop switches 42-44 before operating them as desired, allowing the game to proceed at a good tempo.

<Push order processing>
Next, the push order role processing executed in step S710 in the lottery result response processing (Figure 31) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 47.

In step S1501, it is determined whether the result of this lottery is one of the first promotion replays 1 to 4. A positive determination is made in step S1501 if the first replay or the third replay wins, depending on the operation order of this game. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1502, where it is determined whether the AT notification flag has been set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. As already explained, the AT notification flag is set when the number of premonition games in the premonition mode becomes 0 after winning the lottery to transition to the AT mode in the mode transition notification process (Figure 45).

If the AT notification flag is set, in step S1503, processing for the push order notification for the third replay is executed. Specifically, of the first and third replays, the operation sequence corresponding to the third replay winning is notified (see Figure 23 (a)). Then, in step S1504, processing is performed to set the push order notification command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is the sub-side control device, and then this push order role processing is terminated. The push order notification command includes information on the current display mode and information on the lottery result. The processing on the display control device 81 side based on receiving the push order notification command will be explained in detail later.

Note that the notification of the operation sequence corresponding to the third replay win in step S1503 basically occurs after the lottery for transitioning to AT mode is won, the premonition mode is passed, and the AT mode win notification is made, but before the transition to AT mode. In other words, the lottery table for the second RT state and the third RT state does not allow the first promotion replays 1 to 4 to be won, and the first promotion replays 1 to 4 can only be won in the first RT state. However, even in AT mode, there are cases where the game state falls from the second RT state to the first RT state due to an incorrect operation, etc., and even in such cases, it is possible to quickly return to the second RT state by winning the first promotion replays 1 to 4.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1501, a judgment is made in step S1505 as to whether the current lottery result is one of Fall Replays 1 to 3. A positive judgment is made in step S1505 when the first replay or second replay wins based on the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, a judgment is made in step S1506 as to whether the AT notification flag is set. If the AT notification flag is set, processing for notifying the push order for the first replay is executed in step S1507. Specifically, the operation sequence corresponding to the first replay winning, of the first replay and second replay, is notified (see Figure 23 (b)). Thereafter, in step S1508, processing is performed to set the push order notification command, and then this push order processing is terminated.

In this way, if you win the lottery to transition to AT mode and you win the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the operation sequence corresponding to the third replay win will be announced, making it possible to transition the game state to the second RT state. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S1502, the push order notification process will be terminated without any processing. Therefore, for example, even if you win the first promotion replays 1 to 4 without winning AT mode in the first RT state, there are cases where the first replay win will be realized or the third replay win will be realized.

In addition, if a fall replay 1 to 3 is won while the AT notification flag is set, the operation sequence corresponding to the first replay win is notified, making it possible to prevent the game state from transitioning to the first RT state. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S1506, the push order notification process is terminated without processing. Therefore, for example, when the AT mode ends, the AT notification flag is cleared, and the display mode transitions to normal mode, a second replay win may be achieved by winning a fall replay 1 to 3, and the RT state will transition from the second RT state or the third RT state to the first RT state.

Also, for example, in the first RT state, if you win the first promotion replays 1-4 without winning the AT mode, and the operation sequence happens to correspond to the third replay win and the third replay win is realized (even if you transition to the second RT state), the second replay win may be realized by winning the fall replays 1-3. Therefore, as mentioned above, even if you happen to transition to the second RT state without winning the AT mode, you will then quickly transition to the first RT state.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1505, then in step S1509 it is determined whether the result of this lottery is either the second promotion replay 1 or 2. A positive judgment in step S1509 occurs when the first replay, fourth replay, or fifth replay wins, depending on the operation order of this game. In this case, in step S1510 it is determined whether the above-mentioned AT notification flag is set. If the AT notification flag is set, then in step S1511 it is determined whether a VB notification flag or a specialized zone notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. As already explained, the VB notification flag is a flag that is set in the mode transition notification process (Figure 45) when the number of premonition games in the premonition mode becomes 0 after winning the lottery to transition to VB mode. Additionally, the specialized zone notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of premonition games in the premonition mode becomes 0 after winning the lottery to transition to the specialized zone during the mode transition notification process (Figure 45).

If the VB notification flag or the specialized zone notification flag is set, processing is executed in step S1512 to notify the push order for the 4th replay or the 5th replay. Specifically, the operation sequence corresponding to the 4th replay winning or the 5th replay winning among the 1st replay, 4th replay, and 5th replay is notified (see Figure 23 (b)). Then, in step S1513, processing is executed to set the push order notification command, and this push order processing is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1510, the push order notification process is not performed and the push order role processing is terminated. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S1511, the push order notification process for the first replay is executed in step S1507, and the push order notification command is set in step S1508, after which the push order role processing is terminated. Therefore, if the second promotion replay 1 or 2 is won without winning VB mode or the specialized zone, if the AT mode is active, the push order notification effect corresponding to the first replay win will be displayed, but if the AT mode is not active, the push order notification effect will not be displayed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1509, a determination is made in step S1514 as to whether the result of this lottery is a BAR replay. A positive judgment is made in step S1514 if, depending on the operation sequence of this game, any of the first replay, third replay, and sixth to eighth replays will win. In this case, a determination is made in step S1515 as to whether the AT notification flag is set. If the AT notification flag is set, a determination is made in step S1516 as to whether the specialized zone notification flag is set. If the AT notification flag is set and the specialized zone notification flag is set, processing for notifying the push order for the seventh replay is executed in step S1517. Specifically, the operation sequence corresponding to the seventh replay winning among the first replay, third replay, and sixth to eighth replays is notified (see Figure 23 (c)). Then, in step S1518, the push order notification command is set, and the push order processing ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1515, the push order notification process is not performed and the push order role processing is terminated. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S1516, the push order notification process for the third replay is executed in step S1503, and the push order notification command is set in step S1504, after which the push order role processing is terminated. Therefore, if a BAR replay is won without winning VB mode or a specialized zone, if the AT mode is active, a push order notification effect corresponding to the third replay win is performed and a transition to the second RT state occurs, but if the AT mode is not active, no push order notification effect is performed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1514, a determination is made in step S1519 as to whether the result of this lottery is a win for the push order bell. If a win for the push order bell is made, a determination is made in step S1520 as to whether the AT notification flag is set. If it is set, a push order notification process is executed in step S1521 to notify the operation sequence corresponding to the first small win (see Figure 19). Then, in step S1522, a process is performed to set the push order notification command, and the main push order role processing is terminated. If a negative judgment is made in step S1520, the main push order role processing is terminated without performing the push order notification process.

In addition, if the push order bell is won when the AT notification flag is set (if a positive judgment is made in step S1520), and the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, it is recommended that the push order notification corresponding to the first minor win not be made. By doing this, the transition result will stop, transitioning the gaming state to the first RT state; in other words, if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are then won, transitioning to the high RT state will be possible.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1519, a judgment is made in step S1523 as to whether the current lottery result is a transition replay. If a transition replay is won, a special notification process is executed in step S1524, and then the push order role process is terminated. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step S1523, the push order role process is terminated. The special notification process in step S1524 is a process for transitioning to the fourth RT state when a transition replay is won. As already explained, in this embodiment, the system is set so that a transition replay will not be won in any game state. Therefore, a transition to the fourth RT state will not occur. The process of step S1524 will be explained in detail when explaining an embodiment in which the system is set so that a transition replay can be won.

<Process for Transitioning Display Mode Based on Winning Results>
<Processing for winning results>
Next, the process when a winning combination corresponding to the transition of the gaming state is won as a result of the notification for transitioning the gaming state as described above will be described (3). This process is performed in the winning result response process (step S414) in the reel control process (FIG. 18). The winning result response process will be described below with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S1601, a game count management process is executed. Details will be described later, but this game count management process counts the number of premonition games in the premonition mode described above, as well as the number of continued games in AT mode, VB mode, and specialized zones. In the following step S1602, a post-addition notification process is executed. The post-addition notification process is a process for making the post-addition notification described in FIG. 42 above, and executes a post-addition notification (post-addition notification) corresponding to the post-addition counter BG, provided that the post-addition flag is set when the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined value (1). Then, a value corresponding to the executed post-addition notification is added to the display remaining number counter HG and subtracted from the post-addition counter BG, and the post-addition flag is cleared, provided that the post-addition counter BG is 0.

In the following step S1603, it is determined whether the current stop result is a third replay win. As described above, if a third replay win is achieved, the RT state processing (Figure 21) performs processing to transition the game state to the second RT state. In this case, in step S1604, it is determined whether the AT notification flag is set. If the AT notification flag is not set, this occurs when the third replay win is achieved without the conditions for transitioning to AT mode being met. In this case, the winning result response processing ends without performing processing to start AT mode. If the AT notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1605 whether the current display mode is AT mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As described above, the AT mode flag is a flag that the CPU 102 uses to identify that the display mode is AT mode. In addition to the AT mode flag, flags for identifying the display mode include the VB mode flag, the specialized zone flag, and the BB mode flag. In this embodiment, when the display mode is a mode corresponding to a higher RT state than AT mode (VB mode, added specialized zone), the AT mode flag coexists with the corresponding flag for that mode (VB mode flag, specialized zone flag). Therefore, for example, in step S1605, cases in which it is determined that the AT mode flag is set include when in AT mode, VB mode, or a specialized zone.

If the AT mode flag is set in step S1605, the display mode is already AT mode, and the winning result processing ends. On the other hand, if the AT mode flag is not set, processing to start AT mode is performed in steps S1606 to S1609.

That is, in step S1606, the AT mode flag is set. In the following step S1607, an AT mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. Upon receiving the AT mode start command, the display control device 81 notifies the user, via the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like, that the AT mode will start from the next game. This notification will be explained in detail later. Then, in step S1608, counting the number of AT mode continuations begins. Specifically, an initial value (e.g., 50) for the number of continuation games in AT mode is set in the AT mode continuation counter provided in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106.

After processing step S1608, step S1609 determines whether the specialized zone flag is set. If step S1609 determines positive, it means that the AT mode in which the current win occurred is SAT mode. In this case, step S1610 clears the specialized zone win flag, and then the process proceeds to start the additional specialized zone (steps S1619 to S1621). The process for starting the additional specialized zone will be explained later. If step S1609 determines negative, the winning result response process ends.

If it is determined in step S1603 that the third replay win has not been achieved, the process proceeds to step S1611. In step S1611, it is determined whether the fourth and fifth replay wins have been achieved as the current stop result. As described above, if the fourth and fifth replay wins have been achieved, the RT state processing (Figure 21) performs processing to transition the game state to the third RT state. In this case, in step S1612, it is determined whether the VB notification flag is set. If the VB notification flag is not set, this means that the fourth and fifth replay wins have been achieved without winning the VB mode transition lottery. In this case, the winning result response processing is terminated without performing the VB mode start processing. If the VB notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1613 whether the VB mode flag is set. If the VB mode flag is set, the display mode is already VB mode, so the winning result response processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the VB mode flag is not set, processing to start VB mode is performed in steps S1614 to S1616.

That is, in step S1614, the VB mode flag is set. In this case, the AT mode flag and the VB mode flag coexist in the various flag storage area 106d. This is because VB mode is a mode that is transitioned to via AT mode, and after VB mode ends, the transition to AT mode is always made.

Then, in step S1615, a VB mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. Upon receiving the VB mode start command, the display control device 81 notifies the player that VB mode will start from the next game using the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. This notification will be explained in detail later. Then, in step S1616, counting the number of VB mode continuations begins. Specifically, an initial value (e.g., 25) for the number of VB mode continuation games is set in the VB mode continuation counter provided in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. After step S1616 has been performed, this winning result response processing ends.

If step S1611 determines that neither the fourth nor fifth replay win has been achieved, the process proceeds to step S1617. In step S1617, it is determined whether the seventh replay win has been achieved as a result of the current stop. In this embodiment, if the seventh replay win has been achieved, that is, if the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle row of the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle row of the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle row of the right reel 32R, and the "black BAR" symbol stops on the middle row combination line, the game transitions to the bonus zone. A seventh replay win is achieved when BAR Replay 1 is won and the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the operating sequence corresponding to the seventh replay win (Figure 23 (c)).

If the seventh replay win is achieved, step S1618 determines whether the specialized zone notification flag is set. If the specialized zone notification flag is set, steps S1619 to S1621 perform processing to start the specialized zone. As already explained, at the start of SAT mode, even if a positive determination is made in step S1609 and processing in step S1610 is performed, steps S1619 to S1621 are also performed.

Specifically, in step S1619, a process is performed to set a specialized zone flag in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. The specialized zone flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine that the above-mentioned additional specialized zone is in place, and when the specialized zone flag is set, counting the number of continued games in AT mode or VB mode is stopped. In this case, the various flag storage area 106d may contain an AT mode flag, a VB mode flag, and a specialized zone flag all at once.

Then, in step S1620, a specialized zone start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. Upon receiving the specialized zone start command, the display control device 81 notifies the user, via the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like, that the specialized zone will start from the next game. This notification will be described in detail later. Then, in step S1621, counting the number of continuations of the specialized zone begins. Specifically, an initial value (e.g., 5) for the number of continuation games of the specialized zone is set in the specialized zone continuation counter provided in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. After the processing of step S1621 is performed, this winning result response processing ends.

If it is determined in step S1617 that the 7th replay win has not been achieved, or if a negative determination is made in step S1618, the process proceeds to step S1622. In step S1622, it is determined whether the 11th and 12th replay wins have been achieved as a result of this stop. As described above, in this embodiment, the 11th and 12th replay wins are not achieved, so a negative determination is made in step S1622 in this embodiment, and in this case, the winning result response processing is terminated. In embodiments in which the 11th and 12th replay wins are achieved, a positive determination is made in step S1622, and in this case, the 4th RT transition processing corresponding to transitioning the game state to the 4th RT state is executed in step S1623, and then the winning result response processing is terminated. The 4th RT transition processing will be explained in detail when explaining embodiments in which the 11th and 12th replay wins are possible.

As described above, processing to transition the display mode is performed separately from the RT state processing (Figure 21), particularly based on the winning of a combination that corresponds to transitioning the gaming state from the second RT state to the fourth RT state. This is to prevent AT mode, etc. from starting based on the winning of a combination that corresponds to transitioning the gaming state, even though the display mode transition lottery has not been won.

Furthermore, when transitioning between display modes, which involve a transition in the game state, transitions to higher modes, i.e., transitions from normal mode to AT mode, transitions from AT mode to VB mode, or transitions from AT mode or VB mode to a specialized zone, are configured to be transitions based on the winning results of the corresponding role. Therefore, the transition between display modes and the transition between game states occur as a set in the same game. On the other hand, when transitioning to lower modes, such as when the game state transitions due to a second replay win as a fall replay or the stopping of a transition roll, the display mode does not transition. When transitioning to such lower modes, the game state is managed by the winning results (RT state processing), while the display mode is managed by the number of games played. Therefore, when transitioning to these lower modes, the transition between game states and the transition between display modes may occur in separate games.

<Game count management process>
The number-of-games management process executed in step S1601 of the winning result response process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 49. In the number-of-games management process, the number of premonition games in the premonition mode is counted, and the number of continued games in the AT mode, VB mode, and specialized zone is counted, and when the number of continued games in these display modes reaches 0, processing is performed to end the corresponding display mode.

In the game count management process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether the number of bets is a specific number. As already explained, in this embodiment, each game can be played with a bet number of 1 to 3, and in step S1701, it is determined whether the specific number is 3 bets. If it is not 3 bets, the game count management process ends. In other words, in games with 1 or 2 bets, the number of games in the premonition mode is not counted. Note that it is also possible to configure the counting to occur regardless of the number of bets.

If the current game is a 3-bet game, proceed to step S1702. In step S1702, it is determined whether the bonus win flag is set or whether the game is in a bonus state. If a positive determination is made in step S1702, the flags for various display modes, such as the AT mode flag, VB mode flag, and specialized zone flag, are cleared in step S1703, and then the game count management process is terminated. In other words, if the bonus win flag is set or during a bonus, the number of games played in AT mode, etc., is not counted. Note that if any flag is not set in step S1703, the state is maintained.

Incidentally, in step S1703, the AT mode flag, VB mode flag, etc. are cleared, but the AT notification flag and VB notification flag are not cleared. Therefore, after the bonus ends, after going through the preparation state of AT mode, etc., these flags will notify the push order to transition the gaming state, making it possible to return to the gaming state before the bonus. On the other hand, if a bonus is won during a specialized zone, the specialized zone will end when the bonus is won. Also, in step S1703, the AT mode win flag, etc. are not cleared. Therefore, if AT mode, etc. and a bonus are won simultaneously, a win notification based on these win flags will be made after the bonus ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1702, a judgment is made in step S1704 as to whether the number of premonition games is 0. If it is not 0, the number of premonition games is decremented by 1 in step S1705. If the number of premonition games is 0 in step S1704 (if the game is not in premonition mode), or after the processing of step S1705 has been executed, the number of continued games for each mode is counted in steps S1706 to S1723.

That is, in step S1706, it is determined whether the current display mode is AT mode. If it is AT mode, the process proceeds to step S1707, where it is determined whether it is a specialized zone in AT mode. That is, if the specialized zone is entered when the AT mode starts, as in SAT mode, a positive determination is made in step S1707. If it is in a specialized zone, game count management processing for the specialized zone is performed in steps S1720 to S1723. These processes will be explained later.

If it is determined in step S1707 that the zone is not a specialized zone, the AT mode continuation counter is decremented by 1 in step S1708, thereby decrementing the number of games in AT mode continuation. Then, in step S1709, it is determined whether the AT mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, the number of games managed is terminated. If it is 0, the AT mode flag is cleared in step S1710, and the AT notification flag is cleared in step S1711. Then, in step S1712, an AT mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. After the processing of step S1712 is performed, the number of games managed is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1706 that the mode is not AT mode, the process proceeds to step S1713. In step S1713, it is determined whether the current display mode is VB mode. If it is VB mode, the process proceeds to step S1714, where it is determined whether it is in an add-on specialized zone. If it is not in an add-on specialized zone, the VB mode continuation counter is decremented by 1 in step S1715, thereby subtracting the number of games in VB mode. Then, in step S1716, it is determined whether the VB mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, the number-of-games management process ends. If it is 0, the VB mode flag is cleared in step S1717, and the VB notification flag is cleared in step S1718. Then, in step S1719, a VB mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. Upon receiving the VB mode end command, the display control device 81 notifies the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., that VB mode will end in this game. Such notification will be explained in detail later. After processing step S1719, the game count management process ends.

If step S1714 determines that the zone is an added specialized zone, the process proceeds to step S1720. As already explained, if step S1707 determines that the zone is a specialized zone in AT mode, the process also proceeds to step S1720. In step S1720, the specialized zone continuation counter is decremented by 1, thereby subtracting the number of games continued in the specialized zone. Then, in step S1721, it is determined whether the specialized zone continuation counter is 0. If it is 0, in step S1722, the specialized zone flag is cleared, and in step S1723, a specialized zone end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. Upon receiving the specialized zone end command, the display control device 81 notifies the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., that the specialized zone will end with this game. As such a notification, for example, the total number of games successfully added in this specialized zone is notified. After processing step S1723 is performed, the number of games management process ends. If a negative judgment is made in step S1713 or step S1721, the game count management process ends.

<End Determination Process>
Next, the end determination process as the process at the end of the bonus will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 50. As already explained, the end determination process is a process carried out in step S614 in the bonus state process (Fig. 27). In the end determination process, it is determined whether the bonus end condition is met, and when the bonus is to be ended, a process for notifying the winning of the AT mode, etc. that was won after the bonus was won but before the bonus was won, or the AT mode, etc. that was won during the bonus, is performed, and a process for adding the number of games in the AT mode, etc. is performed.

That is, in step S1801, it is determined whether a small win has been achieved. During the first BB and second BB bonuses, the first BB win has a high probability of being achieved, and in some cases, so-called rare wins such as the second BB win, the third BB win, strong cherry, and strong watermelon win are also achieved (Figure 28). When the first BB win is achieved, the first small win is usually achieved and nine medals are paid out. In other cases, three to nine medals are paid out, or no medals are paid out due to a missed win. Also, during a CB, one of CB small/medium wins 1 to 4 is won. Regardless of which win is achieved, the first small win is usually achieved and a predetermined number (15) of medals are paid out. Step S1801 is the process of determining whether a small win resulting in a medal payout has been achieved among the wins during these bonuses and CBs.

If it is determined in step S1801 that a small win has been achieved, the process of subtracting the payout amount for this game from the remaining payout amount is performed in step S1802. If a negative determination is made in step S1801, or after the process of step S1802 has been executed, it is determined in step S1803 whether the remaining payout amount has reached 0. If it is not 0, the end determination process is terminated. If it is 0, a bonus end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1804, and then steps S1805 to S1814 perform processing for notifying a win in AT mode, etc., and processing for adding to the number of games to be continued in AT mode, etc.

In step S1805, it is determined whether the AT mode win flag is set. If the AT mode win flag is set, a lottery process for the number of premonition games is performed in step S1806, the number of premonition games is set in step S1807, and a premonition command is set in step S1808. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the lottery process for the number of premonition games in step S1806 performs a lottery with a 100% probability that the number of premonition games will be 0. In other words, in step S1807, the number of premonition games is always set to 0, and a win notification for AT mode, etc. will be made in the game following the bonus end game. After executing the process in step S1808, the end determination process is terminated.

If the AT mode hit flag is not set in step S1805, step S1809 determines whether the VB mode hit flag is set. If the VB mode hit flag is set, steps S1806 to S1808 for the premonition mode are performed, and then the end determination process is terminated.

When the AT mode win flag is set, the bonus ends when AT mode and a bonus are won simultaneously, when AT mode is won after a bonus win but before a bonus is won, when AT mode is won during a bonus, or when a bonus is won during the AT mode win precursor mode. On the other hand, when the VB mode win flag is set, the bonus ends when VB mode and a bonus are won simultaneously during AT mode, when VB mode is won after a bonus win but before a bonus is won, when VB mode is won during a bonus, or when a bonus is won during the VB mode win precursor mode.

If the VB mode win flag is not set in step S1809, proceed to step S1810. In step S1810, a determination is made as to whether the AT mode addition flag is set. If the AT mode addition flag is not set, the end determination process is terminated. If the AT mode addition flag is set, a lottery process for the number of AT mode addition games is performed in step S1811, an AT mode number of game addition process is performed in step S1812, an addition notification process is performed in step S1813, and an addition command is set in step S1814. The processes of steps S1811 to S1814 are the same as the processes of steps S1017 to S1020. After the process of step S1814 is executed, the end determination process is terminated.

As described above, the main control device 101 performs the following processes: (1) processing related to the display mode transition lottery, (2) processing for transitioning the game state based on the results of the display mode transition lottery, and (3) processing for transitioning the display mode based on the winning result.As a result, the auxiliary display unit 65 generates a push order notification effect, and the game state transitions in line with the transition of the display mode.Furthermore, the push order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 can generate a push order bell win, allowing for the possibility of winning a large number of medals.

Here, when a push order replay or push order bell is won, if a push order notification effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 (a push order notification effect by the display control device 81), in addition to the push order notification effect, a push order notification is also performed by the instruction monitor 68 connected to the main control device 101. The configuration of this instruction monitor 68 will be explained with reference to Figure 51. Figure 51(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and Figure 51(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display content.

As shown in Figure 51(a), the indication monitor 68 has eight display segments N1 to N8. Each display segment N1 to N8 has its own light source made up of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light up any one display segment, or any combination of display segments. This allows the indication monitor 68 to individually display predetermined symbols (including letters and numbers). Note that since all of the individual light sources emit light of the same color, the same color is displayed on all of the display segments N1 to N8.

Regarding each display segment N1-N8 in more detail, the first display segment N1 through the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments, and these first display segment N1 through the seventh display segment N7 are arranged so that they can at least display the numbers "1" through "6." The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged to the side of the lower right corner of the area where the first display segment N1 through the seventh display segment N7 are located. Therefore, the indicator monitor 68 can at least display "1" through "6," "1." through "6.", and ".".

Note that, as long as the indicator monitor 68 can individually display multiple patterns of symbols, the shape and arrangement of each display segment N1-N8 can be arbitrary, and a configuration using seven segments instead of eight, or even nine segments, is also possible. Furthermore, it is not necessary for each display segment N1-N8 to display the same color; the color displayed by each display segment N1-N8 can be changed as needed. Furthermore, it is not necessary to control the on/off of each display segment N1-N8 by turning the light source on and off; as long as the display can be individually controlled for each display segment N1-N8, the segment display can be constructed using a single backlight and LCD display. Furthermore, rather than applying a segment display to each display area, symbols can be displayed using other types of display devices, such as an LCD display, organic EL display, CRT, or dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 through the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used to notify the player of the operation sequence of the push-order combination. For example, as shown in FIG. 51(b), if the player achieves a winning combination advantageous to him by operating the stop switches 42-44 in the order "left" → "center" → "right," the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 will light up to display "1." Furthermore, if the player achieves a winning combination advantageous to him by operating the stop switches 42-44 in the order "right" → "left" → "center," the first display segment N1, the second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 will light up to display "5." In other words, the numbers (symbols) displayed on each display segment N1 to N7 correspond one-to-one to the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in accordance with the numbers (symbols) displayed on the display segments N1 to N7, the player can win in an advantageous manner.

The eighth display segment N8 lights up in the game in which the start conditions are met, including notification conditions that lead to a situation in which a push order notification may occur, such as a transition to a favorable zone, an AT mode win notification being made, and the AT notification flag being set. It also turns off when the AT mode or SAT mode ends and there is a transition from the favorable zone to the normal zone.

In other words, advantageous zones (specific game states, specific modes) include zones that include navigation states (AT mode, SAT mode, high frequency mode) in which the push order bell and push order replay operation sequence are more easily notified, making it easier for players to win in an advantageous manner; chance states (CZ mode, 1st BB, high probability mode) in which it is easier to win the lottery to transition to the navigation state; or winning states (winning modes) in which the lottery to transition to the navigation state or chance state is won but the player does not transition to the navigation state or chance state. The eighth display segment N8 serves as a zone indicator (specific notification means) that lights up during specific zones in the advantageous zone in which the player can benefit from the push order notification, and is unlit during normal zones that are not advantageous zones, and during non-specific zones that are advantageous zones but are not specific zones.

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68, which has the first display segment N1 through the seventh display segment N7 as a push order indicator and the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, is located near the side of the payout number display unit 62 on the gaming panel 25. In other words, the instruction monitor 68 is located above the stop switches 42 through 44, which are operated by the player. In other words, the instruction monitor 68 is not located on the decorative panel, which is the front part of the gaming machine, below the positions where the stop switches 42 through 44 are located. This prevents the eighth display segment N8 from being obscured by the hands operating the stop switches 42 through 44, and it can be said that it is located in a position that is easy for players to see. Furthermore, because it is located near the payout number display unit 62, which is easily visible to players who are playing the game in an effort to win medals, it can be said that players are less likely to miss it.

Furthermore, the brightness of the corresponding LED of the eighth display segment N8 on the instruction monitor 68 is set so that it is brighter than the brightness of the surrounding display elements (e.g., the payout number display element 62 and the backlight of the gaming panel 25) (more specifically, so that it is twice as bright as the surrounding display elements). Therefore, even when the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display elements are both controlled to emit light (i.e., lit), the eighth display segment N8 stands out. The brightness of the corresponding LED is also set so that the eighth display segment N8 has a higher brightness toward the front of the gaming machine than the surrounding display elements (more specifically, so that it is twice as bright as the surrounding display elements). This configuration also improves the visibility of the eighth display segment N8, reducing the likelihood of missing it when it is lit.

Below, we will explain the first section display process and the second section display process as processes related to turning on/off the eighth display segment N8.

<First section display process>
First, the first section display process will be described with reference to Fig. 52. The first section display process is a process carried out in step S316 of the lottery process (Fig. 16), and is carried out after the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and a lottery for switching the display mode, etc. (lottery result response process) is carried out based on the lottery result.

In step S1901, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8, which serves as a zone indicator, is currently displayed, or more specifically, whether the eighth display segment N8 is currently lit. As described above, when the eighth display segment N8 is currently lit, it indicates that the zone is a specific zone within the advantageous zone where at least the notification conditions for a push order notification to occur are met. If a negative determination is made in step S1901 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is currently off, the process proceeds to step S1902.

In step S1902, it is determined whether or not an advantageous zone flag has been set in the various flag storage area 106d. As already explained, the advantageous zone flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the advantageous zone transition lottery process (Figure 32). If the advantageous zone flag is set, in step S1903, it is determined whether or not the advantageous zone winning game flag has been set. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the advantageous zone transition lottery process, and is a flag that the CPU 102 uses to identify that game as a winning game. If the advantageous zone winning game flag is set, in step S1904, a process is executed to clear the advantageous zone winning game flag. If the advantageous zone winning game flag is not set in step S1903, the process proceeds to step S1905.

In step S1905, it is determined whether or not counting the number of games in the advantageous zone has begun; more specifically, whether or not measurement of the advantageous zone game number AG in the various counter areas 106e has begun. If measurement of the advantageous zone game number AG has not begun, processing to begin measuring the advantageous zone game number AG is performed in step S1906. The advantageous zone game number AG corresponds to a means for determining the number of games played in the advantageous zone, and processing to add one to the number for each game in the advantageous zone is performed.

If it is determined in step S1905 that measurement has already begun, or after executing the processing of step S1906, the process proceeds to step S1907. In step S1907, it is determined whether the AT notification flag is set. As already explained, when an AT mode winning notification is made and the AT notification flag is set, a state in which a push order notification can occur when a push order role is won is established, and the above notification condition is met. If it is determined in step S1907 that the AT notification flag is set, in step S1908, the display of the section indicator is initiated by lighting the eighth display segment N8. In addition, when the main control unit 101 starts displaying the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator with the lighting state, it outputs a sound output command to the display control device 81 so that a predetermined sound effect (e.g., a mechanical sound like "Gagot!") is output from the speaker 64. Based on the sound output command, the display control device 81 controls the speaker 64 to emit the predetermined sound effect. When the eighth display segment N8 starts to be displayed, an effect may be generated on the auxiliary display unit 65 or another display unit. In this case, a corresponding command may be output to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 may control the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., so that the corresponding effect is generated.

If it is determined in step S1901 that the eighth display segment N8 is currently being displayed as a section indicator, then in step S1909, processing is executed to continue display during the favorable section. Specifically, in step S1909, processing is executed to continue the situation in which the eighth display segment N8 remains lit. In other words, processing to end the display of the section indicator is not executed in this first section display processing.

If it is determined in step S1902 that the advantageous zone flag is not set, if the advantageous zone flag is set but the game is a winning one (after the processing of step S1904 is executed), or if the situation is not such that a push order notification can occur even if the game is not a winning one (if it is determined in step S1907 that the AT notification flag is not set), the process proceeds to step S1910. In step S1910, a process is executed to add 1 to the first role ratio counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The first role ratio counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which a push order notification does not occur, i.e., the number of games in the normal zone and the non-specific zone.

Furthermore, after executing the display start process for the section indicator in step S1908 and the display continuation process in step S1909, the process proceeds to step S1911. In step S1911, the process executes a process of adding 1 to the second role ratio counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The second role ratio counter is a counter for counting the number of games at which a push order notification can be generated, i.e., the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the processing of step S1910 or step S1911, a role ratio calculation process is executed in step S1912. In this process, the value of the role ratio second counter is divided by the sum of the value of the role ratio first counter and the role ratio second counter (total number of games played). In other words, the role ratio calculation process is a process that calculates the proportion of the number of games in which a push order notification may occur out of the total number of games played. Then, in step S1913, a process is executed to display the calculation result of step S1912 on the role ratio monitor 77.

As shown in FIG. 5, the winning combination monitor 77 has multiple 7-segment displays consisting of seven display segments. Specifically, the winning combination monitor 77 has the following 7-segment displays: a first display unit 77a, a second display unit 77b, a third display unit 77c, a fourth display unit 77d, and a fifth display unit 77e. Like the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, the display segments in the first display unit 77a through the fifth display unit 77e have individual light sources made of LEDs. By controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light up any one display segment, or any combination of display segments. This allows each winning combination monitor 77 to individually display a specific symbol (including letters and numbers), and in particular, the winning combination monitor 77 is capable of displaying five-digit numbers.

In step S1913, the result of the calculation process in step S1912 is output to the role ratio monitor 77, and the display of each display section 77a-77e on the role ratio monitor 77 is controlled so that a four-digit number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77. Specifically, a number smaller than 1 and with four decimal places, such as "0.5012," is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77 as the percentage of the total number of games in which a push order notification may occur. After the process of step S1913 is executed, the first section display process is terminated.

Note that the calculation process in step S1912 may involve rounding off numbers to the fifth decimal point before controlling the display of the winning ratio monitor 77. Furthermore, since the first display unit 77a of the winning ratio monitor 77 basically displays "0," the first display unit 77a may not be included, or the first display unit 77a may be configured to always display "0" by printing or the like. It may also be desirable to have a decimal point displayed between the first display unit 77a and the second display unit 77b by printing or the like.

<Second Section Display Process>
Next, the second section display process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 53. As already explained, the second section display process is a process performed in step S415 of the reel control process, and is performed after medal payout (payout determination process) and a transition of the game state based on the winning result (winning result response process) have been performed at the end of one game.

In step S2001, it is determined whether the advantageous zone flag is set. If it is not set, the second zone display process is terminated. If the advantageous zone flag is set, in step S2002, a process is executed to count the number of games played in the advantageous zone. Specifically, a process is executed to increment the advantageous zone game count AG by 1. After executing the process in step S2002, in step S2003, an update process is executed for the advantageous zone increase/decrease coin count ZM provided in the various counter areas 106e. The advantageous zone increase/decrease coin count ZM is a counter used by the CPU 102 to determine the increase/decrease in the number of medals during the advantageous zone (the difference between the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out in each game during the advantageous zone). In step S2003, the increase/decrease in the number of medals during the current game (the number of medals paid out during the current game - the number of medals bet during the current game) is determined based on the winning result of the current game (the winning result response process and payout determination process immediately before), and this increase/decrease in medals is added to the advantageous zone increase/decrease coin count ZM. For example, if the current game is a 3-bet game and 9 medals are paid out, the medal increase/decrease is +6, and in step S2003, +6 is added to the advantageous zone increase/decrease medal number ZM. Also, if the current game is a 3-bet game and no medals are paid out, the medal increase/decrease is -3, and in step S2003, -3 is added to the advantageous zone increase/decrease medal number ZM.

After executing the processing of step S2003, in step S2004, remaining game number management processing is executed, and then in the following step S2005, remaining coin management processing is executed. The remaining game number management processing is processing for managing whether or not the advantageous zone is in a situation where it will reach the upper limit number of games with the current remaining number of games, based on the number of games remaining in AT mode, etc. The remaining coin management processing is processing for managing whether or not the advantageous zone is in a situation where it will reach the upper limit increase number with the current remaining number of games, based on the number of games remaining in AT mode, etc.

Specifically, regarding the remaining game count management process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 54, first, in step S2101, the premonition game count G1 is determined. For example, if the current situation is premonition mode in a favorable zone, the premonition game count G1 represents the number of remaining premonition mode games, and is decremented by one for each game in the game count management process (FIG. 49). In step S2102, the AT mode continuation count G2 is determined. For example, if the current situation is AT mode in a favorable zone, the AT mode continuation count G2 represents the number of remaining AT mode games, and is decremented by one for each game in the game count management process (FIG. 49). In step S2103, the VB mode continuation count G3 is determined. For example, if the current situation is VB mode in a favorable zone, the VB mode continuation count G3 represents the number of remaining VB mode games, and is decremented by one for each game in the game count management process (FIG. 49). In step S2104, the specialized zone continuation count G4 is determined. For example, if the current state is a specialized zone in an advantageous zone, the specialized zone continuation count G4 represents the number of remaining games in the specialized zone, and is decremented by one for each game in the game count management process (FIG. 49). In step S2105, the BB remaining game count G5 is determined. For example, if the current state is BB mode (bonus state) in an advantageous zone, the BB remaining game count G5 represents the number of remaining BB mode games, and is decremented by one each time the game count management process (FIG. 49) is started, provided that BB mode is in effect, by a decrement process (not shown).

Here, values of 0 or greater may be entered for these continuation numbers G1 to G5 even if the current state is not the corresponding mode or zone. Specifically, for example, in VB mode, specialized zone, or BB mode, the count of the remaining number of games in AT mode is stopped, but if a transition to VB mode, specialized zone, or BB mode occurs during AT mode, values of 0 or greater are entered for AT mode continuation number G2 and the continuation number for each of these modes.

In step S2106, the remaining number of games in the advantageous zone ZG is calculated by accumulating G1 to G5 determined in each of the processes in steps S2101 to S2105 above. By performing this process, it is possible to determine how many more games the advantageous zone will continue. In the following step S2107, the total number of games in the advantageous zone SG is calculated by adding the number of games in the advantageous zone that have been played so far (number of games in the advantageous zone AG) and the remaining number of games ZG. Then, in step S2108, the total number of games in the advantageous zone SG is subtracted from 1500G, which is the upper limit number of games that the advantageous zone can continue, to calculate the number of free games FG (number of free games that can be added, number of remaining games).

After processing step S2108, step S2109 determines whether the number of available games FG is greater than 0, i.e., whether there is an available number of games that can be added. If the number of available games FG is greater than 0, the remaining game number management process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of available games FG is 0 or less, step S2110 executes a process to set a first excess flag in the various flag storage area 106d, and then the remaining game number management process is terminated. The first excess flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine that a situation has been identified in which the first forced termination condition of the advantageous zone is met.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 55, the remaining coin management process first determines the advantageous zone increase/decrease coin count ZM updated in step S2003 in step S2201. In the following step S2202, the process calculates the expected remaining increase/decrease coin count NM that can be obtained in the remaining number of games in the advantageous zone based on the number of remaining games in the advantageous zone ZG (step S2106) calculated in the remaining game management process in step S2004 and the net increase coin count (expected increase/decrease coin count KM) that can be expected in each game in the advantageous zone stored in ROM 105. In this embodiment, the expected increase/decrease coin count KM is calculated when the advantageous zone is consumed in a high RT state when the above-mentioned push order notification occurs, and is configured to use the net increase coin count (approximately +2.46 coins) taking into account the bonus state. That is, for example, if the remaining number of games in the advantageous zone ZG is 500 games, the expected remaining increase/decrease coin count NM is 500 games x 2.46 coins = 1,230 coins.

In step S2203, the number of coins that can be expected to be won during the current advantageous zone (total expected increase/decrease SM) is calculated based on the advantageous zone increase/decrease coin number ZM determined in step S2201 and the remaining expected increase/decrease coin number NM calculated in step S2202, taking into account the current number of games remaining in the advantageous zone. Then, in step S2204, the number of available coins that can be increased FM is calculated. The processing of step S2204 corresponds to the processing of step S2108 in the remaining game number management processing to calculate the number of available games that can be added FG, and the processing of step S2109 is processing to predict in advance that the advantageous zone will be forcibly terminated in the subsequent game due to the first forced termination condition, and the processing of step S2204 is processing to predict in advance that the advantageous zone will be forcibly terminated in the subsequent game due to the second forced termination condition. That is, in step S2204, the total expected increase/decrease SM calculated in step S2203 above is subtracted from 2,400 coins, which is the upper limit increase in the advantageous zone.

In step S2205, based on the processing result of step S2204, it is determined whether the available number of sheets FM that can be increased is 0 or less, and whether forced termination will occur in the future due to the second forced termination condition. If the available number FM is 1 or greater, it is assumed that the upper limit increase number has not been reached, and the remaining number management processing is terminated. If the available number FM is 0 or less, the processing proceeds to step S2206, where a second excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d, and the remaining number management processing is terminated. The second excess flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine whether the second forced termination condition may subsequently be met.

In this embodiment, by setting the first excess flag or the second excess flag, the implementation of the number of games addition lottery during AT mode is restricted, even if a specific role is won during the advantageous zone. More specifically, for example, if the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set during the number of games addition lottery process in AT mode, such as step S1014 or step S1201, the implementation of such lottery process is restricted, and no additional win will be won (or even if a win occurs, an additional 0 games will be added). This makes it possible to prevent the addition of an amount that cannot be continued, which could lead to the misunderstanding that the advantageous zone will continue beyond the upper limit number of games.

Note that once the first excess flag or second excess flag is set, the remaining game count management process may not be performed during the current advantageous period.

Returning to the explanation of the second interval display process (Figure 53), after executing the process of step S2005, step S2006 determines whether the number of games in the advantageous interval AG has reached the upper limit of 1500, or whether the number of coins increased or decreased in the advantageous interval ZM has reached the upper limit of 2400. If either of these forced termination conditions is met, step S2007 clears the number of games in the advantageous interval AG and the number of coins increased or decreased in the advantageous interval ZM to 0. The following step S2008 performs a process to terminate the display of the eighth display segment N8 as an interval indicator. Then, step S2009 initializes parameters and information such as various flags and counters within the advantageous interval, and then the second interval display process terminates.

More specifically, the data initialization process in step S2009 is a process that resets flags and counters set upon transition to the current advantageous zone, as well as flags and counters set during the current advantageous zone, to their initial values. For example, if an AT mode win flag or the like is set upon transition to the advantageous zone, or a VB mode win flag is set during AT mode, and these flags remain set until this initialization process, these win flags are cleared. Furthermore, during the initialization process, if an AT notification flag, AT mode flag, VB mode flag, specialized zone flag, or the like is set, these flags are also cleared. Furthermore, if a premonition counter, counter for the number of games continued in attack mode, or the like is greater than 0, all of these counters are reset to 0. In other words, the initialization process initializes all variables and parameters that affect the performance of push order notifications for advantageous zones that are advantageous states using push order notifications, and is a process that clears RAM for such variables and parameters.

If it is determined in step S2006 that the number of games in the advantageous zone AG has not reached the upper limit, or that the number of coins increased or decreased in the advantageous zone ZM has not reached the upper limit increase, the process proceeds to step S2010, where it is determined whether the normal termination conditions for the advantageous zone have been met. More specifically, it is determined whether neither the AT mode hit flag nor the AT mode flag has been set, and whether the number of remaining games to be played, including modes higher than AT mode, has reached 0. If neither the AT mode hit flag nor the AT mode flag has been set, the process proceeds to step S2007, and processing for the termination of the advantageous zone in steps S2007 to S2009 is performed, and the second zone display processing is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S2010, the second zone display processing is terminated. In this case, the zone indicator (eighth display segment N8) will continue to light up.

<About the push order indicator and section indicator displays and game progress>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous zone and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as a zone indicator will be explained with reference to Figure 56.

In this slot machine 10, as shown in Figure 56, in the normal zone, which is not an advantageous zone, the eighth display segment N8, which serves as the zone indicator, is off (not lit). In this normal zone, push order notifications are not provided. In other words, while advantageous zones have the ability to provide instruction functions such as push order notifications, normal zones are zones that do not have such instruction functions. The situation in which the display mode is normal mode mainly corresponds to the normal zone.

If, in the normal zone, for example, a weak watermelon wins the lottery to move to the advantageous zone, the number of games played in the advantageous zone (counting the number of advantageous zone games AG) will begin to be measured from the game following the game in which the winning trigger was achieved. Then, if the lottery to move to AT mode is won during the advantageous zone, and a win notification and AT notification flag are set, creating a situation in which a push order notification can occur, the conditions for starting the display of the zone indicator are met, and the eighth display segment N8 will light up.

After that, while the eighth display segment N8 is lit, a push order notification is generated using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. In this case, as described above, push order information ("1" to "6") is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7, and the player can understand the push order based on this push order information. In the push order notification, the push order information begins to be displayed when the start lever 41 is operated in that game, and ends when the third reel is stopped and turned on in that game. If the game is not the final game of the advantageous zone, only the display of the push order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 ends when the third reel is stopped and turned on, while the display of the advantageous zone by the eighth display segment N8 continues. Then, if a push order role is won again in the next game or later, the push order information corresponding to that push order role is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

When the number of continuing games in the advantageous zone reaches its upper limit, or the number of medal increases in the advantageous zone reaches its upper limit increase, and the final game of the advantageous zone is reached, the eighth display segment N8 also goes out, and the notification of the advantageous zone ends. In this embodiment, in the final game of the advantageous zone, the eighth display segment N8 goes out when medal payout is completed (by the second zone display process, which is the process that follows the payout determination process). Note that if no medal payout is made in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 goes out when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed. This allows the player to clearly understand that the game in question was the final game of the advantageous zone.

As mentioned above, the number of games in the advantageous zone is counted from the game following the game that wins the lottery to move to the advantageous zone, while the push order notification only occurs while the eighth display segment N8 is lit. In other words, even if the zone is advantageous, the push order notification does not occur in zones where the eighth display segment N8 is off (non-specific zones). In other words, by checking whether the eighth display segment N8, which serves as a zone indicator, is lit, it is possible to clearly determine whether the advantageous zone is at least in a situation where the benefit of the push order notification can be enjoyed (specific zone, actual increase zone). This prevents a difference in the degree of advantage between a player who quits the game without knowing that they are in a situation where they can enjoy the benefit of the push order notification and the successor player who takes their seat after them. In other words, when the eighth display segment N8 is not lit, the push order notification does not occur, making it possible to end the game gracefully.

In addition, with regard to the gameplay in which the degree of advantage changes according to the push order notification, the slot machine 10 is configured so that there is no difference in the degree of advantage depending on the setting value, particularly with regard to the lottery for transitioning to an advantageous zone. Situations in which push order notifications can occur, such as in AT mode, are included in advantageous zones, and push order notifications do not occur not only when the zone indicator is not displaying anything in an advantageous zone, but also in normal zones. In other words, in games that aim to benefit from push order notifications, there is no difference in the degree of advantage depending on the setting value for the first-stage lottery for transitioning to an advantageous zone. This results in a uniform degree of advantage for each gaming machine (setting value) and each game (situation), eliminating advantages/disadvantages between players. Players can fully enjoy the inherent gameplay of the slot machine 10, which is to aim for symbols to obtain bonuses, while also achieving a well-balanced gaming machine due to the relationship with the gameplay provided by the accompanying push order notifications.

<Processing related to notification effects on the sub-side>
Next, (4) the process related to the notification effect on the sub-side will be described. The various notification processes performed by the sub-side display control device 81 are described. The various notification processes include a performance setting process executed at a predetermined cycle (1.49 msec). This performance setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 57.

In the effect setting process, first, in step S2301, it is determined whether a new command has been received from the main control device 101. If a new command has been received, in step S2302, a process is executed to store the received command in RAM 183. RAM 183 is provided with a command storage area, which is configured as a ring buffer that can store multiple commands individually and can read commands from previously stored commands.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2301, or after the processing of step S2302 has been executed, step S2303 determines whether the newly received command is a bet command. A bet command is a command output from the main control device 101 in response to a bet operation, and includes the bet command set in step S207 of the normal processing, as well as the AT mode win notification command, VB mode win notification command, and bonus win notification command in the mode transition notification processing (Figure 45). If the command is one of these bet commands, step S2304 executes the bet effect setting processing.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2303, or after the processing of step S2304 has been executed, step S2305 determines whether the newly received command is a start command. A start command is a command output from the main control unit 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step S313 of the lottery processing, there are also premonition commands and additional commands set in the first to third specific role processing (Figures 33 to 36), and push order notification commands set in the push order role processing (Figure 47). If it is one of these start commands, step S2306 executes the start effect setting processing.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2305, or after the processing of step S2306 has been executed, step S2307 determines whether the newly received command is a command at the time of each stop operation. A command at the time of each stop operation is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the stop operation being performed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and is a stop command command set in step S405 of the reel control processing (Figure 18). If the stop command is a stop command at the time of each stop operation, step S2308 executes a process for setting the effect at the time of each stop operation.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2307, or after the processing of step S2308 has been executed, step S2309 determines whether the newly received command is an all-stop command. An all-stop command is a command output from the main control device 101 when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. It includes the winning result command set in step S411 of the reel control processing (FIG. 18), as well as the AT mode start command, VB mode start command, specialized zone start command, AT mode end command, VB mode end command, specialized zone end command, first fixed RT start command, second fixed RT start command, etc., which are set in the winning result response processing (FIG. 48). If it is one of these all-stop commands, step S2310 executes the all-stop effect setting processing.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2309, or after the processing of step S2310 has been executed, other processing is executed in step S2311, and then the effect setting processing is terminated. In step S2311, effects based on commands from the main control device 101 other than when a bet is made, when the game is started, or when the game is stopped (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59), effects based on signals from sensors connected without going through the main control device 101 (such as an effect switch detection sensor), and settings for error notifications are set.

The following explains the bet effect setting process, start effect setting process, each stop operation effect setting process, and all stop effect setting process. When explaining each effect setting process, reference will be made to the overview diagrams of the display effects in Figures 67 to 72.

<Bet effect setting process>
The bet time effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2401, it is determined whether the currently received bet time command includes an AT mode winning notification command. If an AT mode winning notification command is included, in step S2402, processing is performed to set up an AT mode winning notification effect. In the AT mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in Figure 68 (a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the words "AT confirmed." In addition, in the AT mode winning notification effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a high-pitched female voice saying "I did it!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

If an AT mode winning notification command is not included in step S2401, then in step S2403 it is determined whether or not a VB mode winning notification command is included as a bet time command received at this time. If a VB mode winning notification command is included, then in step S2404 processing is performed to set a VB mode winning notification effect. In a VB mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "V-BONUS confirmed." Additionally, in a VB mode winning notification effect, control is exercised so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a male and female voice saying "Super lucky!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

If a VB mode winning notification command is not included in step S2403, it is determined in step S2405 whether the currently received bet time command includes a bonus winning notification command. If a bonus winning notification command is included, processing is performed in step S2406 to set up a bonus winning notification effect. In the bonus winning notification effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Yay! Bonus confirmed." In addition, in the bonus winning notification effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a male or female voice saying "Yay!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

If a bonus winning notification command is not included in step S2405, then in step S2407 it is determined whether or not a specialized zone winning notification command is included as a bet time command received this time. If a specialized zone winning notification command is included, then in step S2408 processing is performed to set up a specialized zone winning notification effect. In the specialized zone winning notification effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Get on with it!!" In addition, in the specialized zone winning notification effect, control is exercised so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, the deep voice of an ecstatic man saying "Let's get into it!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

After executing any of the processes in steps S2402, S2404, S2406, and S2408, or if a negative judgment is made in step S2407, step S2409 sets other bet effects, and then the effect setting process ends. The process in step S2409 may, for example, turn off the lamps around (or inside) the credit insertion switches 56-58 for the corresponding bet number in response to the reception of a bet command to indicate that the operation has been accepted, or may return from demo mode, which transitions to a certain condition when no play has been made for a predetermined period of time, or may turn on the lamp around the start lever 41 to indicate that the operation has been validated.

<Start-up performance setting process>
Next, the start-up effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2501, a display mode setting process is performed. In this process, the display mode currently set on the main control device 101 is determined to be normal mode, AT mode, VB mode, or specialized zone, and the auxiliary display unit 65 is set to display the corresponding display mode. Specifically, the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 on the display control device 81 also has areas for setting the AT mode flag, VB mode flag, and specialized zone flag as flags for identifying the display mode, and the corresponding flag is set when each mode starts and cleared when it ends. In step S2501, these various mode-compatible flags are identified to identify the current display mode, and the auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, upper lamp 63, etc. are controlled to display the corresponding effect.

Then, in step S2502, the pending shift process is executed. The pending shift process is a process for displaying pending information related to the AT mode transition lottery, and this process will be explained in detail later.

In step S2503, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether the lottery result for the game to be started this time is a press order role win. If a press order role win is determined, in step S2504, processing for notifying the press order is performed. Here, the press order notification processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 60.

In step S2601, it is determined whether the currently received start command includes a push order notification command. If a push order notification command is not included, the push order notification process is terminated. If a push order notification command is included, the process proceeds to step S2602.

In step S2602, it is determined whether the result of this lottery is the first promotion replay 1 to 4. If it is the first promotion replay 1 to 4, in step S2603, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to notify the push order that will result in the third replay winning, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2602 that the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are not a win, then in step S2604 it is determined whether the current lottery result is a fall replay 1 to 3. If it is a fall replay 1 to 3, the process proceeds to step S2605, where the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to notify the player of the push order that will result in the first replay win, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2604 that the result is not one of Fall Replays 1 to 3, then in step S2606 it is determined whether the result of this lottery is Second Promotion Replay 1 or 2. If it is Second Promotion Replay 1 or 2, then in step S2607 it is determined whether a VB mode winning notification effect or a specialized zone winning notification effect has already been executed. For example, when setting the VB mode winning notification effect in step S2404 or the specialized zone winning notification effect in step S2408, a notification flag indicating that a VB win or specialized zone win has been notified is set in the various flag storage area 183a of RAM 183. The notification flag is cleared upon transition to VB mode or the specialized zone. Then, in step S2607, it is desirable to determine whether or not the notification flag exists. If a win has already been announced in VB mode or the specialized zone, in step S2608 the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. is controlled to announce the push order for the fourth and fifth replay wins, and then the push order announcement process ends. If a win has not already been announced in VB mode or the specialized zone, proceed to step S2605, announce the push order for the first replay win, and then end the push order announcement process.

If it is determined in step S2606 that the result is not the second promotion replay 1 or 2, then in step S2609 it is determined whether the result of this lottery is a BAR replay. If it is a BAR replay, then in step S2610 it is determined whether the specialized zone winning notification effect has already been executed. If a winning notification for the specialized zone has already been issued, then in step S2611 the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to issue a push order notification for the seventh replay winning, and then the push order notification processing is terminated. If a winning notification for the specialized zone has not already been issued, then proceed to step S2603 above, issue a push order notification for the third replay winning, and then terminate the push order notification processing.

If it is determined in step S2609 that the result is not a BAR replay, then in step S2612 it is determined whether the result of this lottery is a bell. If a bell win is achieved, then in step S2613 the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to notify the player of the push order that will result in a bell win as the first minor win, and then the push order notification process ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2612, a judgment is made in step S2614 as to whether the result of this lottery is a transition replay. If a transition replay is won, a special notification execution process is executed in step S2615, and then the push order notification process is terminated. The processes of steps S2614 and S2615 are processes for an embodiment in which a transition replay may be won, and these processes will be explained in detail later. If a negative judgment is made in step S2614, the push order notification process is terminated as is.

Returning to the explanation of the start-up effect setting process (Figure 59), if it is determined in step S2503 that the push sequence role has not been won, it is determined in step S2505 whether or not a transition trigger role has been won. If a transition trigger role has been won, processing for notifying the transition trigger role is performed in step S2506. The processing for notifying the transition trigger role will be explained in detail later.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2505, or after the processing of step S2504 or step S2506 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S2507. In step S2507, it is determined whether an additional command has been received as the current start command. If an additional command has been received, in step S2508, processing is performed to set the additional effect in advance so that an additional effect for the number of games corresponding to the additional command will be executed when the game stops. As an additional effect, for example, as shown in Figures 67(a) to 67(c), a number corresponding to the number of games to be added is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, the additional effect is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound like "Kyukyukyukyukyueen!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

Details of the additional effect setting process in step S2508 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 61.

In step S2701, a process is performed to determine the number of additional games to be notified based on the currently received additional command. In the following step S2702, a process is performed to determine the notification timing. The notification timing is the timing at which the additional effect is executed, and this timing is determined by the processing on the main control device 101 side (additional effect notification processing) described above. Information on the determined timing is set in the above-mentioned additional command and output. Therefore, the display control device 81 side can determine the timing at which the additional effect should be executed by reading this additional command. The notification timing is set to the game at which the additional effect should be executed and the timing corresponding to the stop operation of each stop switch 42 to 44.

After determining the notification timing in step S2702, step S2703 determines whether the determination result in step S2702 indicates that an additional effect will be performed in the current game. An additional effect will not be performed in the current game if a later addition notification is selected, in which case the additional effect setting process ends. If an additional effect will be performed in the current game, step S2704 determines whether the timing for executing the additional effect in the current game was when any of the reels stopped ON. If the timing was when the reels stopped ON, step S2705 sets the target reel for generating the additional effect, and sets the additional effect to occur when the target reel is stopped ON. Specifically, a process is performed to set one of the first reel stop ON operation flag to the third reel stop ON operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a. These flags are used by the CPU 181 to determine the timing for generating the additional effect. In step S2705, the effect data for the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games to be generated when the stop ON operation is performed is read from the effect data storage area 182b, and the data is temporarily stored in a predetermined effect data setting area. When the CPU 181 determines that an additional effect will be generated at the timing corresponding to the stop ON operation flag, it reads the effect data temporarily stored in the effect data setting area and performs the additional effect.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2704, in step S2706 it is determined whether the first or second reel was stopped and turned off. If these reels were stopped and turned off, in step S2707 a target reel is set for generating an additional effect, and the additional effect is set to occur when the target reel is stopped and turned off. Specifically, a process is performed to set either a flag for when the first reel is stopped and off or a flag for when the second reel is stopped and turned off in the various flag storage area 183a. These flags are also flags that allow the CPU 181 to determine the timing of the additional effect occurrence. Also in step S2707, the effect data for the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games is read from the effect data storage area 182b, and the data is temporarily stored in a predetermined effect data setting area.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2706, in step S2708, the current additional effect is set to occur when all reels stop (when the third reel is stopped and turned OFF). Specifically, a process is performed to set a flag for when the third reel is stopped and turned OFF in the various flag storage area 183a. Also in step S2708, temporary storage process is performed for the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games. After the process of step S2705, step S2707, or step S2708 is executed, the process of setting the additional effect is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the start-up effect setting process, if no additional command is received in step S2507, or after the process of step S2508 is executed, the bonus effect setting process is executed in step S2509, the continuous effect setting process is executed in step S2510, and then other start-up effects are set in step S2511, after which the start-up effect setting process ends. The bonus effect setting process and the continuous effect setting process will be explained in detail later. The process of step S2511 performs, for example, setting effects that suggest the lottery results in response to the start of the game, or turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted, etc.

<Performance setting process for each stop operation>
Next, the process for setting the effects at the time of each stop operation, which is performed in step S2308, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2801, it is determined whether the stop operation command received this time is a stop ON operation command. A stop ON operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 when one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is pressed during the reel stop operation.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2801, the process proceeds to step S2802, where it is determined whether an effect that occurs when a reel is stopped is set as an effect for this game. If it is not set, the setting process is terminated. If it is set, it is determined in step S2803 whether the stop ON operation command received this time is a stop operation for the reel that is the target of the effect that is set for the stop ON operation. If it is not a stop ON operation for the target reel, the setting process is terminated. If it is a stop ON operation for the target reel, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled in step S2804 so that an effect is displayed when a stop ON operation is performed, and then the setting process is terminated.

For example, if an additional effect is set as the effect to be displayed when the current stop ON operation is performed, an additional effect will be generated on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed (turned ON), as shown in FIG. 67(a). In this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional effect will be emitted from the speaker 64.

Also, for example, if the current game is a winning push order role and the push order notification effect is set, the corresponding reel will stop based on each stop ON operation, and the push order notification effect will change to an effect indicating the next reel to be operated. Specifically, if all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning before the stop ON operation effect, a display indicating the first reel to be operated is shown as in FIG. 46(a). Then, when the corresponding reel (middle reel 32M in the figure) stops due to the stop ON operation corresponding to the first reel, the display changes to an effect indicating the next reel to be operated (right reel 32R in the figure), as shown in FIG. 46(b). Also, if two reels are spinning before the stop ON operation effect, a display indicating the second reel to be stopped is shown as in FIG. 46(b), and when the second reel stops due to the stop ON operation, the display changes to an effect indicating the third reel to be stopped (FIG. 46(c)).

If a negative judgment is made in step S2801, the process proceeds to step S2805, where it is determined whether the stop operation command received this time is a stop OFF operation command. A stop OFF operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, which is one of the operations to stop each reel, is completed.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2805, the process proceeds to step S2806, where it is determined whether an effect that occurs when a reel is stopped/turned off is set as an effect for this game. If it is not set, the setting process is terminated. If it is set, it is determined in step S2807 whether the stop/turned off operation command received this time is a stop operation for the reel that is the target of the effect that is set for the stop/turned off operation. If it is not a stop/turned off operation for the target reel, the setting process is terminated. If it is a stop/turned off operation for the target reel, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled in step S2808 so that an effect is displayed when a stop/turned off operation is performed, and then the setting process is terminated.

For example, if an additional effect is set as the effect to be displayed during the current stop OFF operation, as shown in FIG. 67(b), when the pressing of the stop switch 42-44 is stopped and the hand is released from the stop switch 42-44, an additional effect will be generated on the auxiliary display unit 65. In this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional effect will be emitted from the speaker 64. If a negative judgment is made in step S2805, this effect setting process will be terminated.

<Performance setting process when all stops>
Next, the process for setting the effects when the machine is completely stopped will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S2901, it is determined whether the currently received stop command includes an AT mode start command. If an AT mode start command is included, processing is performed in step S2902 to set the AT mode start effect. In the AT mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 69(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "AT Start!! LV.1". In addition, in the AT mode start effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a high-pitched female voice saying "Here we go!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

By the way, the "LV.1" display during the AT mode start effect corresponds to the AT mode level. In other words, it is a display indicating that the AT mode being started this time is LV.1 mode. Then, when the AT mode level is promoted to LV.2 mode (when a promotion command is received), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "LV.2" as a promotion effect. Furthermore, when the AT mode level is promoted to LV.3 mode, the text "LV.3" is displayed, and when it is promoted to LV.4 mode, the text "LV.4" is displayed.

If an AT mode start command is not included in step S2901, it is determined in step S2903 whether the currently received stop command includes an AT mode end command. If an AT mode end command is included, processing is performed in step S2904 to set the AT mode end effect. In the AT mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 69(b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the words "AT END" and also displays the number of games continued in the current AT mode (including VB mode and specialized zone), as well as the total number of coins paid out in the current AT mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus). In addition, in the AT mode end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, a high-pitched female voice saying "See you later").

If the AT mode end command is not included in step S2903, then in step S2905 it is determined whether the currently received stop command includes a VB mode start command. If the VB mode start command is included, then in step S2906 processing is performed to set the VB mode start effect. In the VB mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 70(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "777 Lucky!!" In addition, in the VB mode start effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a male and female voice saying "Bonus Start!!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

If a VB mode start command is not included in step S2905, it is determined in step S2907 whether the currently received stop command includes a VB mode end command. If a VB mode end command is included, processing is performed to set the VB mode end effect in step S2908. In the VB mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 70(b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the words "V-BONUS END," and also displays the number of games continued in the AT mode (including VB mode and specialized zones) at the end of the current VB mode, and the total number of coins paid out in the AT mode (including VB mode, specialized zones, and bonuses) at the end of the current VB mode. In addition, in the VB mode end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, a male or female voice saying "It's not over yet").

If step S2907 does not include a VB mode end command, step S2909 determines whether the currently received stop command includes a specialized zone start command. If a specialized zone start command is included, step S2910 performs processing to set the specialized zone start effect. In the specialized zone start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 71(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Add-on Challenge!!" and displays a character indicating that this is a special mode in which AT mode add-ons are likely to occur. In addition, in the specialized zone start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, a boy's voice saying "Let's go").

If a specialized zone start command is not included in step S2909, then in step S2911 it is determined whether the currently received stop command includes a specialized zone end command. If a specialized zone end command is included, then in step S2912 a process is performed to set a specialized zone end effect. In the specialized zone end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of games that have been added in this specialized zone. Additionally, in the specialized zone end effect, control is exercised so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound like "Kyukyukyukyukyueen!") is emitted from the speaker 64. It is preferable to vary the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 and the sound effect emitted from the speaker 64 depending on the total number of games that have been added.

If a specialized zone end command is not included in step S2911, then in step S2913 it is determined whether the currently received stop command includes a bonus end command. If a bonus end command is included, then in step S2914 a process is performed to set up a bonus end effect. In the bonus end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of coins won during the current bonus, and if the bonus transitioned to AT mode, VB mode, or a specialized zone, the total number of coins won in AT mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus) is displayed. In addition, in the bonus end effect, depending on whether the AT mode was successful or not and the number of added games, effects are displayed using characters or the like that suggest these contents.

After executing any of the processes in step S2902, step S2904, step S2906, step S2908, step S2910, step S2912, and step S2914, or after a negative judgment is made in step S2913, the process proceeds to step S2915. In step S2915, if an additional effect is set, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to execute the additional effect. As already explained, the additional effect is set in step S2507 of the start-up effect setting process. Specifically, if the timing for the current additional effect to occur is set to when all reels stop in the additional effect setting process (FIG. 61), the additional effect will occur on the auxiliary display unit 65 when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop, as shown in FIG. 67(c). In this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional effect will be emitted from the speaker 64.

Then, in step S2916, the pending display process is executed. The pending display process is a process for displaying pending information related to the AT mode transition lottery, and this process will be explained in detail later. Then, in step S2917, other stop-time effects are set, and then this effect setting process ends. In step S2917, for example, the upper lamp 63 is controlled to light up in a color corresponding to the winning combination, a sound effect corresponding to the payout number of the winning combination is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64, and a sound effect corresponding to the automatic bet during a replay is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64.

As described above, various processes for notifying the transition of display modes are performed on the display control device 81 side based on various commands from the main control device 101, and these notifications are made by the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. In addition to notifying the transition of display modes, the display control device 81 side also performs various in-game presentation processes.

<In-game effects processing>
In this embodiment, bonus effects and continuous effects are provided as effects during various games. Bonus effects are effects that are performed in each game during a bonus state that is entered based on winning the first BB or second BB. Continuous effects are effects that make the player look forward to a favorable result (winning a bonus, AT mode, VB mode, etc.), and can be continued over multiple games (four games in this embodiment), and are effects that notify the player of whether or not the favorable result was achieved in the final game.

<Bonus performance setting process>
First, the bonus effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 64. The bonus effect setting process is a process carried out in step S2509 of the start effect setting process (Fig. 59).

In the bonus effect setting process, step S3001 determines whether a bonus game will start from the current game. The bonus game refers to the game from the game following the first or second BB win until the end of the bonus. A positive determination is made in step S3001 if a first or second BB win was achieved in the previous game. In this case, step S3002 determines the type of bonus for this game. More specifically, it determines whether the current bonus game is based on a first BB win or a second BB win. Then, in step S3003, the bonus effect setting process is set to correspond to the bonus type determined in step S3002. If a negative determination is made in step S3001, or after step S3003 has been executed, the bonus effect setting process ends.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the content of the bonus effects in the bonus game based on the first BB win and the bonus game based on the second BB win are different enough to be discernible to the player. More specifically, in the bonus game based on the first BB win, a bonus effect is set in which a live-action video effect is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, while in the bonus game based on the second BB win, a bonus effect is set in which an animation effect is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, the sound effects (songs) output from the speaker 64 are different for the first BB and the second BB.

All bonus effects are implemented independently of the progress of the game, and are set to be repeated as long as the bonus game continues. For example, a five-minute video or animation effect is set as a unit effect, and when five minutes have passed since the start of the bonus effect and the unit effect ends, the unit effect is set to start again from the beginning. The effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 may be configured to stop on the screen at the end of the unit effect, with only the sound effects (songs) being repeated. The effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 may also be configured to be implemented in synchronization with the progress of each game, with only the sound effects (songs) being implemented independently of the progress of each game.

<Processing for continuous performance>
The outline of the continuous performance will be explained with reference to FIG.

For example, as shown in FIG. 72(a), at the start of the first game in which a continuous effect is set, a display is displayed indicating the number of times the continuous effect will continue (the illustration shows a four-stage Daruma Otoshi effect corresponding to the four games of continuous effect). Then, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, a display is displayed to notify whether the continuous effect will continue (the illustration shows a display indicating that the first stage of Daruma Otoshi is successful, indicating that the continuous effect will continue). If the continuous effect is interrupted, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, a display is displayed to notify that the continuous effect will end halfway (for example, a display indicating that the first stage of Daruma Otoshi fails). The display indicating whether the continuous effect will continue is the same for each game in the continuous effect.

As shown in Figure 72 (b), at the start of the second game in which a consecutive performance has been set, a display is displayed indicating the number of consecutive performances remaining (in the figure, a Daruma Otoshi performance with three stages remaining). Then, at the end of the second game, a performance is displayed to notify whether the consecutive performances will continue (in the figure, a performance is shown in which the second stage of the Daruma Otoshi has been successful, indicating that the consecutive performances will continue).

As shown in Figure 72 (c), at the start of the third game in which consecutive effects have been set, a display is displayed indicating the number of consecutive effects remaining (in the figure, a display of two Daruma Otoshi stages remaining). Then, at the end of the third game, a display is displayed to notify whether the consecutive effects will continue (in the figure, a display indicating that the third Daruma Otoshi stage has been successful, indicating that the consecutive effects will continue).

As shown in Figure 72 (d), at the start of the final game (fourth game) of the consecutive effects, a display is displayed indicating that this is the final game of the consecutive effects (in the figure, a one-stage Daruma Otoshi display). Then, at the end of the final game, a display is displayed indicating whether the result was advantageous to the player (in the figure, a display indicating that the final Daruma Otoshi was successful).

As described above, in continuous effects, the effects of the next game are set by continuing the effects of the previous game, and the effects of each game are continuous. It is also possible to clearly see which game the current game is since the start of the continuous effects (how many games remain until the end of the continuous effects).

In each game of continuous effects, the continuation rate of the continuous effects into the next game is set so that the further the game progresses, the higher the continuation rate becomes. In other words, the likelihood of announcing that the continuous effects will not continue is highest at the end of the first game of the continuous effects, and the further the game progresses, the lower the likelihood of announcing that the continuous effects will not continue. Therefore, in continuous effects, the level of player interest varies greatly depending on which game in the continuous effects the current game is, and interest increases as the game progresses from the starting game to the ending game.

Below, we will explain the processes related to the above-mentioned continuous effects, namely the transition trigger role notification process (step S2506) in the start-time effect setting process (Figure 59) and the continuous effect setting process (step S2510).

<Transition trigger role notification processing>
In the transition trigger role notification process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 65, first, in step S3101, a chance role lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to set a chance role as the role of the current game. In the chance role, as shown in FIG. 71(b), for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the word "Chance!!" and characters with exclamation marks are displayed corresponding to each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Additionally, in the chance role, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (e.g., an electronic sound "Cui"). In the chance role lottery process, for example, a lottery is executed so that a chance role occurs approximately half the time when a transition trigger role is won. Note that the winning probability of the chance role lottery process may be configured to vary depending on the type of transition trigger role, the display mode, the game status, a setting value, etc. In the following step S3102, it is determined whether or not the lottery process of step S3101 has been won. If a win has been achieved, a chance effect is set to be performed as the effect for this game in step S3103.

Here, we will explain the recommended game modes for achieving wins for each minor role, including transition trigger roles, in this slot machine 10.

Among the winning combinations in each game, the minor combinations that cannot be won depending on the timing of the operation of the stop switches 42-44, resulting in so-called missed wins, are set to Strong Cherry, Weak Cherry, Strong Watermelon, and Weak Watermelon. More specifically, as already explained, Strong Cherry is a combination that can be won by any of the 28th minor combination and the 32nd through 35th minor combinations, while the 28th minor combination symbol and the 32nd through 35th minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are the "Cherry" symbol and the "Second Replay" symbol. In this case, in a three-bet game, if the left reel 32L is stopped when the 7th "Red Bell" symbol through the 20th "White Bell" symbol reach the top row of the left reel 32L, none of the 28th minor combination symbol and the 32nd through 35th minor combination symbols, the "Cherry" symbol and the "Second Replay" symbol, can be stopped on a winning line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these times, the strong cherry combination will be missed.

Furthermore, while the weak cherry is a winning combination for the 27th minor win symbol and any of the 32nd to 35th minor win symbols, the 27th minor win symbol and the 32nd to 35th minor win symbols on the left reel 32L are the "cherry" symbol and the "2nd replay" symbol. Even in this case, if the left reel 32L is stopped when the 7th "red bell" symbol through the 20th "white bell" symbol reach the top row of the left reel 32L in a 3-bet game, none of the 27th minor win symbol and the 32nd to 35th minor win symbols, the "cherry" symbol and the "2nd replay" symbol, can be stopped on a winning line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these times, the weak cherry symbol will be missed.

A strong watermelon is a combination in which either the 30th or 41st minor combination can win, and the 30th and 41st minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are "watermelon" symbols. In this case, in a 3-bet game, if the left reel 32L is stopped when the 9th "red 7" symbol through the 3rd "white bell" symbol reach the top row of the left reel 32L, the 30th and 41st minor combination symbols, the "watermelon" symbols, cannot be stopped on an active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these times, the strong watermelon combination will be missed.

A weak watermelon is a winning combination in which either the 29th or 41st minor combination can be won, and the 29th and 41st minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are "watermelon" symbols. Even in this case, in a 3-bet game, if the left reel 32L is stopped when the 9th "red 7" symbol through the 3rd "white bell" symbol reach the top row of the left reel 32L, the 29th and 41st minor combination symbols, the "watermelon" symbols, cannot be stopped on an active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these times, the weak watermelon combination will be missed.

In this case, if you want to stop the left reel 32L while still maintaining the possibility of winning for any of these combinations that could result in a miss, you need to stop the reel when the fourth "Cherry" symbol through the sixth "Second Replay" symbol reach the top of the left reel 32L. In the following explanation, this operation mode of the left reel 32L, which does not result in a miss, is also referred to as a specific operation mode (first operation mode), and the operation modes that result in the misses described above are also referred to as non-specific operation modes (second operation modes).

The chance effect set in step S3103 suggests that the current winning combination is one of the transition trigger combinations, but is set up so that it is impossible or difficult to determine which transition trigger combination it is. In other words, when the chance effect is activated, the winning combination for this game is likely to be one of the following: strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, etc., but it is not possible to determine whether it is a strong cherry or weak cherry, whether it is a strong watermelon or weak watermelon, or whether it is a strong cherry or strong watermelon. Therefore, the player will operate the left reel 32L in the specific operation mode described above to avoid missing out, regardless of which transition trigger combination they have won.

Furthermore, the chance effect does not necessarily occur in a game in which a transition trigger role is won, but rather occurs on the condition that the chance effect lottery process (step S3101) is won. Therefore, to avoid missing out on a transition trigger role, it is recommended that you operate the left reel 32L in the above-mentioned specific operation mode in every game, even during normal play.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3102, or after processing in step S3103, the process proceeds to step S3104. In step S3104, it is determined whether or not a premonition command is included as the current start command. If a premonition command is not included, it is determined in step S3105 whether or not an additional command is included as the current start command. If an additional command is not included, it is determined in step S3106 whether or not a bonus has been won. If a bonus has not been won, that is, if the lottery result was a win of a transition trigger role such as a strong cherry or weak watermelon, but the lottery for transition to AT mode or VB mode or the lottery for adding on the number of continued games has not been won, and the bonus has not been won, then in step S3107, lottery processing for the pseudo premonition mode is executed. Pseudo premonition mode is visually difficult to distinguish from premonition mode, but while premonition mode notifies the player of a favorable result (such as winning in AT mode) based on the completion of the premonition game number, pseudo premonition mode ends without notifying the player of a favorable result based on the completion of the pseudo premonition game number.

In step S3107, a table for the pseudo-premonition mode lottery is obtained from the various table storage area 182a of ROM 182, and a lottery counter is obtained from the various counter area 183b, and a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute the pseudo-premonition mode. The table for the pseudo-premonition mode lottery is set so that the probability of winning the pseudo-premonition mode lottery varies depending on the type of transition trigger role that has been won; for example, it is set so that a strong cherry has a higher probability of winning the pseudo-premonition mode lottery than a weak cherry.

In step S3108, based on the processing result of step S3107, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-omen mode lottery has been won. If the result has been won, in step S3109, a lottery process is performed to determine the number of games to be played in the pseudo-omen mode. This process corresponds to step S909 on the main control unit 101 side, and a pseudo-omen game number of 1 between 1 and 20 is randomly determined by lottery. However, as described above, unlike the premonition modes based on various wins, the number of pseudo-omen games is determined to be 20 games or less. Furthermore, zero games are not selected in the lottery for the number of pseudo-omen games. In the following step S3110, the number of pseudo-omen games determined in step S3109 is set in the continuous effect counter provided in the various counter area 183b. The continuous effect counter is a counter for keeping track of the number of games until the result is announced, and is decremented by one for each game. For example, in a configuration in which four games are played consecutively, the consecutive performance begins in the game in which the consecutive performance counter reaches 4, and the result is announced in the game in which the consecutive performance counter reaches 0. In this embodiment, when the premonition mode or pseudo-premonition mode is set, the premonition mode or pseudo-premonition mode ends after a consecutive performance. Then, by inputting the number of pseudo-premonition games into the consecutive performance counter in step S3110, the consecutive performance will begin when the number of games remaining in the pseudo-premonition mode corresponds to the start of the consecutive performance (four games remaining).

In step S3111, a process is executed to set a pseudo flag indicating pseudo premonition mode in the various flag storage area 183a. In the following step S3112, a continuous performance flag is set. After that, the process for notifying the transition trigger role is terminated. Furthermore, if a positive judgment is made in any of steps S3104 to S3106, or a negative judgment is made in step S3108, the process for notifying the transition trigger role is terminated.

<Continuous performance setting process>
Next, the continuous effect setting process performed in step S2510 of the start-up effect setting process (FIG. 59) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S3201, it is determined whether the currently received start command includes a premonition command. If a premonition command is included, in step S3202, the number of premonition games in premonition mode included in the premonition command is entered into the continuous effect counter. As a result, when the number of remaining games in premonition mode corresponds to the start of continuous effects (4 games remaining), continuous effects will begin. Note that if the premonition game number of 1 to 3 games is entered into the continuous effect counter in step S3202, the continuous effects will start from the middle. For example, if 2 is entered into the continuous effect counter in step S3202, the continuous effects will start from the current game and will be performed from the third game of the continuous effects as shown in Figure 72 (c). Furthermore, if 0 is entered into the continuous effect counter, i.e., if a win notification for AT mode or the like is made without going through the premonition mode, continuous effects will not be executed. After processing in step S3202, the continuous effect flag is set in step S3203.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3201, or after executing the processing of step S3203, the process proceeds to step S3204. In step S3204, it is determined whether the continuous performance flag is set. If the continuous performance flag is set, the continuous performance counter is decremented by 1 in step S3205. Then, in step S3206, it is determined whether the continuous performance counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to continuous performance. If the continuous performance counter is a number corresponding to continuous performance, it is determined in step S3207 whether the pseudo flag is set. If the pseudo flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3208, where the performance table for this premonition is obtained from the various table memory area 182a. Then, in step S3209, the performance data for the corresponding continuous performance is identified from the performance table for this premonition and the continuous performance counter, the corresponding performance data is obtained from the performance data memory area 182b of ROM 182, and the process is performed to set it as the current continuous performance. The continuous effect data specified by this premonition effect table is effect data indicating that the continuous effect will continue into the next game if the continuous effect counter is 1-3, and effect data indicating that the current continuous effect will end successfully if the continuous effect counter is 0.

If it is determined in step S3207 that the pseudo flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3210. In step S3210, a pseudo premonition effect table is obtained from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S3211, the effect data for the corresponding continuous effect is identified from the pseudo premonition effect table and the continuous effect counter, the corresponding effect data is obtained from the effect data storage area 182b of ROM 182, and processing is performed to set this as the current continuous effect. The continuous effect data identified from the pseudo premonition effect table is either effect data indicating that the continuous effect will continue into the next game or effect data indicating that it will not continue if the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, and effect data indicating that the current continuous effect will end in failure if the continuous effect counter is 0.

Note that when the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, the effect data specified from the pseudo premonition effect table includes those in which no continuous effect is set. For example, when the continuous effect counter is 3 or 2, no continuous effect data is set; when the continuous effect counter is 1, effect data for the first game of the continuous effect is set, indicating that the continuous effect will continue until the next game, as shown in Figure 72(a); and when the continuous effect counter is 0, effect data for the second game of the continuous effect is set, indicating that the continuous effect will not continue until the next game, as shown in Figure 72(b). This makes it possible to set an effect in which the continuous effect is interrupted midway in a game in which the number of pseudo premonition games in the pseudo premonition mode is 0.

After performing step S3209 or step S3211, step S3212 determines whether the continuous performance counter is 0. If the continuous performance counter is 0, step S3213 performs processing to clear the continuous performance flag and pseudo flag. If the pseudo flag is not set, that state is maintained. If a negative judgment is made in step S3204, step S3206, or step S3212, or after performing step S3213, this continuous performance setting processing is terminated.

As described above, in this slot machine 10, the main control unit 101 performs a lottery process based on the insertion of a medal as a gaming medium and the start operation of the start lever 41. The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begin to spin, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop based on the stop operation of the stop switches 42-44. If the combination of symbols that stops on an active line corresponds to the result of the lottery process, the corresponding bonus is awarded. In this configuration, multiple RT states with different probabilities of a replay resulting from the lottery process are provided, and the RT state transition occurs when a corresponding promotion replay or fall replay is won. The possibility of winning a corresponding replay is determined by the result of the win/lose lottery as well as the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44. The operation sequence is notified when a player wins a transition lottery to a favorable zone, which is conducted based on the result of the lottery process, and transitions to the favorable zone. Furthermore, a transition lottery to an AT mode included in the favorable zone is won, and the player transitions to the AT mode. The result of the lottery process is a push order bell, and depending on the order in which the stop switches 42-44 are operated, it is possible to achieve this push order bell winning and win medals. Then, by transitioning to AT mode and transitioning to the second RT state or third RT state, which are RT states with improved replay probability, it is possible to achieve the push order bell winning in that RT state with improved replay probability, making it possible to win a large number of medals.

As already explained, when switching to AT mode, an initial number of games (50) is set, and it becomes possible to play in AT mode for that initial number of games. If you win an additional lottery in AT mode, the number of games you can continue playing in AT mode is increased, and the number of games you can play in AT mode increases. As a result, the number of medals you can win in that AT mode can also increase.

When the number of remaining games in AT mode reaches 0 and the number of remaining games in other display modes within the advantageous zone reaches 0, or when the conditions for forcibly terminating the advantageous zone (1,500 games played or an increase of 2,400 coins) are met, the advantageous zone (AT mode) termination process is carried out in the second zone display process. As already explained, the termination process for the advantageous zone involves initializing various parameters (various information) within the advantageous zone, so that information within the advantageous zone is not carried over after the advantageous zone ends, making it possible to clearly distinguish between advantageous zones and normal zones.

The following describes the lottery method for the AT mode transition lottery of this slot machine 10.

As already explained, the AT mode transition lottery is executed in the lottery result response process during the first specific role processing of the game after the transition to the advantageous zone. The AT mode transition lottery is executed based on the lottery result of the lottery process for the game in which the transition lottery is executed (hereinafter referred to as the "game lottery result" or simply the "lottery result"), the AT mode transition lottery table, and a random number (counter value) used for the lottery. The lottery result for each game is the result of the lottery process executed based on the start operation of each game (operation of the start lever 41), and the AT mode transition lottery table is pre-stored in the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105. In contrast, the random number for the lottery is configured to be obtained in advance in a game prior to the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is executed.

Figure 74 is a flowchart showing the random number acquisition process, which is a process for pre-acquiring a random number for the AT mode transition lottery. The random number acquisition process is performed in step S416 of the reel control process (Figure 18), and is performed after the stop operation for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has been performed. In other words, it is performed based on the third stop OFF operation in the third stop operation among the stop operations for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In step S3301, a process is executed to obtain the AT counter C stored in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. The AT counter C corresponds to a random number used in the AT mode transition lottery. The AT counter C is a loop counter that is incremented by one within the range of 1 to 128 and returns to 1 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 128). The AT counter C is updated periodically, and is incremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is initiated, for example.

In addition, like the free-running counter and hardware circuit used to determine whether a winning combination has been achieved, a dedicated free-running counter and hardware circuit may be used, and the hardware circuit may latch the value of the free-running counter before the processing of step S3301 (for example, when the third stop OFF operation is performed), and the latched value may be read in step S3301.In addition, the latched value may be temporarily stored in a specified area of RAM 106 until the processing of step S3301 is performed.

In step S3302, the value of the AT counter C obtained in step S3301 is stored in the lottery information storage area 106f of the RAM 106. As shown in FIG. 74, the lottery information storage area 106f includes a storage area RE and an execution area AE. The storage area RE consists of multiple storage areas, including a first storage area RE1 to a tenth storage area RE10.

When the conditions for acquiring the AT counter C are met, the AT counter C is stored in chronological order in the first memory area RE1 to the tenth memory area RE10, in the order of the first memory area RE1 → second memory area RE2 → third memory area RE3, etc. By having ten memory areas as multiple memory areas, up to ten random numbers used in the AT mode transition lottery can be stored.

In step S3302, the AT counter C value obtained in step S3301 is stored in the area with the smallest number (lowest area) among the free areas in the first storage area RE1 to the tenth storage area RE10. For example, if the AT counter C value is stored in each of the first storage area RE1 to the ninth storage area RE9 and the tenth storage area RE10 is a free area, in step S3302 the AT counter C value obtained in step S3301 is stored in the tenth storage area RE10.

Note that the configuration is not limited to storing the value of the AT counter C as is, but may also store information corresponding to the value of the AT counter C. For example, the value of the AT counter C may be converted into a value for AT mode lottery before being stored.

In step S3303, it is determined whether the advantageous zone flag is set. If the advantageous zone flag is set, in step S3304, the AT command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the random number acquisition process is terminated. The AT command contains information corresponding to the value of the AT counter C stored this time, as well as information corresponding to the value of the AT counter C stored in each of the memory areas RE1 to RE10. Therefore, by receiving the AT command, the display control device 81 can grasp the information in each of the memory areas RE1 to RE10 in the lottery information memory area 106f.

If it is determined in step S3303 that the advantageous zone flag is not set, this random number acquisition process is terminated without outputting an AT command. Therefore, in games prior to winning the advantageous zone transition lottery, the AT counter C is acquired, but no AT command is output. Incidentally, in games in which the advantageous zone transition lottery is won, i.e., games in which the advantageous zone begins from the next game, the advantageous zone flag is set in the lottery result response process as described above. Therefore, in the random number acquisition process that is launched after the lottery result response process, the AT command output setting will begin in that game (the game in which the advantageous zone transition lottery was won).

The above random number acquisition process is initiated regardless of the lottery results of each game, and the AT counter C is acquired regardless of the lottery results of each game. In other words, the AT counter C is acquired independently of the lottery results of the game at the time of acquisition.

Next, the random number shifting process, which sequentially shifts the random numbers for the AT mode lottery stored in each storage area RE1 to RE10 of the lottery information storage area 106f, will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 75. The random number shifting process is performed in step S701 of the lottery result response process (Figure 31).

In step S3401, among the memory areas RE1 to RE10, the random number information for the lottery stored in the first memory area RE1 (information corresponding to the AT counter C) is shifted to the execution area AE, and the random number information stored in the first memory area RE1 is cleared. The execution area AE is an area for storing random number information used in the AT mode transition lottery if an AT mode transition lottery is held in the current game. Then, during the AT mode transition lottery in the first specific role processing (Figure 33), the process of acquiring random numbers for the lottery in step S903 acquires the information corresponding to the AT counter C stored in the execution area AE as the random number information to be used in the current AT mode transition lottery. In other words, the AT mode transition lottery is held based on the information shifted to the execution area AE from the previously acquired AT counter C information.

In the following step S3402, the information stored in each of the storage areas RE2 to RE10 is shifted to the lower area. Specifically, the information stored in the second storage area RE2 is stored in the first storage area RE1, and the information stored in the second storage area RE2 is cleared. The information in each area is then shifted in order, from the third storage area RE3 to the second storage area RE2, the fourth storage area RE4 to the third storage area RE3, ... the tenth storage area RE10 to the ninth storage area RE9. In this case, only information is shifted from the tenth storage area RE10 to the ninth storage area RE9; no new information is shifted. In other words, the information in the tenth storage area RE10 is cleared, and the tenth storage area RE10 becomes an empty area.

In the following step S3403, it is determined whether the advantageous zone flag is set. If the advantageous zone flag is set, in step S3404, a process is executed to set the shift time command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the random number shift process is terminated. If the advantageous zone flag is not set in step S3403, the random number shift process is terminated.

Here, if the advantageous zone flag is set in step S3403, it means that the advantageous zone transition lottery was won in a game prior to the current game, and the current game is in an advantageous zone. In other words, with regard to the output of the above AT command (step S3304), output of the AT command begins from the game in which the advantageous zone transition lottery was won, whereas output of the shift time command in step S3404 begins from the game following the game in which the advantageous zone transition lottery was won.

<AT mode transition lottery table>
As described above, the AT mode transition lottery uses information on the AT counter C obtained in advance based on the third stop OFF operation of each game. The AT mode transition lottery uses information on the random number used for the lottery as the AT counter C, as well as the lottery results of each game and the AT mode transition lottery table. Therefore, the relationship between the value of the AT counter C and the lottery results of each game will be explained below with reference to the AT mode transition lottery table in FIG.

In the AT mode transition lottery table, the AT counter C value that will result in a winning AT mode transition lottery is associated with the lottery result of each game. Specifically, for example, if the lottery result of the game is a normal replay, the AT counter C value that will result in a winning AT mode transition lottery is "3," and if the lottery result of the game is a push order bell, the AT counter C value that will result in a winning AT mode transition lottery is "7." Furthermore, if the lottery result of the game is a strong cherry, the AT counter C value that will result in a winning AT mode transition lottery is "1" to "64," and if the lottery result of the game is a weak watermelon, the AT counter C value that will result in a winning AT mode transition lottery is "5," or "65" to "76."

In other words, for example, if a "7" is obtained as the AT Counter C and an AT mode transition lottery is held in a game in which that AT Counter C is stored in the execution area AE, and the lottery result for that game is a push order bell, the AT mode transition lottery will be won. On the other hand, even if an AT mode transition lottery is held in a game in which a "7" is similarly stored as the AT Counter C in the execution area AE, if the lottery result for that game is a weak watermelon, the AT mode transition lottery will not be won.

The AT mode transition lottery table also determines the AT counter C value that will result in a win in the SAT transition lottery. For example, if the game results in a weak cherry, the AT mode transition lottery will be won if the AT counter C is between "1" and "18," and if the AT counter C is "13," the SAT transition lottery will also be won. Also, if the game results in a strong watermelon, the AT mode transition lottery will be won if the AT counter C is between "5" and "8" or "65" and "94," and if the AT counter C is "5," "65," or "66," the SAT transition lottery will also be won.

In addition, in the AT mode transition lottery table, a counter value that wins the lottery for transition to the pseudo premonition mode is associated with an AT counter C that is different from the AT counter C that wins the AT mode transition lottery or SAT transition lottery for each game's lottery results. As already explained, if a transition trigger role is won but the various mode transition lotteries or BB lotteries are not won, a pseudo premonition may be set by the display control device 81, which is the sub-side control device (Figure 65). The sub-side pseudo premonition setting is intended to ensure that the display effects by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the sound effects by the speaker 64 are the same as or difficult to distinguish from those in the premonition mode, and ultimately result in a non-win notification (no win notification). In contrast, the AT counter C corresponding to the pseudo premonition specified in the AT mode transition lottery table is intended to set the pseudo premonition mode on the main control device 101 side so that the spin effects and freeze effects of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are the same as or difficult to distinguish from the premonition mode, and is intended to set the pseudo premonition mode on the main control device 101 side. A detailed description of the pseudo premonition mode on the main control device 101 side will be omitted, but for example, in the premonition mode when the AT mode transition lottery is won, the rotation control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is different from the normal rotation control, and a special rotation control in which the rotation start timing of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is different from the normal rotation control is generated with a predetermined probability (the reels normally start spinning simultaneously). Then, in a game in which an AT mode transition lottery has been held, if the lottery result of that game and the AT counter C correspond to a pseudo-omen (for example, if there is a strong cherry and the AT counter C is between "65" and "128"), the pseudo-omen mode can be configured to trigger the above-mentioned special spin control with a predetermined probability.

Figure 77 shows whether or not the AT mode transition lottery will be won based on the lottery results for each game, using the value of the AT counter C as a reference.

For example, if the AT Counter C value is "5," the player will win the AT mode transition lottery if the lottery result for each game is a strong cherry or a weak cherry. He will also win if the lottery result for each game is a strong watermelon, a weak watermelon, Chance A, Chance B, or a middle bell. He will also win if the push order replay is performed. In other words, when an AT Counter C value of "5" is obtained, it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery. In contrast, when the AT Counter C value is "10" to "18," the player will win the AT mode transition lottery if the lottery result for each game is a strong cherry or a weak cherry, but will not win if the lottery result is a win under other normal circumstances. In other words, when an AT Counter C value of "10" to "18" is obtained, only strong cherries and weak cherries will win, making it difficult to win the AT mode transition lottery. And when an AT Counter C value of "100" to "120" is obtained, the player will not win the AT mode transition lottery regardless of the lottery result for each game. In other words, if the AT counter C is between "100" and "120", you will not win the AT mode transition lottery.

In addition, this slot machine 10 is configured so that the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd roles in BB, which can be won in the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state, can also win the AT mode transition lottery. That is, when the first specific role process (Figure 33) is activated in a game in the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state, an AT mode transition lottery is held based on the lottery results for the game in the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state, the AT counter C, and the AT mode transition lottery table. In this case, if the lottery result for the game is the 1st role in BB and the AT counter C is "128," the AT mode transition lottery is won. The 2nd role in BB is associated with values "121" to "128," and the 3rd role in BB is associated with values "1" to "8" as values that win the AT mode transition lottery.

When a value between "121" and "128" is acquired as the AT Counter C, the lottery results that can be won during normal gameplay will not result in a win in the AT mode transition lottery, but the lottery results that can be won in the first BB state or the second BB state will result in a win in the AT mode transition lottery. In other words, depending on the acquired AT Counter C, there may be values that will not result in a win in the AT mode transition lottery depending on the gameplay state, and if the gameplay state transitions when such a value is acquired, it may be possible to win the AT mode transition lottery.

<Hold display processing>
In this embodiment, by utilizing the relationship between the AT counter C obtained in advance as described above and the lottery results of each game, a specific notification suggesting information such as which lottery result will result in a win in the AT mode transition lottery or which is likely to result in a win is made on the auxiliary display unit 65. The pending display process shown in Fig. 78 is a process for making a pending display as the specific notification, and is a process performed in the all stop effect setting process (Fig. 63) of the display control device 81 based on the AT command received from the main control device 101.

In step S3501, it is determined whether the AT mode win flag or the AT mode flag is set. If either flag is set, the pending display processing ends. If neither flag is set, it is determined in step S3502 whether an AT command has been received. If an AT command has not been received, the pending display processing ends. If an AT command has been received, the processing proceeds to step S3503.

As already explained, an AT command is received when the random number acquisition process (Figure 73) on the main control unit 101 determines that the advantageous zone flag is set. Therefore, when it is determined in step S3501 that the AT mode win flag or AT mode flag is not set and it is determined in step S3502 that an AT command has been received, this means that the advantageous zone transition lottery has been won, but the AT mode transition lottery has not been won (CZ mode, non-specific zone). In other words, when the advantageous zone transition lottery has been won but the AT mode has not yet been won, the various processes (steps S3503 to S3509) for displaying the hold display as a specific notification are performed. In other words, the hold display can be initiated when the advantageous zone transition lottery has been won but before the AT mode has been won; the hold display is not initiated before the advantageous zone transition lottery has been won, and the hold display is not initiated after the AT mode transition lottery has been won.

In step S3503, based on the information contained in the received AT command, processing is performed to store the AT counter C information corresponding to each memory area RE1 to RE10 in the pending information memory area 183c of RAM 183. Although detailed explanation using figures is omitted, the pending information memory area 183c on the display control device 81 side has a configuration similar to the lottery information memory area 106f on the main control device 101 side, and has memory areas (1st memory area to 10th memory area) capable of storing AT counter C information for 10 games (10 AT mode transition lotteries), as well as an execution area for storing AT counter C information for the game that is the subject of the AT mode transition lottery. In step S3503, based on the received AT command, the AT counter C information in the first storage area RE1 on the main control unit 101 side is stored in the first storage area in the hold information storage area 183c, the AT counter C information in the second storage area RE2 is stored in the second storage area in the hold information storage area 183c, the AT counter C information in the tenth storage area RE10 is stored in the tenth storage area in the hold information storage area 183c, and the AT counter C information in the execution area AE is stored in the execution area in the hold information storage area 183c.

In the following step S3504, a pending display lottery process is performed. The pending display lottery process is a lottery process in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the display corresponding to the AT counter C acquired at the current acquisition opportunity will be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

Here, we will explain the hold display shown on the auxiliary display unit 65 with reference to Figure 79.

As shown in Figure 79 (a), a hold display area Dr is set at the bottom as a specified display area in the auxiliary display unit 65. The hold display area Dr is partitioned so that unit hold display areas Dr1 to Dr10, the same number as the maximum number of AT counters C that can be stored in the hold information storage area 183c, are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. Specifically, the hold display area Dr is set to include the first unit hold display area Dr1, the second unit hold display area Dr2, the third unit hold display area Dr3, the fourth unit hold display area Dr4, the fifth unit hold display area Dr5, the sixth unit hold display area Dr6, the seventh unit hold display area Dr7, the eighth unit hold display area Dr8, the ninth unit hold display area Dr9, and the tenth unit hold display area Dr10. Additionally, adjacent to the hold display area Dr is an execution display area Dp, set to the left of the hold display area Dr (to the left of the first unit hold display area Dr1), for displaying the hold of the AT counter C stored in the execution area of the hold information storage area 183c. The execution display area Dp is partitioned as an area larger than each of the unit hold display areas Dr1-Dr10, allowing the player to clearly distinguish between the hold display for the AT mode transition lottery for the current game and the hold display for the AT mode transition lottery for a later game.

As shown in Figure 79 (b), the first special image P1 to the tenth special image P10 are set as pending displays to be displayed in the execution display area Dp and the pending display area Dr. The first special image P1 to the tenth special image P10 are divided into special images (fourth special image P4 to eighth special image P8, also referred to as "confirmed special images" in the following explanation) that confirm the winning of the AT mode transition lottery if the game lottery result corresponds to the corresponding lottery result, and special images (first special image P1 to third special image P3, ninth special image P9, tenth special image P10, also referred to as "suggested special images" in the following explanation) that may not result in the winning of the AT mode transition lottery even if the game lottery result corresponds to the corresponding lottery result.

For example, the first special image P1 as a suggestive special image suggests that the AT Counter C has a high probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery if the result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is held is a strong cherry or a weak cherry. The second special image P2 as a suggestive special image suggests that the AT Counter C has a high probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery if the result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is held is a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon. The third special image P3 as a suggestive special image suggests that the AT Counter C has a high probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery if the result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is held is a strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, or a so-called rare role (transition trigger role) such as Chance A, Chance B, or a middle bell.

The fourth special image P4 as a confirmation-type special image suggests that the AT Counter C will win the AT mode transition lottery if the result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is played is a strong cherry. The fifth special image P5 as a confirmation-type special image suggests that the AT Counter C will win the AT mode transition lottery if the result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is played is a strong cherry or a weak cherry. The sixth special image P6 as a confirmation-type special image suggests that the AT Counter C will win the AT mode transition lottery if the result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is played is a strong watermelon. The seventh special image P7 as a confirmation-type special image suggests that the AT Counter C will win the AT mode transition lottery if the result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is played is a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon. The eighth special image P8 as a confirmation-type special image suggests that the AT Counter C will win the AT mode transition lottery if the result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is played is the rare combination described above.

Of the suggestion-related special images, the ninth special image P9 and the tenth special image P10 suggest that the lottery result for the corresponding game will vary depending on the game state of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is held, and can also be referred to as state-related special images. Specifically, the ninth special image P9 as a state-related special image suggests that the AT counter C has a high probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery if the lottery result for the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is held is a lottery result that can be won in a state other than the BB state (hereinafter simply referred to as "normal time"), such as the normal game state or the first through third RT states. In contrast, the tenth special image P10 as a state-related special image suggests that the AT counter C has a high probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery if the lottery result for the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is held is a lottery result that can be won in the first BB state or the second BB state.

Each of these special images P1-P10 is designed to have different characters and colors so that players can distinguish between them. For example, the first special image P1, fourth special image P4, and fifth special image P5 display characters corresponding to the "cherry" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, allowing players to intuitively recognize that winning any of the cherries will be advantageous. Furthermore, the special images P1, P4, and P5 have different colors (background colors) so that the differences between them can be clearly recognized, such as the first special image P1 displaying a yellow cherry, the fourth special image P4 displaying a red cherry, and the fifth special image P5 displaying a green cherry. Furthermore, for example, the second special image P2, sixth special image P6, and seventh special image P7 display characters corresponding to the "watermelon" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, allowing players to intuitively recognize that winning any of the watermelons will be advantageous. Furthermore, the special images P2, P6, and P7 have different colors (background colors), allowing players to clearly distinguish between them, such as the second special image P2 being a yellow watermelon, the sixth special image P6 being a red watermelon, and the seventh special image P7 being a green watermelon. Note that in the illustration, the differences in color are represented by different dot hatching.

Figure 79 (a) shows the second special image P2 displayed in the first unit hold display area Dr1, the fourth special image P4 displayed in the third unit hold display area Dr3, the ninth special image P9 displayed in the seventh unit hold display area Dr7, the tenth special image P10 displayed in the ninth unit hold display area Dr9, and the first special image P1 displayed in the execution display area Dp. In this case, it is shown that if you win a strong cherry or weak cherry in the current game, you are more likely to win the AT mode transition lottery, and it is also shown that if you win a strong watermelon or weak watermelon one game later, you are more likely to win the AT mode transition lottery.

Returning to the explanation of the hold display processing, the hold display lottery processing performed in step S3504 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to display the hold display corresponding to the currently acquired AT counter C (basically the hold display corresponding to the 10th unit hold display area Dr10) from among the currently received AT commands. In this embodiment, the winning probability of this lottery is set to approximately one in five, resulting in the display of the hold display. In this case, the winning probability of the hold display lottery is set to be greater than the reciprocal of the number of unit hold display areas Dr1-Dr10, and is set to a probability such that, on average, at least one hold display (two in the above case) will be displayed in each of the multiple unit hold display areas Dr1-Dr10.

After executing the processing of step S3504, in step S3505, it is determined whether or not the pending display lottery has been won. If not, the pending display processing ends; if won, the processing proceeds to step S3506. In step S3506, processing is performed to obtain the special image table stored in the various table storage area 182a.

As shown in FIG. 80, the special image table is configured so that each selectable special image P1-P10 is associated with a corresponding value of the AT counter C. More specifically, for example, when the value of the AT counter C is "5," the first special image P1, second special image P2, third special image P3, fourth special image P4, fifth special image P5, sixth special image P6, seventh special image P7, eighth special image P8, and ninth special image P9 can be selected as special images. As already explained, when the value of the AT counter C is "5," the AT mode transition lottery is won if the lottery result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is held is a strong cherry or a weak cherry. Furthermore, the AT mode transition lottery is also won if a strong watermelon, a weak watermelon, a chance A, a chance B, or a middle bell is selected. Furthermore, the AT mode transition lottery is also won if a push order replay is performed. In other words, the pending display suggests that if you win any of the above results in the games corresponding to the first special image P1 through the ninth special image P9, you are likely to also win the AT mode transition lottery.

Furthermore, for example, when the value of the AT counter C is between "10" and "18," the first special image P1, fourth special image P4, and fifth special image P5 can be selected as the special image. As already explained, when the value of the AT counter C is between "10" and "18," the AT mode transition lottery is won if the lottery result in the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is held is a strong cherry or weak cherry. In other words, the pending display suggests that if you win a strong cherry or weak cherry in the game corresponding to the first special image P1, fourth special image P4, or fifth special image P5, you are likely to win the AT mode transition lottery as well.

In contrast, when the value of the AT counter C is between "100" and "120," the first special image P1 and the second special image P2 can be selected as the special image. As already explained, when the value of the AT counter C is between "100" and "120," the AT mode transition lottery will not be won regardless of the lottery result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is held. In other words, the pending display suggests that even if you win a strong cherry in the game corresponding to the first special image P1, you may not win the AT mode transition lottery, and that even if you win a strong watermelon in the game corresponding to the second special image P2, you may not win the AT mode transition lottery.

When the value of the AT counter C is "128," the system is set up so that in addition to the first special image P1, the tenth special image P10 can also be selected as the special image. As already explained, when the value of the AT counter C is "128," the player will not win the AT mode transition lottery if it is held during normal play, but can win the AT mode transition lottery if it is held in the first BB state or the second BB state. In other words, the pending display suggests that if the game corresponding to the tenth special image P10 is played in any of the BB states and the result of the game is the corresponding result (third role in BB), the player will win the AT mode transition lottery.

After the special image table is obtained in step S3506, a special image selection process is executed in step S3507. As described above, the special image table is set so that multiple special images can be selected for each value of the AT counter C, and the proportion of special images selected is also predetermined (omitted from the diagram). Generally, this proportion is set so that if the AT counter C is associated with both suggestive special images (first special image P1 to third special image P3, ninth special image P9, tenth special image P10) and definitive special images (fourth special image P4 to eighth special image P8), the definitive special images are more likely to be selected than suggestive special images. If the AT counter C is associated with a definitive special image, it is always associated with a suggestive special image. By setting the selection proportions as described above, it is possible to increase the overall frequency with which definitive special images are displayed.

Furthermore, among suggestive special images and definitive special images, those associated with lottery results with a high appearance rate or with multiple lottery results are set to be more likely to be selected even when the same AT counter C is obtained. Specifically, as suggestive special images, the first special image P1 and the third special image P3 are set as follows: the first special image P1 is associated with strong cherries and weak cherries, while the third special image P3 is associated with rare combinations other than strong cherries and weak cherries. Therefore, the probability of the third special image P3 being the lottery result of the associated game is higher than that of the first special image P1, and the third special image P3 is associated with a greater variety of lottery results than the first special image P1. Furthermore, as definitive special images, the sixth special image P6 and the seventh special image P7 are set as follows: the sixth special image P6 is associated with strong watermelon, while the seventh special image P7 is associated with weak watermelon in addition to strong watermelon. Therefore, the probability of the seventh special image P7 being the lottery result for the associated game is higher than that of the sixth special image P6, and the seventh special image P7 is also associated with a greater variety of lottery results than the sixth special image P6.

More specifically, regarding the selection rates, when the value of the AT counter C is "5," the first special image P1 through the ninth special image P9 are associated with suggestive special images and definitive special images, as described above. In this case, the first special image P1 is selected as a suggestive special image 3%, the second special image P2 is selected as a 3%, the third special image P3 is selected as a 4%, and the ninth special image P9 is selected as a 5%. The fourth special image P4 is selected as a definitive special image 10%, the fifth special image P5 is selected as a 15%, the sixth special image P6 is selected as a 15%, the seventh special image P7 is selected as a 20%, and the eighth special image P8 is selected as a 25%. Furthermore, when the value of the AT counter C is "10" to "18," the first special image P1, the fourth special image P4, and the fifth special image P5 are associated with suggestive special images and definitive special images, as described above. In this case, the first special image P1 as a suggestive special image is selected 10% of the time, the fourth special image P4 as a definitive special image is selected 30% of the time, and the fifth special image P5 is selected 60% of the time. When the value of the AT counter C is between "100" and "120", the first special image P1 and the second special image P2 are associated with suggestive special images as described above. In this case, the first special image P1 is selected 40% of the time, and the second special image P2 is selected 60% of the time.

In the special image selection process of step S3507, a special image to be displayed is selected by lottery or the like based on the predetermined ratio as described above. Then, in step S3508, a process is executed to display the selected special image in the unit hold display area corresponding to the AT counter C acquired at the current acquisition trigger. More specifically, image data corresponding to the selected special image is read from ROM 182, and the AT counter C acquired this time is stored in the empty area with the lowest number among the empty areas in the hold information storage area 183c (basically the 10th storage area), and the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled so that the selected special image is displayed in the unit hold display area corresponding to that storage area (basically the 10th unit hold display area Dr10).

In the following step S3509, the status display start process is executed. The status display start process is a process that starts a status display to suggest or explain the relationship between the special image being displayed this time and the game status. This status display start process will be explained in detail later. After the process of step S3509 is executed, the hold display start process is terminated.

<Processing for holding shift>
Next, the hold shift process for shifting the display area of the hold display started as described above in accordance with the progress of the game will be described with reference to Fig. 81. The hold shift process is a process performed in step S2502 of the start-time performance setting process (Fig. 59) in the display control device 81.

In step S3601, it is determined whether a shift command has been received from the main control unit 101. If a shift command has not been received, the hold shift processing is terminated. If a shift command has been received, in step S3602, a process is performed to clear the hold display in the execution display area Dp. More specifically, if a special image is displayed as a hold display in the execution display area Dp, the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled to erase the special image, and if no special image is displayed in the execution display area Dp, this state is maintained. Then, in step S3603, a process is performed to shift the hold display in the first unit hold display area Dr1 to the execution display area Dp. More specifically, if a hold display of a special image is displayed in the first unit hold display area Dr1, this hold display is displayed in the execution display area Dp, and the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled to erase the hold display that was displayed in the first unit hold display area Dr1, and if no hold display is displayed in the first unit hold display area Dr1, this state is maintained. In the following step S3604, the pending display in each unit pending display area is shifted to a lower display area. More specifically, the pending display of the special image displayed in the second unit pending display area Dr2 is displayed in the first unit pending display area Dr1, and the pending display displayed in the second unit pending display area Dr2 is erased. The pending display in each unit pending display area is shifted in order from the third unit pending display area Dr3 to the second unit pending display area Dr2, the fourth unit pending display area Dr4 to the third unit pending display area Dr3, ... the tenth unit pending display area Dr10 to the ninth unit pending display area Dr9, and so on. In this case, for unit pending display areas where a pending display is not being displayed, the pending display is shifted to the lower unit pending display area as is. Then, the pending display is simply shifted from the tenth unit pending display area Dr10 to the ninth unit pending display area Dr9, and no new pending display is shifted. In other words, the hold display in the 10th unit hold display area Dr10 is cleared, and the 10th unit hold display area Dr10 is no longer displaying a hold.

In the following step S3605, a status display update process is executed. The status display update process is a process for updating the display content of the status display started in the status display start process described above in accordance with the progress of the game (in accordance with changes in the situation). This status display update process will be explained in detail later. After the process of step S3605 is executed, the pending display start process is terminated.

Here, the above-mentioned hold display processing is set to start the hold display before the AT mode transition lottery is won. In contrast, the hold shift processing is set to execute the hold display shift processing of steps S3602 to S3605 regardless of whether the AT mode win flag or AT mode flag is set. In other words, the hold display starts after the advantageous zone transition lottery is won but before the AT mode transition lottery is won, and the hold display shift continues even after the AT mode transition lottery is won. By doing this, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of the AT mode transition lottery using the hold display, while avoiding situations where the success or failure of the AT mode transition lottery is clearly apparent depending on whether or not there is a shift.

Although detailed explanation using diagrams will be omitted, it is recommended that each pending display be terminated when an AT mode winning notification is made.

<Relationship between AT mode transition lottery and hold display>
The manner in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed based on the AT counter C acquired in advance will be described with reference to Figures 82 and 83.

In Figures 82 (a1) and 82 (b1), in the situation before (at the start of) the game, Figure 82 (a1) shows the hold display area Dr and the execution display area Dp in the auxiliary display unit 65, and Figure 82 (b1) shows the memory area RE and execution area AE in the lottery information memory area 106f. For example, "20" is stored in the execution area AE as information corresponding to AT counter C, and the execution display area Dp displays the first special image P1 as a hold display corresponding to that AT counter C. Furthermore, as a random number used in the AT mode transition lottery for the next game, the first memory area RE1 stores "8" as information corresponding to AT counter C, and the first unit hold display area Dr1 displays the second special image P2 as a hold display corresponding to that AT counter C. In this situation, we will explain what happens when the start lever 41 is operated to start the next game and the strong watermelon is won in the lottery process for the next game.

Random number shift processing and reserve shift processing are performed based on the operation of the start lever 41. Figures 82(a2) and 82(b2) show a situation in which the AT counter C information and reserve display have been shifted by one game from the situation in Figures 82(a1) and 82(b1). The AT counter C information stored in the first memory area RE1 is shifted to the execution area AE, and the second special image P2 displayed in the first unit reserve display area Dr1 is shifted to the execution display area Dp. In this case, the second special image P2 in the execution display area Dp suggests that if the lottery result for this game is a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon, it is likely that the AT mode transition lottery will be won. Figures 82(a1) and 82(b2) also show how the tenth memory area RE10 and the tenth unit reserve display area Dr10 become empty areas as a result of the random number shift processing and reserve shift processing.

As already explained, the AT mode transition lottery is conducted based on the information on the AT counter C shifted to the execution area AE, the information on the lottery results for the current game, and the AT mode transition lottery table. In Figures 82 (a2) and 82 (b2), the AT counter C shifted to the execution area AE is "8," the lottery result for the current game is Strong Watermelon, and by comparing this information with the AT mode transition lottery table (Figure 76), the AT mode transition lottery in this case results in a winning AT mode transition. Note that the AT mode transition lottery is conducted in the first specific role processing in the lottery result response processing as described above, and the lottery processing for the current game and the AT mode transition lottery are conducted based on the start operation of the start lever 41.

As described above, in a game in which a strong watermelon is won (a game in which the AT mode transition lottery is won), if the stop operation is performed on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, a strong watermelon win can be achieved, as shown in Figure 83. The random number acquisition process is performed based on the third stop OFF operation, and Figure 83(b) shows that the AT counter C for the tenth memory area RE10 is acquired based on the third stop OFF operation that achieves the strong watermelon win. Then, by storing the AT counter C in the tenth memory area RE10, the first special image P1 can be displayed as a hold display corresponding to that AT counter C, as shown in Figure 83(a).

As described above, in a configuration in which the AT mode transition lottery is conducted using a pre-acquired AT counter C, a hold display corresponding to that AT counter C is displayed, making it possible to proceed with the game after knowing in advance the lottery results for games that may win the AT mode transition lottery. For example, if the fourth special image P4 corresponding to a strong cherry is displayed in the third unit hold display area Dr3 as a hold display corresponding to three games later, it is possible to play three games in the hope of winning a strong cherry three games later, rather than one or two games later, making each game significantly more entertaining.

The winning probability for each game's lottery results is determined by a lottery table set for each game state, and the winning probability for the specific role that triggers the AT mode transition lottery may also differ between normal play and BB play. Figure 84 shows the winning probability for each specific role that triggers the AT mode transition lottery, depending on the state.

Normal replays can be won in any state, although the winning probability differs between normal game mode and the first through third RT states. In contrast, normal replays are set not to be won during BB in the first BB state or the second BB state. Push order replays can be won in the first through third RT states, but are set not to be won during normal game mode or BB. Push order bells can be won during normal game mode, but are set not to be won during BB. In other words, normal replays, push order replays, and push order bells can be considered normal roles that are won mainly during normal game mode but not during BB. Therefore, when the AT counter C corresponding to these normal roles is acquired, they can be won if the AT mode transition lottery is held during normal game mode, but will not be won if the AT mode transition lottery is held during BB. However, in this embodiment, the AT counter C corresponding to the normal role is also associated with the third role during BB (Figure 76). Therefore, when an AT counter C corresponding to a normal role is obtained, it is possible to win if the AT mode transition lottery is held during normal play or BB.

The first, second, and third BB roles are BB roles that can only be won during BB. Therefore, when the AT Counter C corresponding to these BB roles is acquired, the player can win if the AT mode transition lottery is held during BB, but will not win if the AT mode transition lottery is held during normal play. In this embodiment, the AT Counter C corresponding to the BB role has a value that is associated with a normal role and a value that is not associated with a normal role (Figure 76). Therefore, in the AT Counter C corresponding to the BB role, a value that is associated with a normal role is used in the AT mode transition lottery, and the player can win during both BB and normal play. However, in the AT Counter C corresponding to the BB role, a value that is not associated with a normal role is used in the AT mode transition lottery, and the player can only win during BB.

Rare roles such as Strong Cherry, Weak Cherry, Strong Watermelon, Weak Watermelon, Chance A, Chance B, and Middle Bell are common roles that can be won in both normal play and BB. However, when comparing the winning probability during normal play and during BB, the winning probability for each role is set so that it is overwhelmingly easier to win during BB. In other words, in the AT mode transition lottery that uses the AT Counter C associated with these common roles, it is overwhelmingly easier to win during BB than during normal play.

Of the common roles, strong cherries and weak cherries have a higher probability of winning in the first BB state than in the second BB state. Furthermore, strong watermelons and weak watermelons have a higher probability of winning in the second BB state than in the first BB state. Therefore, in the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter C associated with strong cherries and weak cherries, it is easier to win in the first BB state than in the second BB state, and in the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter C associated with strong watermelons and weak watermelons, it is easier to win in the second BB state than in the first BB state.

The relationship between the special image as a hold display corresponding to AT counter C will be explained with reference to Figure 85.

As already explained, the first special image P1, which acts as a suggestive special image, suggests that it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery when a strong or weak cherry appears, while the fourth special image P4, which acts as a definitive special image, indicates that it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery when a strong cherry appears, and the fifth special image P5 indicates that it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery when a strong or weak cherry appears. Because it is easier to win a strong or weak cherry when a BB appears than normally, when the first special image P1, fourth special image P4, or fifth special image P5 is displayed, it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery when a BB appears than normally. Furthermore, because it is easier to win a strong or weak cherry when in the first BB state than in the second BB state, it is also easier to win the AT mode transition lottery when in the first BB state than in the second BB state.

Furthermore, the second special image P2, which acts as a suggestive special image, suggests that it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery when there is a strong or weak watermelon, and the sixth special image P6, which acts as a definitive special image, indicates that the AT mode transition lottery will be won when there is a strong watermelon, and the seventh special image P7 indicates that it will be won when there is a strong or weak watermelon. Because it is easier to win a strong or weak watermelon during BB than during normal times, when the second special image P2, sixth special image P6, or seventh special image P7 are displayed, it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery during BB than during normal times. Moreover, because it is easier to win a strong or weak watermelon in the second BB state than in the first BB state, it is also easier to win the AT mode transition lottery in the second BB state than in the first BB state.

The ninth special image P9, which is a suggestive special image, suggests that it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery during normal play, and the tenth special image P10 suggests that it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery during BB play. Therefore, when the ninth special image P9 is displayed, it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery during normal play than during BB play, and when the tenth special image P10 is displayed, it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery during BB play than during normal play.

These various special images begin displaying in a game in which an AT counter C is stored in the tenth memory area RE10, and are the subject of an AT mode transition lottery in a game in which the AT counter C is shifted to the execution area AE. However, the display start game and the game that is the subject of the AT mode transition lottery are different. As a result, the game status of the display start game may differ from the game status of the game that is the subject of the AT mode transition lottery. In other words, a special image that begins displaying during normal play may become the subject of an AT mode transition lottery during BB. For example, even if the game in which the first special image P1 begins displaying is during normal play, if the game that is the subject of the AT mode transition lottery is during BB, there is a greater chance of winning the transition lottery than if the game were to become the subject of the AT mode transition lottery during normal play. In this embodiment, in an AT mode transition lottery using such a pre-acquired AT counter C, the difference in the state between the time of acquisition and the time of the transition lottery is notified as a status display. The configuration for displaying this status is described below.

<Status display start processing>
As a configuration related to the status display, first, the status display start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 86. The status display start process is a process carried out in step S3509 when the hold display is started in the hold display process. As already explained, the hold display process is a process carried out in the all-stop effect setting process, and is carried out when the game ends. In the status display start process, the content of the status display is determined based on the content that reflects the content of the game that is currently ending (game results, winning results, payout amount, etc.).

In step S3701, it is determined whether the special image to be displayed as a pending display this time is a special image corresponding to a cherry. More specifically, it is determined whether the special image to be displayed this time is any of the first special image P1, fourth special image P4, and fifth special image P5. As described above, in a game in the first BB state, strong cherries and weak cherries are likely to be won, and the cherry-corresponding special images of the first special image P1, fourth special image P4, and fifth special image P5 are likely to be won when they are the subject of the AT mode transition lottery in the first BB state.

If the special image to be displayed this time is the cherry-related special image, the process proceeds to step S3702, where it is determined whether the current game state is not the first BB state or the second BB state, and is in a state before the first BB or second BB is won. If a positive determination is made in step S3702, the process proceeds to step S3703, where a process is executed to display an advantageous display for the first BB win as the current status display, and then the process for starting the status display ends. The advantageous display for the first BB win is a notification that suggests that if the game in which the target special image is the target of the AT mode transition lottery is in the first BB state, it is likely that the AT mode transition lottery will be won. For example, as shown in FIG. 88(a), the advantageous display for the first BB win may be displayed by pointing to the special image to be displayed this time (in a speech bubble), displaying three characters with a "red 7" pattern corresponding to the first BB win, and displaying the message "AT chance with 7 7 7."

If a negative judgment is made in step S3702, the process proceeds to step S3704. In step S3704, it is determined whether the current game state is not the first BB state or the second BB state, and is a carryover state after winning the first BB. If a positive judgment is made in step S3704, the process proceeds to step S3705, where a process for displaying a first countdown display is executed as the current status display, and then the process for starting the status display is terminated. The first countdown display is a notification that suggests that if the target special image is in the first BB state by the game that is the subject of the AT mode transition lottery, it is likely to win the AT mode transition lottery, and that the already won first BB should be quickly won. For example, as shown in FIG. 88(b), the first countdown display may be a message pointing to the currently displayed special image (in a speech bubble) and displaying the message "Win 7 7 7 within 9 games!!" In this case, since the game in which the AT mode transition lottery for the special image to be displayed this time is the target is 10 games later, by achieving the first BB win within the previous game, that is, within 9 games, the AT mode transition lottery for the target special image will be held in the first BB state.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3704, the process proceeds to step S3706. In step S3706, it is determined whether the current game state is the first BB state. If it is the first BB state, it is determined in step S3707 whether the number of remaining payouts up to the upper payout limit in that first BB state is greater than 45. As already explained, in the first BB state, there is a high probability that the first winning combination will be achieved during BB, resulting in the payout of nine medals. If the number of remaining medals up to the upper payout limit in step S3707 is 45 or less, this means that, even if some games in which three or five medals are paid out or no medals are paid out are taken into account, it is highly likely that the first BB state has already ended in the game 10 games later, in which the special image to be displayed this time is the target of the AT mode transition lottery. More specifically, if nine medals are paid out five times during the nine games up to the game before the one that is the subject of the AT mode transition lottery for the special image that will begin to be displayed this time, the game that is the subject of that special image will end after the first BB state. Therefore, if it is determined in step S3707 that the remaining payout number is 45 or less, the status display start process ends immediately. In this case, no status display will be performed for the special image that will begin to be displayed this time.

If step S3707 determines that the remaining payout number is greater than 45, proceed to step S3708. In step S3708, determine whether the remaining payout number is greater than 70. When the remaining payout number is 70 or less, this occurs when nine medals are paid out eight or more times during the nine games leading up to the AT mode transition lottery in which the special image that will begin displaying this time becomes the target of the AT mode transition lottery, and the game that is the target of the special image ends after the end of the first BB state. Furthermore, even if nine medals are paid out seven times, if five medals are paid out twice, or if five medals are paid out once and three medals are paid out once, the game that is the target of the special image ends after the end of the first BB state. In other words, even if nine medals are paid out seven times out of nine games, if both of the remaining two times are three medals, or if no medals are paid out in either of the remaining two times, the game that is the target of the special image will be in the first BB state. Furthermore, if nine medals are paid out six or fewer times out of nine games, the game that is the subject of the special image will be in the first BB state, regardless of the number of medals paid out in the remaining games. If it is determined in step S3708 that the number of medals is greater than 70, in step S3709, processing is executed to display a corresponding chance as the current status display, and then the processing for starting the status display is terminated. The corresponding chance display is a notification that suggests that if the target special image becomes the subject of the AT mode transition lottery, there is a high possibility of winning the AT mode transition lottery. As an example of the corresponding chance display, as shown in FIG. 88(c), it is recommended to display "It's super hot!!" while pointing at the special image that will start being displayed this time (in a speech bubble).

When step S3708 returns a negative judgment and the remaining payout count in the first BB state is greater than 45 but less than 70, this means that the game ten games later that is the subject of the AT mode transition lottery may be in the first BB state, depending on the number of games in which three or five medals are paid out or no medals are paid out in the games leading up to the special image that will be displayed this time and that are subject to the AT mode transition lottery. In other words, whether the game ten games later is in the first BB state or not may depend on the results of the lottery over the nine games leading up to the special image that will be displayed this time and that are subject to the AT mode transition lottery, as well as the order and timing of operation of stop switches 42-44. In this case, in step S3710, processing is executed to display a delayed end display as the current status display, and then the status display start processing is terminated. The end delay display is a notification that suggests that the current state should be maintained until the target special image becomes eligible for the AT mode transition lottery; in other words, if the target special image can maintain its current state until it becomes eligible for the AT mode transition lottery, there is a high possibility that the AT mode transition will be won. As an end delay display, for example, as shown in FIG. 88(d), it is good to display (in a speech bubble) the message "Don't let the bonus end until it's my turn!!" while pointing to the special image that will begin to be displayed this time.

If it is determined in step S3701 that the special image to be displayed this time is not a cherry-compatible special image, the process proceeds to step S3711. In step S3711, it is determined whether the special image to be displayed this time as a pending display is a watermelon-compatible special image. More specifically, it is determined whether the special image to be displayed this time is any of the second special image P2, sixth special image P6, and seventh special image P7. As described above, in games in the second BB state, strong watermelons and weak watermelons are more likely to be won, and the watermelon-compatible special images of the second special image P2, sixth special image P6, and seventh special image P7 are more likely to be won when they are the subject of the AT mode transition lottery in the second BB state.

If the special image to be displayed this time is the watermelon-compatible special image, the process proceeds to step S3712, where it is determined whether the current game state is not the first BB state or the second BB state, and is in a state before the first BB or second BB was won. If a positive determination is made in step S3712, the process proceeds to step S3713, where a process is executed to display an advantageous display for the second BB win as the current status display, and then the process for starting the status display ends. The advantageous display for the second BB win is a notification that suggests that if the game in which the target special image is the target of the AT mode transition lottery is in the second BB state, it is likely that the AT mode transition lottery will be won. As an advantageous display for the second BB win, for example, it is advisable to point to the special image to be displayed this time (in a speech bubble) and display "AT chance with white BAR white BAR white BAR" (see Figure 90 (b)).

If a negative judgment is made in step S3712, the process proceeds to step S3714. In step S3714, it is determined whether the current game state is not the first BB state or the second BB state, and is a carryover state after winning the second BB. If a positive judgment is made in step S3714, the process proceeds to step S3715, where a process is executed to display a second countdown as the current status display, and then the process for starting the status display is terminated. The second countdown display is a notification suggesting that if the target special image is in the second BB state by the time of the game that is the subject of the AT mode transition lottery, it is likely that the AT mode transition lottery will be won, and is a notification suggesting that the already won second BB should be won as soon as possible. The second countdown display may, for example, point to the special image that will be displayed this time (in a speech bubble), display three characters with a "white BAR" design corresponding to the second BB win, and display the message "Win a white BAR, white BAR, white BAR win within nine games!!" (see Figure 89(b)). In this case, since the game that will be the subject of the AT mode transition lottery for the special image that will be displayed this time is ten games later, by achieving a second BB win within nine games, one game before that, the target special image will be displayed in the second BB state, just like the first countdown display described above.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3714, the process proceeds to step S3716. In step S3716, it is determined whether the current game state is the second BB state. If it is the second BB state, it is determined in step S3717 whether the number of remaining payouts up to the upper payout limit in the second BB state is more than 45 coins. If it is determined in step S3717 that the number of remaining payouts is 45 coins or less, the process for starting the status display is terminated. In this case, the status display for the special image that is about to be displayed is not performed.

If it is determined in step S3717 that the remaining payout number is greater than 45, the process proceeds to step S3718. In step S3718, it is determined whether the remaining payout number is greater than 70. If it is greater than 70, in step S3719, a process is executed to display a corresponding chance as the current status display, and then the process for starting the status display is terminated. The corresponding chance display is as described above.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3718, in step S3720, processing is performed to display the current status for a delayed end, and then the status display start processing is terminated. The display for a delayed end is as described above.

Incidentally, in the above-mentioned status display start process, if a status display has already been generated for another special image, it is advisable to configure it so that the start of the status display for the current special image is restricted (it is not started, no status display is displayed). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game content from becoming complicated due to overlapping status displays.

<Status display update process>
As a configuration related to the status display, the status display update process will be described next with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 87. The status display update process is a process performed in step S3605 when the hold display is shifted in the hold shift process.

In step S3801, it is determined whether the status display is currently being displayed. If the status display is not currently being displayed, there is nothing to update, so the status display update process is terminated. If the status display is currently being displayed, the process proceeds to step S3802. In step S3802, it is determined whether the special image that is the target of the status display has been shifted to the fifth unit hold display area Dr5 by this shift process. If it has been shifted to the fifth unit hold display area Dr5, in step S3803, the process to terminate the status display for the shifted special image is performed, and then the status display update process is terminated.

In other words, in this embodiment, the status display begins when a special image is displayed in the tenth unit hold display area Dr10 and ends when the image is shifted to the fifth unit hold display area Dr5. In other words, the status display is implemented from 10 games before to 6 games before the pre-acquired AT counter C becomes the target of the AT mode transition lottery, and execution of the status display is limited from 5 games before to 1 game before that (including the game itself). In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 90(b), when a second special image P2 in the sixth unit hold display area Dr6 is being displayed as a favorable display for the second BB win, if the second special image P2 is shifted to the fifth unit hold display area Dr5 without winning the second BB, the favorable display for the second win will end upon the shift. By doing this, it is possible to prevent players from losing motivation by continuing to see hints of relatively difficult content, such as advantageous displays when winning the first BB or the second BB, displayed even when there are only a few games left until the AT mode transition lottery is held.

Whether or not the display continues may depend on the content of the status display currently being displayed. For example, if the currently displayed status display is an advantageous display for winning the first BB or an advantageous display for winning the second BB, the status display may be terminated when the display shifts to the fifth unit hold display area Dr5. However, if the currently displayed status display is another status display (first countdown display, second countdown display, corresponding chance display, end delay display), the status display may not be terminated when the display shifts to the fifth unit hold display area Dr5. The timing of the display termination may also be varied. For example, if the currently displayed status display is an advantageous display for winning the first BB or an advantageous display for winning the second BB, the status display may be terminated when the display shifts to the fifth unit hold display area Dr5. However, if the currently displayed status display is another status display (first countdown display, second countdown display, corresponding chance display, end delay display), the status display may be terminated when the display shifts to the third unit hold display area Dr3 (when shifting to an area other than the fifth unit hold display area Dr5, and at a later timing than when the display shifts to the fifth unit hold display area Dr5).

If a negative judgment is made in step S3802, the process proceeds to step S3804. In step S3804, it is determined whether the status display to be updated is a display favorable for winning the first BB or a display favorable for winning the second BB. If it is a display favorable for winning either BB, the process proceeds to step S3805, where it is determined whether a winning notification for the corresponding BB has been made. More specifically, if a display favorable for winning the first BB is being executed, a bonus winning notification effect (step S2406) is performed, and a notification effect indicating that the first BB has been won is generated as the notification of the type of bonus that is the subject of the bonus winning notification effect, a positive judgment is made in step S3805. Conversely, if a display favorable for winning the second BB is being executed, a bonus winning notification effect (step S2406) is performed, and a notification effect indicating that the second BB has been won is generated as the notification of the type of bonus that is the subject of the bonus winning notification effect, a positive judgment is made in step S3805. In other words, if the advantageous display for the first BB win is being executed and the bonus win notification effect (step S2406) has been performed, but the type of bonus that is the target of the bonus win notification effect has not been notified, or an effect indicating that the second BB has been won is generated as the bonus type notification, a negative determination is made in step S3805.If the advantageous display for the second BB win is being executed and the bonus win notification effect (step S2406) has been performed, but the type of bonus that is the target of the bonus win notification effect has not been notified, or an effect indicating that the first BB has been won is generated as the bonus type notification, a negative determination is made in step S3805.If a negative determination is made in step S3805, step S3806 continues the display of the advantageous display for the BB win that is being executed, and then the status display update process ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step S3805, the display content is switched to the countdown display for the targeted bonus in step S3806, and then the status display update process is terminated. In this case, the countdown display determines the number of games remaining in the countdown depending on the number of games remaining until the AT mode transition lottery is entered, and displays that number of games. For example, as shown in FIG. 89(a), if a bonus winning notification effect indicating that the first BB has been won is generated while the targeted first special image P1 in the seventh unit hold display area Dr7 is being displayed as an advantageous display for the first BB, the first countdown display may display "Win 7 7 7 within 5 games!!" as the targeted first special image P1 shifts to the sixth unit hold display area Dr6.

For this reason, when a BB win advantage display is being displayed, the BB win advantage display ends before the bonus win notification effect occurs, preventing the bonus win from being noticed before the win notification effect. Furthermore, even if a first BB win advantage display is being displayed and the second BB is won, or a second BB win advantage display is being displayed and the first BB is won, the BB win advantage display will continue to be displayed until the type of bonus is notified. Furthermore, even if the type of bonus is notified, the BB win advantage display will continue to be displayed if a different bonus type is notified. By doing this, it is possible to maintain anticipation for winning the target bonus.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3804, the process proceeds to step S3808. In step S3808, it is determined whether the status display to be updated is the first countdown display or the second countdown display. If it is either of these countdown displays, it is determined in step S3809 whether the corresponding BB win was achieved in the previous game. In other words, it is determined whether the current game is in the first BB state or the second BB state that is the target. If a negative judgment is made in step S3809, the countdown display is updated in step S3810, and then the status display update process is terminated. In the countdown display update process, the remaining number of games is updated by subtracting 1 in accordance with the shift of the special image.

If a positive judgment is made in step S3809, the display content is switched to the corresponding chance display in step S3811, and then the status display update process is terminated. For example, as shown in Figure 89 (b), if the second countdown display is being displayed targeting the sixth special image P6 in the seventh unit hold display area Dr7, and a second BB win is achieved, the second countdown display should be switched to the corresponding chance display.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3808, the process proceeds to step S3812. In step S3812, it is determined whether the status display to be updated is a corresponding chance display. If it is a corresponding chance display, it is determined in step S3813 whether the remaining payout number up to the maximum payout number for the current bonus state is more than 45 coins. If the remaining payout number is more than 45 coins, in step S3814, processing is performed to continue the corresponding chance display, and then the status display update processing is terminated. If the remaining payout number is 45 coins or less, processing is performed to switch the display content to a termination delay display, and then the status display update processing is terminated. For example, as shown in FIG. 90(a), when a corresponding chance display is being displayed targeting the fifth special image P5 in the seventh unit hold display area Dr7, if the remaining payout number becomes 45 coins or less and the fifth special image P5 being targeted is shifted to the sixth unit hold display area Dr6, it is recommended to switch to a termination delay display.

Here, a case where it is determined in step S3813 that the remaining payout number is 45 or less would be, for example, if the corresponding chance display is started when the remaining payout number is 72, and 9 medals are paid out in three consecutive games, causing the remaining payout number to drop to 45 and shift to the sixth unit hold display area Dr6. Since the status display ends with a shift to the fifth unit hold display area Dr5, a case where it is determined in step S3813 that the remaining payout number is 45 or less when the corresponding chance display is being displayed would be if the corresponding chance display was started when the remaining payout number was between 71 and 72, and 9 medals were paid out in three consecutive games from the start. In other words, if the corresponding chance display is initiated when the remaining payout number is 73 or more, even if nine medals are paid out in three consecutive games from the start, it will not be determined in step S3813 that there are 45 or fewer medals remaining; and even if the corresponding chance display is initiated with 71 or 72 medals, unless nine medals are paid out even once in the first three games, it will not be determined in step S3813 that there are 45 or fewer medals remaining.

If it is determined in step S3812 that a response chance display is being performed, this means that the status display being updated is a display for delaying the end. In this case, processing is performed in step S3816 to continue the display for delaying the end, and then the status display update processing is terminated.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

In a configuration in which the AT counter C is acquired in advance and stored in the lottery information storage area 106f, and the stored AT counter C and the game lottery results are used to perform the AT mode transition lottery, even if a transition in game state occurs, the AT mode transition lottery is performed using the AT counter C stored in the lottery information storage area 106f. That is, the AT mode transition lottery can be performed during BB using the AT counter C acquired during normal play, and the AT mode transition lottery can be performed during normal play using the AT counter C acquired during BB. Since the game lottery results can differ between normal play and BB, the probability of winning the AT mode transition can differ even if the same AT counter C is used. By utilizing this relationship, depending on the AT counter C acquired in advance, there can be cases in which it is better to transition to BB state during normal play and cases in which it is not, making it possible to enjoy the AT mode transition lottery while taking into account the timing of the state transition.

The probability of winning the specific role that triggers the AT mode transition lottery is different during normal play and during BB. This allows for differences in whether or not a transition to BB mode occurs during normal play, depending on the AT counter C obtained in advance, making it possible to optimally achieve the above-mentioned gameplay.

The probability of winning the specific role that triggers the AT mode transition lottery is different between the first BB state and the second BB state. By doing this, whether the transition should be to the first BB state or the second BB state during normal play will differ depending on the AT counter C obtained in advance, making it possible to enjoy the AT mode transition lottery while taking into account not only the transition timing but also the state to which the player will transition.

In addition, the information on the first BB win or second BB win is held as a first BB win flag or second BB win flag until the first BB win or second BB win occurs, allowing for gameplay such as adjusting the winning game for that winning BB in relation to the AT counter C after the first BB or second BB win has occurred.

When each AT counter C stored in the lottery information storage area 106f is the subject of an AT mode transition lottery, the pending display identifies what lottery result in that game will result in a win for AT mode transition, or whether it is likely to result in a win for AT mode transition, and displays each of the special images P1-P10 as a notification corresponding to that identified result. This allows the player to play the game after understanding what the desired lottery result will be from the pending display, dramatically improving the playability of the AT mode transition lottery.

Furthermore, in addition to the reserved display such as special images P1-P10, the status display also notifies players as to whether or not a state transition should occur, making it possible to easily understand the game content in a game where the AT counter C is consumed with each game and the situation changes every moment. This allows even players who are unfamiliar with the game to play while understanding not only what lottery result they should draw from the reserved display content, but also whether or not they should transition the game state.

In the random number acquisition process, the AT counter C is acquired regardless of whether the advantageous zone flag is set. This makes it less likely that the AT counter C will not be acquired when transitioning to an advantageous zone, and makes it possible to optimally carry out the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter C from the time the advantageous zone transition win is won.

On the other hand, the pending display as a preview of the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter C occurs after the transition to the advantageous zone. By doing this, it is possible to provide a preview of the AT mode transition lottery without going against the purpose of providing a gradual lottery, such as transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone and then taking the AT mode transition lottery in the advantageous zone.

<Modification 1>
In the first embodiment, the special image as the reserved display is configured to be displayed when the reserved display lottery conducted individually for each reserved (AT counter C) is won, but the reserved display may be configured to be displayed even if the reserved display lottery is not won based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Figure 91 is a flowchart showing the reserved display processing in this modified example.

In the pending display process in this modified example, step S3901 determines whether the AT mode win flag or AT mode flag is set, and step S3902 determines whether an AT command has been received. In step S3903, based on the received AT command, the information in AT counter C is stored in the corresponding area. The processes in steps S3901 to S3903 above are the same as the processes in steps S3501 to S3503 above.

In this modified example, after processing step S3903, a determination is made in step S3904 as to whether a bonus win notification effect has occurred and whether the type of bonus has also been notified. More specifically, at the start of the current game, as part of the bet effect setting process, a bonus win notification effect is set, including an effect indicating whether the first BB or second BB has been won, and a determination is made as to whether that effect has occurred. If it has not occurred, processing is performed in steps S3905 to S3910 to generate a hold display via a hold display lottery process. The processing in steps S3905 to S3910 is the same as the processing in steps S3504 to S3509 above.

If it is determined in step S3904 that a bonus winning notification effect has occurred at the start of the current game, the process proceeds to step S3911. In step S3911, it is determined whether there are any undisplayed unit hold display areas (no special image displayed) due to, for example, not winning the hold display lottery. If there are any, the process proceeds to step S3912, and processing is performed to obtain AT counter C information from the storage area of the hold information storage area 183c corresponding to the unit hold display area with the smallest number among the undisplayed unit hold display areas. Then, in step S3913, a special image table is obtained, and in step S3914, a special image selection process is performed, and in step S3915, processing is performed to display the selected special image in the corresponding unit hold display area. These processes are the same as those performed when the hold display lottery is won.

After executing the processing of step S3915, the process returns to step S3911 to determine whether any undisplayed unit hold display areas still exist. If special images are displayed in all unit hold display areas, a negative determination is made in step S3911. If special images are displayed in all unit hold display areas, the process proceeds to step S3916 to select a special image to display the status from among the special images currently being displayed. In this case, since a bonus win has already been notified as described above, the status display will be either the first countdown display or the second countdown display, and the special image corresponding to the first countdown display or the second countdown display will be the target of the status display. More specifically, if the first BB has been won, a cherry-type special image will be the target of the status display, and if the second BB has been won, a watermelon-type special image will be the target of the status display. If there are multiple special images that can be the target of the countdown display, the special image corresponding to the smallest-numbered area among the storage areas of the hold information storage area 183c will be selected as the target of the current status display.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 92, for example, when special images are displayed in the second unit hold display area Dr2 and the sixth unit hold display area Dr6, if a bonus winning notification effect indicating that the first BB has been won occurs, a specific notification will be initiated in the unit hold display area where no special images were displayed. More specifically, the bonus winning notification effect triggers special images to be displayed in the first unit hold display area Dr1, the third unit hold display area Dr3 to the fifth unit hold display area Dr5, and the seventh unit hold display area Dr7 to the tenth unit hold display area Dr10. In this case, the special images corresponding to these unit hold display areas Dr1, Dr3 to Dr5, and Dr7 to Dr9 were initially unsuccessful in the hold display lottery, and the bonus winning notification effect can be said to be an opportunity to display these unsuccessful images. Furthermore, since the special image will be displayed in the 10th unit reserve display area Dr10 without going through the reserve display lottery, the bonus winning notification effect can be seen as an opportunity to restrict the execution of the reserve display lottery or to restrict non-winning results in the execution of the reserve display lottery.

In Figure 92, of the newly displayed special images, the first special image P1, a cherry-colored special image, is displayed in the seventh unit hold display area Dr7, and a first countdown display targeting that first special image P1 is initiated as a status display.

By doing this, when one of the BBs is won during normal play and a transition from normal play to BB play is possible, the contents of each AT counter C stored in the lottery information storage area 106f can be known. In other words, in the AT mode transition lottery, when a transition to a state where the probability of winning a specific role that triggers the AT mode transition lottery is different is possible, the contents of the AT counter C can be ascertained from the pending display. In this way, for example, it is possible to configure the system so that not all pending displays are displayed during normal play, thereby avoiding the feeling of annoyance from a presentation standpoint, and by pinpointing pending displays when necessary, it is possible to optimally expect the presentation effect of the pending displays.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, when the type of bonus that has been won is notified, if the displayed special images do not include a special image corresponding to the won bonus, the bonus winning is delayed until the corresponding special image is displayed. Figure 93 is a flowchart showing the BB winning game adjustment process executed by the display control device 81. The BB winning game adjustment process is, for example, a process executed in the other start-time effect setting process (step S2511) in the start-time effect setting process (Figure 59), and is executed when the game is started based on the operation of the start lever 41.

In step S4001, it is determined whether a bonus winning notification was executed as the immediately preceding bet presentation. If a bonus winning notification was executed, it is determined in step S4002 whether a first BB winning notification was executed. If a first BB winning notification was executed, it is determined in step S4003 whether a cherry-type special image is displayed in any of the unit hold display areas. Note that, if this modified example is applied to modified example 1, it is also advisable to include in step S4003 the unit hold display area that begins displaying a new image in response to a bonus winning notification. If a cherry-type special image is displayed in any of the unit hold display areas, this is the case when the status display start process or the status display update process starts the status display of the first countdown display for that cherry-type special image. In other words, by quickly winning the first BB, it is possible to put the game that is the subject of the AT mode transition lottery into the first BB state when the AT counter C corresponding to that cherry-type special image is in the first BB state. If a cherry-type special image is displayed in any of the unit reserve display areas in step S4003, the BB winning game adjustment process ends.

In contrast, if it is determined in step S4003 that no cherry-based special image is displayed in any of the unit reserve display areas, a process for displaying a delayed winning display is executed in step S4005, and then the BB winning game adjustment process is terminated. The delayed winning display is a display intended to notify the player that the currently won BB should not be immediately won, but that the BB winning should be delayed until the special image corresponding to the won BB is displayed (until the AT counter C corresponding to the won BB is acquired). More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 94, when a bonus winning notification effect indicating that the first BB has been won is generated, if the cherry-based special image corresponding to the first BB is not displayed in each unit reserve display area, a display is made indicating that the BB winning should be avoided until the first special image P1, fourth special image P4, or fifth special image P5 is displayed as a cherry-based special image.

If it is determined in step S4002 that the bonus winning notification effect executed does not correspond to the first BB, it means that it corresponds to the second BB. In this case, proceed to step S4004 and determine whether a watermelon-based special image is displayed in any of the unit hold display areas. If a watermelon-based special image is displayed in any of the unit hold display areas, the status display of the second countdown display for that watermelon-based special image will be started by the status display start process or status display update process. In other words, by quickly winning the second BB, the AT counter C corresponding to that watermelon-based special image can put the game that is the subject of the AT mode transition lottery into the second BB state. If a watermelon-based special image is displayed in any of the unit hold display areas in step S4004, the BB winning game adjustment process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4004 that no watermelon-based special images are displayed in any of the unit reserve display areas, a process for displaying a winning delay is executed in step S4005, and then the BB winning game adjustment process is terminated. In this case, the winning delay display may display a message indicating that a BB winning should be avoided until the second special image P2, sixth special image P6, or seventh special image P7 is displayed as a watermelon-based special image.

If step S4001 determines that a bonus winning effect is not being displayed in this game, the process proceeds to step S4006. In step S4006, it is determined whether the above-mentioned winning delay display is being executed. If the winning delay display is not being executed, the BB winning game adjustment process is terminated. If the winning delay display is being executed, the process proceeds to step S4007 to determine whether the first BB is in a carryover state. The first BB is in a carryover state when a winning delay display is being displayed indicating that a BB winning should be avoided until the above-mentioned cherry-type special image is displayed. In this case, step S4008 determines whether a cherry-type special image was displayed in the 10th unit hold display area Dr10 during the hold display process for the previous game (based on the third stop OFF operation). If a cherry-type special image was displayed, the process proceeds to step S4010 to terminate the winning delay display. Then, in step S4011, a winning instruction display is displayed, and the BB winning game adjustment process is terminated. The winning instruction display is a display that notifies the player that a BB win should be achieved quickly. For example, as shown in FIG. 94, if the fifth special image P5 is displayed as a cherry-type special image in Dr10 in the tenth unit pending display area while a winning delay display corresponding to the first BB is being displayed, the auxiliary display unit 65 may display a message indicating that the first BB win should be achieved quickly (for example, a message saying "Aim for the red 7!!").

If it is determined in step S4007 that the first BB is not in a carryover state, this means that the second BB is in a carryover state, and a winning delay display is being displayed indicating that a BB win should be avoided until a watermelon-themed special image is displayed as the ongoing winning delay display. In this case, in step S4009, it is determined whether a watermelon-themed special image was displayed in the 10th unit pending display area Dr10 during the pending display process for the previous game (based on the third stop OFF operation). If a watermelon-themed special image was displayed, in step S4010, processing is performed to end the winning delay display, and in step S4011, a winning instruction display is displayed, and then this BB winning game adjustment process is terminated.

As described above, by determining whether the pre-acquired AT counter C is likely to result in an AT mode transition win in relation to the BB state to which a transition is possible, and by informing the player whether or not to transition to that BB state quickly, it is possible to realize not only a game that simply aims to win a BB that is likely to result in an AT mode transition win, but also a game in which the timing of the BB state transition is adjusted after the BB win.

In particular, this modified example is configured so that once a state transition becomes possible, an AT Counter C corresponding to that state is acquired (a state transition is avoided until the corresponding AT Counter C is acquired). Therefore, in a game where an AT mode transition lottery is conducted using AT Counter Cs acquired in advance, the player can select the AT Counter C to be provided for the AT mode transition lottery from among the acquired AT Counter Cs. This allows the player to be personally involved in the AT mode transition lottery, significantly increasing the excitement of the game.

Incidentally, the end delay display in the first embodiment is a notification indicating that the current state should be maintained until the target special image becomes the subject of the AT mode transition lottery, and the end delay display described above is a notification indicating that the current state should be maintained until the AT counter C corresponding to the target special image is obtained.

<Modification 3>
In the first embodiment, the description is based on the premise that the symbol arrangement allows the first BB win and the second BB win to be distinguished, but the symbol arrangement may be such that the first BB win and the second BB win cannot be distinguished or are difficult to distinguish. Note that the bonus win notification effect in this modification 3 is configured not to notify the type of the first BB or the second BB win.

Figure 95 shows an overview of the arrangement of symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R in this modified example. Note that Figure 95 only shows the "Red 7" symbol, which corresponds to the first BB win, and the "White BAR" symbol, which corresponds to the second BB win, and omits other symbols (such as the "Cherry" symbol and the "First Replay" symbol). Note that in this modified example 3, in addition to the downward-sloping line L4, the middle line L2 and upward-sloping line L5 are also set as activated lines in a 3-bet game.

In this variation, a "white BAR" symbol is placed at the 17th position on the left reel 32L, with a "red 7" symbol placed adjacent to it at the 18th position. On the center reel 32M, a "red 7" symbol is placed at the 17th position, with a "white BAR" symbol placed adjacent to it at the 18th position. On the right reel 32R, a "red 7" symbol is placed at the 18th position, with a "white BAR" symbol placed adjacent to it at the 19th position.

In this case, for example, if you attempt to achieve a first BB win by stopping the left reel 32L and aiming for the 18th "red 7" symbol, and the 18th "red 7" symbol stops in the top row, the 17th "white BAR" symbol will stop in the middle row, leaving room for a second BB win. In other words, at this point, it is impossible to determine from the winning combination whether you will achieve a first BB win or a second BB win. Furthermore, if you then perform a pinch-hit operation and aim for the 18th "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R, and the 18th "red 7" symbol stops in the bottom row, the 19th "white BAR" symbol will stop in the middle row, leaving room for a second BB win. In other words, once you have achieved a double tenpai of first and second BBs, it is impossible to determine whether you will achieve a first BB win or a second BB win until you stop the center reel 32M.

In this way, by making it difficult to know whether the player will transition to a favorable bonus state in relation to the special symbol displayed as a pending display until a bonus win is achieved, it is possible to further increase the sense of excitement leading up to the bonus win.

Second Embodiment
In the first embodiment, a common AT counter C is used as a random number for the AT mode transition lottery during normal play and during BB play, but in this embodiment, different random numbers are used. Figure 96 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the lottery information storage area 106f in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the lottery information storage area 106f is provided with an execution area AE and a memory area RE. The memory area RE is provided with a normal memory area REA that stores random numbers for the AT mode transition lottery during normal play, and a BB memory area REB that stores random numbers for the AT mode transition lottery during BB play. The normal memory area REA has multiple memory areas, and like the memory area RE in the first embodiment, areas are set up that can store random number information for the AT mode transition lottery for 10 games, from the first memory area REA1 to the tenth memory area REA10. In addition, the BB memory area REB is also set up with the first memory area REB1 to the tenth memory area REB10.

In other words, in this embodiment, random number information for the AT mode transition lottery can be stored in the first memory area REA1 to the tenth memory area REB10 in the normal memory area REA, and in the first memory area REB1 to the tenth memory area REB10 in the BB memory area REB, each for 10 games.

In this embodiment, a normal AT counter CA is provided in the various counter areas 106e as a random number for the AT mode transition lottery during normal times, and a BB AT counter CB is provided in the various counter areas 106e as a random number for the AT mode transition lottery during BB times. Similar to the AT counter C in the first embodiment, the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB are both loop counters that are incremented by one within the range of 1 to 128 and return to 1 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 128). The normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB are updated periodically, and are incremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is activated, for example.

In addition, for the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB, a dedicated free-running counter and hardware circuit may be used, similar to the free-running counter and hardware circuit used to determine whether a winning combination has been achieved, and the hardware circuit may latch the value of the free-running counter before the timing of acquiring the normal AT counter CA or the BB AT counter CB (for example, when the third stop OFF operation is performed), and the latched value may be read when acquiring the normal AT counter CA or the BB AT counter CB.

Figure 97 shows the AT mode transition lottery table when using the normal AT counter CA and the AT mode transition lottery table when using the BB AT counter CB.

When an AT mode transition lottery is held, the values that result in an AT mode transition win differ between the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB, corresponding to strong cherries, weak cherries, strong watermelons, and weak watermelons, but the values for other game results are the same. More specifically, the BB AT counter CB is associated with more values than the normal AT counter CA as values that result in an AT mode transition win when a strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, or weak watermelon is present. The AT mode transition lottery held when a strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, or weak watermelon is held is set up so that a lottery using the BB AT counter CB is more likely to result in a win than a lottery using the normal AT counter CA. Furthermore, the values corresponding to strong cherries and weak cherries are set up so that the value of the BB AT counter CB includes the value of the normal AT counter CA, while the values corresponding to strong watermelons and weak watermelons are set up so that the value of the normal AT counter CA and the value of the BB AT counter CB are different.

More specifically, the normal AT counter CA is assigned "1" to "64" as the winning value in the AT mode transition lottery that is held when a strong cherry is won, while the BB AT counter CB is assigned "1" to "95". Also, the normal AT counter CA is assigned "1" to "18" as the winning value in the AT mode transition lottery that is held when a weak cherry is won, while the BB AT counter CB is assigned "1" to "32". In other words, the winning values for strong and weak cherries are set so that the value of the BB AT counter CB includes the value of the normal AT counter CA.

In contrast, the normal AT counter CA associates "5" to "8" and "65" to "94" as winning values in the AT mode transition lottery held when a strong watermelon is won, while the BB AT counter CB associates "5" to "8" with "33" to "58" and "95" to "128". Furthermore, the normal AT counter CA associates "5" with "65" to "76" as winning values in the AT mode transition lottery held when a weak watermelon is won, while the BB AT counter CB associates "5" with "33" to "58". In other words, with the exception of "5" to "8" for strong watermelon and "5" for weak watermelon, all other values are set to be different from each other.

Figure 98 is a flowchart showing the random number acquisition process in this embodiment. As already explained, the random number acquisition process is executed based on the third stop OFF operation among the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44.

In step S4101, it is determined whether the game to be ended this time is in a bonus state, such as the first BB state or the second BB state. If it is not in a bonus state, the process proceeds to step S4102, where a process is executed to acquire the normal AT counter CA. Then, in step S4103, a process is executed to store the normal AT counter CA acquired in step S4102 in the corresponding memory area in the normal memory area REA. More specifically, a process is executed to store the normal AT counter CA in the area with the smallest number among the free areas in each of the memory areas REA1 to REA10 (basically the tenth memory area REA10). Then, in step S4104, it is determined whether the advantageous zone flag is set. If it is set, a process is executed to set a normal AT command A as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S4105. The normal AT command A is a command that causes the display control device 81 to grasp the normal AT counter CA information stored in each memory area REA in the normal memory area REA.

If the advantageous zone flag is not set in step S4104, or after executing the processing of step S4105, proceed to step S4106. In step S4106, the BB memory area REB is checked to determine whether the BB AT counter CB is stored in all areas of each memory area REB1 to REB10. If it is stored in all areas, this random number acquisition process ends. If there is an area where it is not stored, proceed to step S4107 and execute a process to acquire the BB AT counter CB. Then, in step S4108, execute a process to store the BB AT counter CB acquired in step S4107 in the corresponding memory area in the BB memory area REB. More specifically, execute a process to store the BB AT counter CB in the area with the smallest number among the empty areas in each memory area REB1 to REB10. Then, in step S4109, it is determined whether the advantageous zone flag is set, and if it is set, in step S4110, a process is executed to set the BB AT command B as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this random number acquisition process is terminated. The BB AT command B is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp the information of the BB AT counter CB stored in each memory area REB of the BB memory area REB. If the advantageous zone flag is not set in step S4109, the random number acquisition process is terminated.

In other words, when not in the bonus state, the random number acquisition process acquires the normal AT counter CA and stores it in the corresponding memory area, and also performs the acquisition and storage process of the BB AT counter CB, provided that there is an empty area in the BB memory area REB. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4101 that the bonus state is in, the process proceeds to step S4111, and the process reverses from steps S4102 to S4110. In other words, the BB AT counter CB is acquired and stored in the corresponding memory area, and also performs the acquisition and storage process of the normal AT counter CA, provided that there is an empty area in the normal memory area REA.

More specifically, in step S4111, a process is executed to acquire the BB AT counter CB, and in step S4112, a process is executed to store the BB AT counter CB in the area with the smallest number among the free areas in the BB memory area REB. Then, in step S4113, it is determined whether the advantageous zone flag is set, and if it is set, in step S4114, a process is executed to set the BB AT command B. If the advantageous zone flag is not set in step S4113 or after the process of step S4114 is executed, in step S4115, it is determined whether the normal AT counter CA is stored in all areas of the normal memory area REA. If it is stored in all areas, the random number acquisition process is terminated. If there is a free area, in step S4116, a process is executed to acquire the normal AT counter CA, and in step S4117, a process is executed to store the normal AT counter CA in the area with the smallest number among the free areas in the normal memory area REA. If the advantageous zone flag is set in step S4118, normal AT command A is set in step S4119, and the random number acquisition process ends. If the advantageous zone flag is not set, normal AT command A is not set, and the random number acquisition process ends.

Next, the random number shift processing in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 99. As already explained, the random number shift processing is performed in the lottery result processing (Figure 31) at the start of the game (step S701).

In step S4201, it is determined whether the current game is in the first BB state or the second BB state bonus state. If the current game is not in the bonus state, the process proceeds to step S4202, where the normal memory area REA is shifted. That is, in step S4202, of the memory areas REA1 to REA10, the normal AT counter CA stored in the first memory area REA1 is shifted to the execution area AE, and the information of the normal AT counter CA stored in the first memory area REA1 is cleared. In the AT mode transition lottery in the first specific combination process (Figure 33), the information corresponding to the normal AT counter CA stored in the execution area AE is obtained as the random number information used in the current AT mode transition lottery. In other words, the AT mode transition lottery during normal times, not during the bonus state, is performed based on the normal AT counter CA, of the normal AT counter CA and BB AT counter CB that have been previously obtained.

The following step S4203 shifts the normal AT counter CA stored in each memory area REA2-REA10 to the lower area. Specifically, the information stored in the second memory area REA2 is stored in the first memory area REA1, and the information stored in the second memory area REA2 is cleared. The information in each area is then shifted in order, from the third memory area REA3 to the second memory area REA2, the fourth memory area REA4 to the third memory area REA3, ... the tenth memory area REA10 to the ninth memory area REA9. In this case, only information is shifted from the tenth memory area REA10 to the ninth memory area REA9; no new information is shifted. In other words, the information in the tenth memory area REA10 is cleared, and the tenth memory area REA10 becomes an empty area.

If it is determined in step S4201 that the bonus state is in progress, the process proceeds to step S4204, where a shift process is performed on the BB memory area REB. That is, in step S4204, of the memory areas REB1 to REB10, the BB AT counter CB stored in the first memory area REB1 is shifted to the execution area AE, and the information on the BB AT counter CB stored in the first memory area REB1 is cleared. In the AT mode transition lottery in the first specific combination process (Figure 33), the information corresponding to the BB AT counter CB stored in the execution area AE is obtained as the random number information used in this AT mode transition lottery. In other words, the AT mode transition lottery during the bonus state is performed based on the BB AT counter CB, out of the normal AT counter CA and BB AT counter CB that have been previously obtained.

The next step, step S4204, shifts the BB AT counters CB stored in each of the memory areas REB2 to REB10 to the lower area. Specifically, this is the same as the shift of the normal memory area REA described above, and as a result of this shifting process, the tenth memory area REB10 becomes an empty area.

After executing the processing of step S4203 or step S4205, step S42006 determines whether the favorable zone flag is set. If the favorable zone flag is set, step S4207 executes processing to set the shift time command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the random number shift processing ends. If the favorable zone flag is not set in step S4206, the random number shift processing ends as is.

Although detailed explanation using diagrams will be omitted, in this embodiment, the hold information storage area 183c of the display control device 81 is configured with a normal hold information storage area and a BB hold information storage area, and like the normal storage area REA and BB storage area REB on the main control device 101 side, each is capable of storing 10 pieces of random number information for the AT mode transition lottery.

As shown in Figure 100(a), in this embodiment, a normal hold display area Dra and a BB hold display area Drb are set at the bottom as predetermined display areas in the auxiliary display unit 65, and the normal hold display area Dra and the BB hold display area Drb are set as areas lined up vertically. The normal hold display area Dra is partitioned so that unit hold display areas Dra1 to Dra10, the same number as the maximum number of normal AT counters CA that can be stored in the normal memory area REA, are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. In addition, the BB hold display area Drb is also partitioned so that unit hold display areas Drb1 to Drb10, the same number as the maximum number of BB AT counters CB that can be stored in the BB memory area REB, are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. In addition, adjacent to the normal hold display area Dra and the BB hold display area Drb, on the left side (to the left of the first unit hold display area Dra1 and the first unit hold display area Drb1), there is set up an execution display area Dp for displaying the hold of the normal AT counter CA or the BB AT counter CB stored in the execution area AE of the hold information storage area 183c.

Detailed illustrations of the hold display processing (Figure 79) and hold shift processing (Figure 81) on the display control device 81 side will not be provided, but in the hold display processing of this embodiment, if a normal AT command A is received in step S3502, information from the normal AT counter CA is stored in the corresponding area of the normal hold information storage area, and if a BB AT command B is received, information from the BB AT counter CB is stored in the corresponding area of the BB hold information storage area (step S3503). Then, a hold display lottery is held based on the counter acquired this time to determine whether or not to display the hold (step S3504), and if the hold display lottery is won, the corresponding special image is displayed (step S3508).

In the hold shift processing of this embodiment, upon receiving a shift command, the special image in the execution display area Dp is cleared (step S3602), and the special image in the first unit hold display area on the side that is the target of this shift is shifted to the execution display area Dp (step S3603). More specifically, if the shift command is output when the normal memory area REA is shifted, the special image in the first unit hold display area Dra1 in the normal hold display area Dra is shifted to the execution display area Dp. If the shift command is output when the BB memory area REB is shifted, the special image in the first unit hold display area Drb1 in the BB hold display area Drb is shifted to the execution display area Dp.

In other words, as shown in Figure 100(b), during normal play, each special image displayed in the normal reserve display area Dra is shifted every game and displayed in the execution display area Dp, indicating that it is the subject of the AT mode transition lottery. Meanwhile, each special image displayed in the BB reserve display area Drb remains on standby without being shifted. Also, as shown in Figure 101, during BB play, each special image displayed in the BB reserve display area Drb is shifted every game and displayed in the execution display area Dp, indicating that it is the subject of the AT mode transition lottery. Meanwhile, each special image displayed in the normal reserve display area Dra remains on standby without being shifted.

In other words, during normal play, it is possible to know the special image that will appear when BB occurs, and to carry that special image over until BB is won. Also, when the normal play special image transitions to BB, it is possible to participate in the AT mode transition lottery at BB without consuming that normal play special image. In this way, by storing separate AT counters and selecting the AT counter to be consumed (shifted) according to the state, it is possible to more reliably select the AT counter for each state as the target of the AT mode transition lottery in the corresponding state.

As described above, in this embodiment, a normal AT counter CA and a BB AT counter CB are provided as random number information used in the AT mode transition lottery, and the AT mode transition lottery is performed using the normal AT counter CA during normal times, and the BB AT counter CB during BB times.

The AT mode transition lottery is conducted using the lottery results of each game, in addition to the random number information used for the lottery, such as the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB. As in the first embodiment, if the probability of winning an AT mode transition for a specified lottery result (for example, a strong cherry) is adjusted for each game state, there is a method of varying the probability of winning the specified lottery result for each game state. However, there is a limit to how much the probability of winning a specified lottery result in each game can be increased or decreased, and changing the probability of winning a specified lottery result may also affect the medal payout rate.

In this embodiment, therefore, by varying the random number information used for the lottery that is associated with a predetermined lottery result to result in an AT mode transition win, it is possible to change the probability of winning the AT mode transition depending on the game state, without significantly changing the probability of winning the predetermined lottery result. Furthermore, in this embodiment, by providing different random number information for the lottery for each game state as described above, not only is the probability of winning the AT mode transition for each game state greatly improved, but the degree of freedom in the random number information associated with a transition win is also greatly improved.

In this case, for example, it is possible to make the update ranges of the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB different. The minimum probability of a lottery using random numbers is basically the reciprocal of the maximum value of the update range of the random number for that lottery (the number of random numbers). If you want to lower that minimum probability, it is a good idea to widen the update range of the random number. On the other hand, if the update range of the random number is too wide, it may cause configuration problems, such as complicating the correspondence of the lottery table. In other words, it is preferable to adjust the range of the random number for the lottery in question, taking into account the winning probability of the lottery in question and the processing load, etc. In that regard, if the update ranges of the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB are made different as described above, it becomes possible to effectively customize the random numbers for the AT mode transition lottery for each state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, during normal play, an AT mode transition lottery is conducted using the normal AT counter CA, and the BB AT counter CB is not used or shifted, and during BB, an AT mode transition lottery is conducted using the BB AT counter CB, and the normal AT counter CA is not used or shifted. As a result, unlike the first embodiment, where, during normal play, the acquired AT counter C must be selected to win the applicable bonus before it becomes eligible for the AT mode transition lottery; in this embodiment, the acquired BB AT counter CB is not consumed during normal play, making it possible to grasp the advantages and disadvantages of the AT mode transition lottery for the next bonus over a relatively long period of time. In other words, if the random number used for the lottery corresponds to the first BB, the player is encouraged to expect that the next bonus will be the first BB, and if it corresponds to the second BB, the player is encouraged to expect that the next bonus will be the second BB, which is similar to the first embodiment. However, whereas the first embodiment provided a short-term preview of 10 games, which is the number of reserved areas, this embodiment provides a long-term preview, in that the random number used for the lottery is maintained until the next bonus occurs. This makes it possible to build anticipation for that bonus over a longer period of time.

<Modification 1>
In this modified example, as described above, a normal AT counter CA and a BB AT counter CB are provided for each game state, and a special image corresponding to the normal AT counter CA and a special image corresponding to the BB AT counter CB are displayed side by side on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the counters CA and CB are shifted regardless of the game state. Figure 102 is a flowchart showing the random number shift processing in this modified example.

In step S4301, it is determined whether or not the bonus state is in effect. If the bonus state is not in effect, in step S4302, a shift process is performed from the normal memory area REA to the execution area AE. That is, in step S4302, the normal AT counter CA stored in the first memory area REA1 is shifted to the execution area AE, and the normal AT counter CA stored in the first memory area REA1 is cleared. This process is the same as the process in step S4202 above. In the following step S4303, similar to step S4203 above, a process is performed to shift the normal AT counter CA stored in each memory area REA2 to REA10 to the lower area side.

After executing the processing of step S4303, processing is executed in step S4304 to clear the data in the first storage area REB1 of the BB storage area REB. Then, processing is executed in step S4305 to shift the BB AT counter CB stored in each storage area REB2 to REB10 in the BB storage area REB to the lower area side. This processing is the same as the processing of step S4204 above. In other words, in this modified example, the BB AT counter CB in the BB storage area REB is shifted even when not in a bonus state and not subject to the AT mode transition lottery.

If it is determined in step S4301 that the bonus state is in progress, a shift process is performed in step S4306 from the BB memory area REB to the execution area AE. That is, in step S4306, the BB AT counter CB stored in the first memory area REB1 is shifted to the execution area AE, and the BB AT counter CB stored in the first memory area REB1 is cleared. This process is the same as the process in step S4204 above. In the following step S4307, similar to step S4205 above, a process is performed to shift the BB AT counter CB stored in each memory area REB2 to REB10 to the lower area side.

After executing the processing of step S4307, processing is executed in step S4308 to clear the data in the first memory area REA1 of the normal memory area REA. Then, processing is executed in step S4309 to shift the normal AT counter CA stored in each memory area REA2 to REA10 in the normal memory area REA to the lower area side. This processing is the same as the processing of step S4203 above. In other words, in this modified example, during the bonus state, the normal AT counter CA in the normal memory area REA is shifted even if the AT mode transition lottery is not applicable.

After executing the processing of step S4305 or step S4309, step S4310 determines whether the advantageous zone flag is set, and if it is set, step S4311 sets the shift time command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then terminates the random number shift processing. If the advantageous zone flag is not set, the shift time command is not set for output, and the random number shift processing terminates.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 103, during normal play, each special image displayed in the normal reserve display area Dra is shifted every game and displayed in the execution display area Dp, making it clear that it is the subject of the AT mode transition lottery. Furthermore, even during normal play, each special image displayed in the BB reserve display area Drb is shifted every game. Also, during BB, each special image displayed in the BB reserve display area Drb is shifted every game and displayed in the execution display area Dp, making it clear that it is the subject of the AT mode transition lottery. Furthermore, even during BB, each special image displayed in the normal reserve display area Dra is shifted every game.

During normal play, the special image in the BB reserve display area Drb is not shifted to the execution display area Dp; the special image is simply cleared. Also, during BB, the special image in the normal reserve display area Dra is not shifted to the execution display area Dp; the special image is simply cleared. Therefore, the player can clearly see which special image in the normal reserve display area Dra or the BB reserve display area Drb is the subject of the AT mode transition lottery.

By doing this, it becomes possible to understand in which game state it will be advantageous to take the AT mode transition lottery by comparing the special images in the normal reserve display area Dra and the BB reserve display area Drb, making it possible to optimally improve gameplay using the AT counter obtained in advance.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, the game state to which the game transitions after the end of the first BB state and the second BB state is different. That is, as shown in FIG. 104(a), when the first BB state ends, the game transitions to the normal game state, as in the above embodiments. However, when the second BB state ends, the game transitions to the fourth RT state, unlike the above embodiments. The fourth RT state is a fixed RT state in which the number of games that transition to the normal game state after a specified number of games has been played is fixed (FIG. 21). In this modified example, the lottery content for each game in the fourth RT state is configured to be the same as or nearly the same as the lottery content for each game in the normal game state. Compared to the normal game state, the fourth RT state differs in that the game does not transition to the first RT state even if the transition result stops. The lottery table for the fourth RT state may be the lottery table for the normal game state (FIG. 17).

In this modified example, the fourth RT state is used as a high-probability state in which the AT mode transition lottery is likely to result in a winning AT mode transition. That is, as shown in FIG. 105, in the AT mode transition lottery using the normal AT counter CA, the probability of winning the AT mode transition differs between the normal gaming state and the first through third RT states and the fourth RT state. More specifically, in the normal gaming state and the first through third RT states, the winning values for strong cherries are set to "1" through "64" on the normal AT counter CA, whereas in the fourth RT state, the winning values for strong cherries are set to "1" through "128" on the normal AT counter CA. Also, for weak cherries, in the normal gaming state and the first RT state to the third RT state, "1" to "18" of the normal AT counter CA is set as the winning value, whereas in the fourth RT state, "1" to "128" of the normal AT counter CA is set as the winning value. And for strong watermelons, in the normal gaming state and the first RT state to the third RT state, "5" to "8" and "65" to "94" of the normal AT counter CA are set as the winning value, whereas in the fourth RT state, "1" to "95" of the normal AT counter CA is set as the winning value. Also for weak watermelons, in the normal gaming state and the first RT state to the third RT state, "5" and "65" to "76" of the normal AT counter CA are set as the winning value, whereas in the fourth RT state, "1" to "95" of the normal AT counter CA is set as the winning value. As such, strong cherries, weak cherries, strong watermelons, and weak watermelons are more likely to result in an AT mode transition win in the 4th RT state than in the normal game state and the 1st to 3rd RT states.

In addition, in this modified example, the upper payout limit that triggers the end of the first BB state is different from the upper payout limit of the second BB state. As shown in FIG. 104(b), the first BB state ends when 216 medals are paid out, as in the above embodiments. If 9 medals are paid out per game, the first BB state ends in 24 games (at the earliest). In contrast, the upper payout limit for the second BB state is set to 36 medals. That is, in step S612 of the bonus state processing (FIG. 26), if the BB that has been won this time is the first BB, 216 is set, and if it is the second BB, 36 is set. In this case, if 9 medals are paid out per game, the second BB state ends in 4 games (at the earliest).

In other words, in this modified example, if the second BB is won, the number of medals that can be expected to be won in the bonus state to which the player transitions is lower than when the first BB is won, but the player is then set to the fourth RT state, which is a high-probability state in AT mode for 10 games.

By applying this configuration to the above variant 1, in which a normal AT counter CA and a BB AT counter CB are provided for each game state, and the special image corresponding to the normal AT counter CA and the special image corresponding to the BB AT counter CB are displayed side by side on the auxiliary display unit 65, and then shifting each counter CA, CB regardless of the game state, it becomes possible to enjoy the timing of the bonus winning and the bonus ending in relation to the special image in each pending display area.

That is, as shown in FIG. 106(a), let's say that the first special image P1 is displayed in the fourth unit hold display area Drb4 in the BB hold display area Drb, of the normal hold display area Dra and the BB hold display area Drb, and the first special image P1 is displayed in the tenth unit hold display area Dra10 in the normal hold display area Dra, and the second BB is won. As described above, the first BB state and the second BB state make it easier to win the AT mode transition lottery, so it is preferable for the player to enter the AT mode transition lottery for the first special image P1 in the fourth unit hold display area Drb4 during BB rather than normal times.

Furthermore, after the second BB state, the game transitions to the fourth RT state, and since it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery even in the fourth RT state, it is preferable for the player to take the AT mode transition lottery for the first special image in the tenth unit hold display area Dra10 during the fourth RT state during normal play. Therefore, in this modified example, a display such as "Chance after BB" is displayed as a status display for the special image in the tenth unit hold display area Dra10 as described above.

In this case, for example, if the second BB is won in the game shown in Figure 106(b), which is the game following the game shown in Figure 106(a), the AT mode transition lottery will be available from the game following that game in a situation where the second BB state is reached. In other words, of the normal reserve display area Dra and the BB reserve display area Drb, the special image (BB AT counter CB) in the BB reserve display area Drb will be used for the AT mode transition lottery.

As mentioned above, the second BB state has a maximum payout limit of 36 coins, and if the maximum payout per game of 9 coins is paid out, it can end in as few as four games. In other words, the second BB state can continue for at least four games. Therefore, the first special image P1 displayed in the fourth unit hold display area Drb4 in Figure 106(a) and the third unit hold display area Drb3 in Figure 106(b) will be used in the AT mode transition lottery at least when the second BB state is in effect.

However, if the lottery results for each game during the second BB state do not correspond to the payout of nine coins, or if the order or timing of operation of the stop switches 42-44 results in fewer coins being paid out or no payout occurs, the second BB state will end after more than four games. In this case, whether or not the first special image P1 displayed in the 10th unit hold display area Dra10 in FIG. 106(a) or the 9th unit hold display area Dra9 in FIG. 106(b) will be used in the AT mode transition lottery under normal circumstances, or more specifically, under the fourth RT state, will depend on the number of games required for the second BB state.

For example, if the second BB state ends in the shortest possible time of four games with nine payouts per game, the first special image P1 displayed in the ninth unit hold display area Dra9 in Figure 106(b) will end in the game displayed in the sixth unit hold display area Dra6, and the fourth RT state after the end of the second BB state will begin with the game displayed in the fifth unit hold display area Dra5, as shown in Figure 106(c). Since the fourth RT state continues for 10 games, the first special image P1 displayed in the fifth unit hold display area Dra5 will be used in the AT mode transition lottery when in the fourth RT state.

In contrast, if the second BB state ends after 12 games with three payouts per game, as shown in Figure 106(d), the first special image P1 displayed in the ninth unit hold display area Dra9 in Figure 106(b) will have already been cleared from the normal hold display area Dra, and the fourth RT state will begin after the second BB state ends. In other words, in this case, the benefit of the first special image P1 displayed in the ninth unit hold display area Dra9 in Figure 106(b) above cannot be enjoyed.

As described above, the minimum number of games to be completed differs depending on whether the BB state to be transitioned to is the first BB state or the second BB state. This means that, depending on the pending display, there is a difference in whether or not an AT mode transition lottery based on the AT counter C corresponding to the currently displayed pending display will be held after the BB state. Therefore, it is possible to draw interest in the type of BB state to be transitioned to, even from the perspective of such an AT mode transition lottery after the BB state.

Furthermore, whether the second BB state ends after the minimum number of games has been played depends on the lottery results of the game and the operation of the stop switches 42-44 in that game, which adds an element of luck and an element of player skill to the game, further enhancing the game's appeal in relation to the pending display currently being displayed.

Incidentally, the lottery results that can be won in each game in the first BB state and the second BB state are results that can result in medal payouts, and if the termination condition is that the number of medal payouts reaches a specified number, the lottery results that can be won in each of the above games can be said to constitute all or part of that termination condition.

In addition, with regard to the above variant 2, we have explained the gameplay utilizing the relationship between the first BB state, second BB state, and fourth RT state, assuming a configuration using a normal AT counter CA and a BB AT counter CB. However, in a configuration in which the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB are shifted regardless of the game state, it is also possible to configure the AT mode transition lottery to be performed using a common AT counter C regardless of the game state, as in the first embodiment.

Third Embodiment
106f)。 In the above embodiments, it is assumed that the random numbers (AT counter C, normal AT counter CA, BB AT counter CB) used in the AT mode transition lottery have already been obtained, and that they are consumed by being used in the AT mode transition lottery, and that the information on the random numbers is replenished in the random number acquisition process. In this embodiment, however, a situation will be described in which the information on the random numbers for the AT mode transition lottery has not been acquired. That is, as already explained, the random number acquisition process is executed based on the third stop OFF operation, and if the information on the random numbers is not stored in the lottery information storage area 106f, the AT mode transition lottery in the first specific role process cannot be executed. Therefore, in this slot machine 10, when the slot machine 10 is powered on, a process is executed to acquire in advance the information on the random numbers to be used in the AT mode transition lottery.

In the following explanation, we will explain the configuration in the first embodiment where the AT counter C is obtained as random number information for the AT mode transition lottery. However, in a configuration where a normal AT counter CA and a BB AT counter CB are provided as random number information for the lottery for each game state, as in the second embodiment, the configuration may be such that acquisition processing is performed for each counter CA, CB, or the configuration may be such that each counter CA, CB is obtained within the same processing.

As already explained, the winning probability setting process is initiated when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned ON when the power is turned on, which is considered a setting change operation. When the winning probability setting process is initiated, the setting value is updated by operating the start lever 41, and the setting value is confirmed when the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned OFF and then the start lever 41 is operated, with the setting value at that time becoming the current setting value and the winning probability setting process ending.

As shown in the flowchart in Figure 107, the initial random number acquisition process determines in step S4401 whether a setting change operation has been performed. In other words, it determines whether the winning probability setting process has been launched. If a setting change operation has not been performed, the initial random number acquisition process ends.

As already explained, the lottery information storage area 106f is provided in the RAM 106 of the main control device 101, and the winning probability setting process is initiated when the main processing at power-on performs initialization processing (RAM reset processing, RAM clear processing) of various information stored in the RAM 106 (game status information, winning flags, etc.). In other words, a case in which it is determined in step S4401 that the winning probability setting process has not been initiated is when the slot machine 10 is powered on without performing RAM 106 initialization processing. In this case, the various information in the RAM 106 before the power was cut off (for example, the previous day) is carried over (read out), and the state before the power was cut off is restored. In other words, if it is determined in step S4401 that the winning probability setting process has not been initiated, the AT counter C obtained before the power was cut off is carried over.

If it is determined in step S4401 that a setting change operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S4402, where it is determined whether a setting confirmation operation has been performed. If a setting confirmation operation has not been performed, the process waits in that state. If a setting confirmation operation has been performed, that is, if the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned OFF and the start lever 41 is operated during the winning probability setting process, it is determined in step S4403 whether AT counter C is stored in all storage areas of the lottery information storage area 106f. As described above, when the winning probability setting process is initiated, initialization processing has been performed. Therefore, basically, when proceeding from step S4402 to step S4403, it is determined in step S4403 that there is an empty area. If it is determined in step S4403 that there is an empty area, the process proceeds to step S4404.

In step S4404, the random number used for the lottery is updated. This process updates the AT counter C by adding a random value to it. In other words, as a result of the initialization process described above, the value of the AT counter C is initialized to its initial value (1). In step S4404, this initial value is updated to a random value.

Specifically, this slot machine 10 is provided with a random number circuit for the free-running counter that is activated when the power is turned on. This random number circuit generates random numbers between 1 and 128, and updates and generates random numbers separately and independently even while the main process is running (i.e., while the process for obtaining the initial random number is running). In step S4404, the random number at the time of startup in step S4404 is obtained from the random number circuit, and the obtained random number is added to the current AT counter C.

Then, in step S4405, the updated AT counter C is acquired. Then, in step S4406, the AT counter C is stored in the free area with the smallest number. The processing in steps S4405 and S4406 is the same as the processing in steps S3301 and S3302 above.

After executing the processing of step S4406, the process returns to step S4403, where it is determined whether there is an empty area in the lottery information storage area 106f. If there is an empty area, the process proceeds again to step S4404, where the AT counter C is updated, and then the AT counter C is acquired and stored. By doing this, when acquiring AT counter C values for multiple games at once, it becomes less likely that the same or consecutive AT counter C values will be acquired. Note that the update cycle of the random number circuit is set to be asynchronous with the cycle cycle of steps S4403 to S4406.

When AT counters C are stored in all areas, a negative judgment is made in step S4403 and the process proceeds to step S4407. In step S4407, the AT command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this initial random number acquisition process ends. The AT command set here is output to the display control device 81 by timer interrupt processing after the main processing ends. This makes it possible to play the first game after the initialization process is executed, with AT counters C already stored in all areas of the lottery information storage area 106f.

Incidentally, when the initialization process is executed when the power is turned on, the advantageous zone flag is also cleared, and after this initialization process, the game will start in the normal zone rather than the advantageous zone. As a result, in this embodiment, after power is turned on, an AT command is output and a hold display can be displayed even in the normal zone. By doing this, it is possible to play in which the win probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on, and whether or not the win probability (setting value) has been changed can be predicted based on whether or not the hold display is displayed.

As in the other embodiments described above, the initial random number acquisition process may also be configured to output an AT command if the game is in a favorable zone.

By doing the above, in a configuration in which AT counter C is acquired in advance and an AT mode transition lottery is performed, it is possible to prevent an event from occurring in which the AT mode transition lottery cannot be performed because the AT counter C has not been acquired.

In particular, in the above embodiment, the process for obtaining an initial random number is performed during the process for setting the winning probability in the main process when the power is turned on. Therefore, when the main process transitions to normal processing and the game can be started, the AT counter C is already full in the lottery information storage area 106f. Therefore, it is possible to optimally perform the AT mode transition lottery even in the first game after power is turned on.

In the normal random number acquisition process, AT counter C is acquired when the third stop OFF operation is performed among the operations of stop switches 42-44, and in the initial random number acquisition process, AT counter C is acquired based on the operation of start lever 41 as an operation to confirm the set value in the winning probability setting process. In this way, some operation is involved to acquire AT counter C, and compared to a configuration in which acquisition is performed automatically on the gaming machine side, the acquisition timing and the acquired AT counter C value are also likely to be random.

<Modification 1>
In the third embodiment, the random number information for the empty area of the lottery information storage area 106f is acquired based on the operation to confirm the set value, but the random number may be acquired based on the acquisition operation for the empty area. Figure 108 is a flowchart showing the initial random number acquisition process in this modified example.

In step S4501, it is determined whether a setting change operation has been performed, and if not, the initial random number acquisition process is terminated. If a setting change operation has been performed, in step S4502, it is determined whether there is any free space in the lottery information storage area 106f. This process is the same as the process in step S4403 above. If there is free space, the process proceeds to step S4503, and processing is performed to execute an operation instruction notification. An example of an operation instruction notification is a notification to have the administrator perform an operation to acquire a random number for the AT mode transition lottery. For example, if the acquisition operation is to operate the start lever 41, the auxiliary display unit 65 may be configured to display "Please operate the start lever," or the instruction monitor 68 may be configured to display a predetermined symbol (alphabet, number, for example, the letter "S").

In this case, it is preferable to configure the system so that the operation for changing the set value (winning probability) and the operation for obtaining the AT counter C can be distinguished by the gaming machine and the administrator. More specifically, it is preferable to configure the operation for changing the set value (winning probability) and the operation for obtaining the AT counter C to be performed at different times.

Then, in step S4504, it is determined whether an acquisition operation has been performed, and the process waits until an acquisition operation is performed. If an acquisition operation has been performed, the process updates the random number in step S4505, acquires AT counter C in step S4506, and stores AT counter C in step S4507, before returning to step S4502. The processes in steps S4505 to S4507 are the same as those in steps S4404 to S4406 above.

If it is determined in step S4502 that there is no free space, the process proceeds to step S4508, where it determines whether the setting value has been confirmed and waits until the confirmation operation is performed. If the confirmation operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S4509, where the AT command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the initial random number acquisition process ends.

By doing this, in a configuration in which AT Counter C is acquired based on an administrator's operation, there is a one-to-one relationship between the acquisition operation and the acquired random number information. This makes it easier for the timing of AT Counter C acquisition to be random, and also makes it easier for the acquired AT Counter C value to be random.

<Modification 2>
A random number for the AT mode transition lottery may be obtained using a random number from another counter other than the AT counter C. Fig. 109 is a flowchart showing the initial random number obtaining process in this modified example.

In step S4601, it is determined whether a setting change operation has been performed, and in step S4602, it is determined whether a setting value confirmation operation has been performed. Then, in step S4603, it is determined whether there is an empty area in the lottery information storage area 106f. The processing of steps S4601 to S4603 is the same as the processing of steps S4401 to S4403. If it is determined in step S4603 that there is an empty area, the process proceeds to step S4604.

In step S4604, a random number update process is performed. This update process is basically the same as the update process for AT counter C in step S4404, etc., but in this modified example, random numbers for other counters, etc. are also updated. In this modified example, the random numbers for other counters, etc. will be explained using as examples the lottery counter used for the additional lottery, the lottery counter used for the VB mode transition lottery, and the lottery counter used for the specialized zone transition lottery.

As shown in FIG. 110, the lottery counter used for the additional lottery is a loop counter that is incremented by one within the range of 1 to 256 and returns to 1 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 256). The lottery counter used for the additional lottery is updated periodically, for example, by incrementing by one each time a timer interrupt process is initiated. The lottery counter used for the VB mode transition lottery is a loop counter that is incremented by one within the range of 1 to 128 and returns to 1 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 128). The lottery counter used for the VB mode transition lottery is also updated periodically, for example, by incrementing by one each time a timer interrupt process is initiated. The lottery counter used for the specialized zone transition lottery is a loop counter that is incremented by one within the range of 1 to 64 and returns to 1 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 64). The lottery counter used for the specialized zone transition lottery is also updated periodically, for example, by incrementing by one each time a timer interrupt process is initiated.

Although these lottery counters are updated by timer interrupt processing after the main processing ends, they are initialized to the initial value (1) by the initialization processing performed as described above when the initial random number acquisition processing is started. Therefore, in step S4604, these lottery counters are also updated to random values. In this case, when updating the AT counter C, the random number obtained from the random number circuit is added as is. When updating the lottery counter used for the additional lottery, a first operation (e.g., adding a first predetermined value) is performed on the random number obtained from the random number circuit and then the calculated value is added. When updating the lottery counter used for the VB mode transition lottery, a second operation (e.g., adding a second predetermined value) different from the first operation is performed on the random number obtained from the random number circuit and then the calculated value is added. When updating the lottery counter used for the specialized zone transition lottery, a third operation (e.g., adding a third predetermined value) different from the first and second operations is performed on the random number obtained from the random number circuit and then the calculated value is added. This configuration allows the updated values from the initial values to be different.

Alternatively, the initial values may be different for each counter. Alternatively, separate random number circuits may be prepared for updating, and the update cycles of the respective random number circuits may be set to different values, allowing each lottery counter to be updated to a different value.

In step S4605, processing is performed to obtain a random number for the AT mode transition lottery. In this case, in this modified example, in addition to AT counter C, processing is performed to obtain a free-running counter for the lottery used in the lottery processing for each game (a counter latched by a hardware circuit), a lottery counter used for the additional lottery, a lottery counter used for the VB mode transition lottery, and a lottery counter used for the specialized zone transition lottery. As described above, not only AT counter C, but also the lottery counter used for the additional lottery, the lottery counter used for the VB mode transition lottery, and the lottery counter used for the specialized zone transition lottery are updated to random values in the update processing of step S4604. Furthermore, random values are individually latched in the hardware circuit for the free-running counters for the lottery used in the lottery processing for each game (counters latched by a hardware circuit).

These free run counters for lottery used in the lottery process for each game, the lottery counters used for additional lotteries, the lottery counters used for VB mode transition lotteries, and the lottery counters used for specialized zone transition lotteries are random numbers for lottery use that are provided separately from the AT counter C. In this modified example, the random numbers for lottery use that are provided separately from the AT counter C are used for the AT counter C.

At least one of these separately provided lottery random numbers (specifically, the lottery free-run counter used in the lottery processing for each game) is updated at a different update cycle than the update cycle of the AT counter C. More specifically, the lottery free-run counter used in the lottery processing for each game is updated at an update cycle that is shorter than the update cycle of the AT counter C. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the free-run counter begins updating regardless of the progress of the main processing.

In step S4606, a conversion process is performed on the counters acquired in step S4605. Specifically, each lottery counter, which is a separately set random number, is converted into a value corresponding to a random number for the AT mode transition lottery. As shown in FIG. 110, conversion tables for each counter are stored in the various table storage area 105a, and in step S4606, the counters acquired in step S4605 and the conversion tables are used to convert them into random numbers that can be used for the AT mode transition lottery.

For example, the lottery free-run counter used in the lottery process for each game acquires a value between 0 and 65535. If a value between 0 and 511 is acquired, it is converted to 1 as the AT counter C. If a value between 512 and 1023 is acquired, it is converted to 2 as the AT counter C. If a value between 65024 and 65535 is acquired, it is converted to 128 as the AT counter C. Furthermore, the lottery counter for the additional lottery acquires a value between 1 and 256. If a value of 1 or 2 is acquired, it is converted to 1 as the AT counter C. If a value of 3 or 4 is acquired, it is converted to 2 as the AT counter C. If a value of 255 or 256 is acquired, it is converted to 128 as the AT counter C. In this way, for counters with a wider update range than the AT counter C (counters that can have larger values), a conversion table is set in which an AT counter value of 1 corresponds to multiple counter values.

For example, the lottery counter for the VB mode transition lottery acquires a value between 1 and 128; if 1 is acquired, it is converted to 1 as AT counter C; if 2 is acquired, it is converted to 2 as AT counter C; and if 128 is acquired, it is converted to 128 as AT counter C. In other words, for counters with the same update range as the AT counter C update range, the conversion table is set so that the acquired counter value becomes the AT counter value as is. Note that the conversion table may also be set so that the AT counter value becomes a different value from the acquired counter value; for example, if 1 is acquired, it is converted to 128 as AT counter C; if 2 is acquired, it is converted to 127 as AT counter C; and if 128 is acquired, it is converted to 1 as AT counter C.

The lottery counter for the specialized zone transition lottery acquires a value between 1 and 64. If 1 is acquired, it is converted to 1 or 2 as the AT Counter C; if 2 is acquired, it is converted to 3 or 4 as the AT Counter C; and if 64 is acquired, it is converted to 127 or 128 as the AT Counter C. In other words, for counters with a narrower update range than AT Counter C (counters that cannot have a large value), a conversion table is set in which multiple AT Counter values correspond to a counter value of 1. In this case, the AT Counter C value to be converted is also determined by lottery or other means. For example, if 1 is acquired as the lottery counter for the specialized zone transition lottery, 50% is converted to 1 as the AT Counter C, and 50% is converted to 2 as the AT Counter C. Note that the AT Counter C values converted do not have to be evenly divided; for example, if 1 is acquired as the lottery counter for the specialized zone transition lottery, 20% may be converted to 1 as the AT Counter C, and 80% may be converted to 2 as the AT Counter C, or different proportions may be used.

In addition, the conversion tables may be configured so that the AT counters to be converted partially overlap. For example, if 1 is acquired as the lottery counter for the specialized zone transition lottery, 30% will be converted to 1 as AT counter C, 30% will be converted to 2 as AT counter C, and 40% will be converted to 3 as AT counter C. Also, if 2 is acquired as the lottery counter for the specialized zone transition lottery, 40% will be converted to 2 as AT counter C, 30% will be converted to 3 as AT counter C, and 30% will be converted to 4 as AT counter C.

After converting each counter to AT counter C in step S4606, the converted values are stored in an empty area of lottery information storage area 106f. In this case, for example, the values may be stored in the order of AT counter C, the converted value of the free run counter for the lottery used in the lottery process for each game, the converted value of the lottery counter used for the additional lottery, the converted value of the lottery counter used for the VB mode transition lottery, and the converted value of the lottery counter used for the specialized zone transition lottery, starting with the empty area with the lowest number. Alternatively, the converted value of which counter is stored in which empty area may be determined randomly by lottery, etc.

After executing the processing of step S4606, the process returns to step S4602. If there is no more free space, a negative determination is made at step S4602, and the process proceeds to the AT command setting processing of step S4607. This processing is the same as the processing of step S4407 above.

Incidentally, in this modified example, as described above, five random numbers can be obtained in one cycle of the processing of steps S4603 to S4607. Therefore, when the processing of steps S4603 to S4607 is performed for two cycles, AT Counter C (or a value equivalent thereto) is stored in all areas. In this regard, it is also possible to obtain ten random numbers for AT Counter C, and store AT Counter C in all areas in one cycle of the processing of steps S4603 to S4607. In this case, one AT Counter C may be used, and nine other random numbers may be prepared, allowing ten random numbers for the AT mode transition lottery to be obtained at one time. Alternatively, ten other random numbers excluding AT Counter C may be prepared, allowing ten random numbers for the AT mode transition lottery to be obtained at one time. By doing the latter, it is possible to substitute other random numbers in cases where there is no point in obtaining AT Counter C, or where obtaining AT Counter C would result in inconveniences such as the lottery result being the same every time, as occurs when AT Counter C remains at its initial value.

Alternatively, the number of random numbers obtained for AT counter C may be three, and the number of counters obtained in step S4605 may vary depending on the number of free areas, such as AT counter C being stored in nine areas over three rounds of processing from step S4603 to step S4607, and one AT counter C being stored over the remaining one round.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which multiple random numbers different from the AT counter C are obtained and each is converted into an AT counter C, as in the above modified example, it is also possible to configure the random numbers to be obtained starting with those with shorter update periods. By doing this, for example, when obtaining the random numbers, the numbers will be obtained in order of likelihood that they have already been updated from the initial value, thereby avoiding the inconvenience of always obtaining a value close to the initial value.

<Modification 3>
Instead of or in addition to the configuration in which the random numbers for the AT mode transition lottery are obtained in advance when the process for setting the winning probability at power-on is started, a configuration in which the random numbers are obtained in advance during the game after startup may be adopted. Figure 111 is a flowchart showing the initial random number obtaining process in this modified example. The initial random number obtaining process in this modified example is started at a predetermined cycle, and for example, is started within the timer interrupt process each time the timer interrupt process is started, or as a process separate from the timer interrupt process.

In step S4701, it is determined whether there is an empty area in the lottery information storage area 106f. Note that in step S4701, a positive determination is also made if the execution area AE, in addition to each storage area RE, of the lottery information storage area 106f is empty. If a negative determination is made in step S4701, the initial random number acquisition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4701 that there is an empty area in the execution area AE or the memory area RE, the process proceeds to step S4702, where it is determined whether a game is in progress. Incidentally, in step S4702, one game is counted as the period from when the start lever 41 is operated to start the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, until all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped based on the third stop OFF operation, and the processing corresponding to the winning result (such as medal payout) is completed, and this period is determined to be the period during which the game is in progress. If it is determined that a game is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S4703, where it is determined whether the start lever 41 has been operated to start the game. Note that a valid bet placed when the start lever 41 is operated may also be a condition for determining that a start operation has been performed. If a start operation has not been performed, the initial random number acquisition process is terminated.

If it is determined that a start operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S4704, where AT counter C acquisition processing is performed. Then, in step S4705, the AT counter C is stored. If the execution area AE is an empty area, the AT counter C is stored in the execution area AE in step S4705. When an AT mode transition lottery is performed in the lottery result corresponding processing during normal processing, if the AT counter C is not stored in the execution area AE, it is recommended to wait until the storage processing of step S4705 is completed. If the AT counter C is stored in the execution area AE in step S4705, the AT counter C is stored in the empty area with the smallest number in the memory area RE. After the processing of step S4705 is executed, this initial random number acquisition processing ends.

If it is determined in step S4702 that a game is in progress, the process proceeds to step S4706. In step S4706, it is determined whether the first stop ON operation has been performed. If the first stop ON operation has been performed, the process acquires the AT counter C in step S4707, and in step S4708, the AT counter C is stored in the area with the smallest number among the free areas in the memory area RE, after which the initial random number acquisition process ends.

If it is determined in step S4706 that the first stop ON operation has not been performed (the first stop ON operation has already been performed), the process proceeds to step S4709. In step S4709, it is determined whether the second stop ON operation has been performed. If the second stop ON operation has been performed, the process performs an AT counter C acquisition process in step S4710, and stores the AT counter C in the smallest-numbered free area in the memory area RE in step S4711, after which the initial random number acquisition process ends.

If it is determined in step S4709 that the second stop ON operation has not been performed (the second stop ON operation has already been performed), the process proceeds to step S4712. In step S4712, it is determined whether the third stop ON operation has been performed. If the third stop ON operation has been performed, the process of acquiring AT counter C is performed in step S4713, and the AT counter C is stored in the area with the smallest number among the free areas in memory area RE in step S4714, after which the process for acquiring the initial random number is terminated. If it is determined in step S4712 that the third stop ON operation has not been performed (the third stop ON operation has already been performed), the process for acquiring the initial random number is terminated.

As described above, even in the initial random number acquisition process, the acquisition of the AT counter C is performed through player operation, so the AT mode transition lottery is conducted within the player's own responsibility. Compared to a configuration in which the result is acquired through the operation of an amusement hall manager, etc., the result is easier for players to understand, ensuring transparency in the game.

For example, it is also possible to configure the system so that only one AT counter C or the like is acquired during the initial random number acquisition process when the power is turned on, and the remaining counters are acquired in accordance with the game's progress as described above.

<Fourth embodiment>
In this embodiment, a transition to the fourth RT state can occur in the first RT state. When the transition to the fourth RT state occurs, a notification corresponding to the AT counter C that has been acquired in advance is made. In this embodiment, the reserved display area Dr is not set, and a special image corresponding to the AT counter C is not displayed. As already explained, the fourth RT state is a fixed RT state in which the number of games is fixed.
Figure 112 shows a lottery table for the first RT state in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, Transition Replay 1 and Transition Replay 2 may be won on the 11th and 12th replays, which result in a transition to the 4th RT state. More specifically, the probability of winning Transition Replay 1 with index value IV = 13 is approximately 1 in 400, and the probability of winning Transition Replay 2 with index value IV = 14 is also approximately 1 in 400. In total, the probability of winning either Transition Replay 1 or Transition Replay 2 is approximately 1 in 200.

Figure 113 shows the relationship between the game results that will result in a winning result when a transition replay is won and the operation sequence of stop switches 42-44. Transition Replay 1 and Transition Replay 2 are both set up so that an 11th replay win is achieved when the switches are operated in any of the following stopping sequences: left → center → right, left → right → center, or center → left → right, and a 12th replay win is achieved when the switches are operated in any of the following stopping sequences: right → center → left, right → left → center, or center → right → left.

In this embodiment, when the 11th replay win is achieved, the game transitions to the 4th RT state A within the 4th RT state, and when the 12th replay win is achieved, the game transitions to the 4th RT state B within the 4th RT state. The lottery tables for the 4th RT state A and the 4th RT state B are different. Specifically, Figure 114 shows the lottery table for the 4th RT state, where the value shown on the left side of the point value PV column indicates the 4th RT state A, and the value shown on the right side of the point value PV column indicates the 4th RT state B.

In this embodiment, the winning results are set for index values IV = 59 and 60. If index value IV = 59 is won, a 13th replay win can be achieved. Also, if index value IV = 60 is won, a 14th replay win can be achieved. The winning patterns for the 13th replay win and the 14th replay win are as shown in FIG. 115(a), and both replay wins can be achieved regardless of the timing or order of operation of the stop switches 42-44. The 13th replay is also called a cherry replay because, for example, when a "LUCKY" symbol stops on the top row of the left reel 32L to achieve a win, a "cherry" symbol will stop on the middle row of the left reel 32L. The 14th replay is also called a watermelon replay because, for example, a "watermelon" symbol will stop on the middle row of the center reel 32M to achieve a win.

Cherry Replay and Watermelon Replay are included in the specific roles that are game results that are subject to the AT mode transition lottery. Figure 115 (b) shows the probability of winning specific roles in this embodiment by game state. The probability of winning specific roles in the normal game state, the first RT state to the third RT state, the first BB state, and the second BB state is the same as in each of the above embodiments. In the fourth RT state, normal replays and push order replays (note that transition replay 1 and transition replay 2 are not included here) will not be won, but cherry replays and watermelon replays in transition replay 1 and transition replay 2 can be won. The probability of winning a Cherry Replay and a Watermelon Replay differs between 4th RT state A and 4th RT state B; in 4th RT state A, there is about a 1/2 chance of winning a Cherry Replay and about a 1/20 chance of winning a Watermelon Replay, whereas in 4th RT state B, there is about a 1/20 chance of winning a Cherry Replay and about a 1/20 chance of winning a Watermelon Replay. In other words, 4th RT state A is more likely to win a Cherry Replay and is also known as Cherry RT, while 4th RT state B is more likely to win a Watermelon Replay and is also known as Watermelon RT.

A replay is awarded if a Cherry Replay wins, and a replay is also awarded if a Sugar Replay wins. Furthermore, the probability of winning anything other than a Cherry Replay or Sugar Replay is the same in 4th RT state A and 4th RT state B. Both 4th RT state A and 4th RT state B transition to the normal game state after 10 games have been played. In other words, there is no difference in the degree of advantage to the player between 4th RT state A and 4th RT state B in terms of the number of medals expected to be won per game. Therefore, when Transition Replay 1 or Transition Replay 2 is won, there is no difference in the number of medals the player can expect to win in that RT state, regardless of whether the transition is to 4th RT state A or 4th RT state B.

Figure 116 shows the AT mode transition lottery table for this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the AT Counter C value that will result in a winning AT mode transition lottery is set for Cherry Replay and Suika Replay, and the AT Counter C values for other specific roles are the same as those in the above embodiments. Specifically, when the AT mode transition lottery is held for Cherry Replay, a value of 1 to 64 for the AT Counter C results in a winning AT mode transition, and when the AT mode transition lottery is held for Suika Replay, a value of 65 to 128 for the AT Counter C results in a winning AT mode transition. The AT Counter C values associated with Cherry Replay and Suika Replay are common to both the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B. Additionally, the value of the AT counter C that will result in a win to transition to AT mode when a cherry replay or watermelon play occurs in the normal gaming state or in the first RT state to the third RT state is also set, but in this embodiment, it is set so that a cherry replay or watermelon play will not be won in the normal gaming state or in the first RT state to the third RT state, so an event that will result in a win to transition to AT mode when a cherry replay or watermelon play occurs in these gaming states will not occur.

Here, the AT Counter C value associated with Cherry Replay and the AT Counter C value associated with Suika Replay are both continuous values, but have different average values. Specifically, Cherry Replay ranges from "1" to "64," with an average value of 32.5. In contrast, Suika Replay ranges from "65" to "128," with an average value of 96.5. As already explained, AT Counter C has an update range of "1" to "128," with Cherry Replay associated with the first half of that update range and Suika Replay associated with the second half of that update range. In other words, if the acquired AT Counter falls within a small value within the update range (the first half of the update range, the first range), it corresponds to a Cherry Replay, and if the acquired AT Counter falls within a large value within the update range (the second half of the update range, the second range), it corresponds to a Suika Replay.

Figure 117 is a flowchart showing the random number acquisition process in this embodiment.

In step S4801, a process for acquiring an AT Counter C is executed, followed by a process for storing the AT Counter C in the corresponding memory area in step S4802. After executing the process in step S4802, a determination is made in step S4803 as to whether the value of the AT Counter C acquired and stored this time is less than 65. That is, a determination is made as to whether the current AT Counter C is a value on the smaller side within the update range and corresponds to a Cherry Replay. If it corresponds to a Cherry Replay, a process for adding 1 to the Cherry Counter CC provided in the various counter area 106e is executed in step S4804, and the random number acquisition process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4803 that the current AT Counter C is a value on the larger side within the update range and corresponds to a Watermelon Replay, a process for adding 1 to the Watermelon Counter SC provided in the various counter area 106e is executed in step S4805, and the random number acquisition process is terminated. The cherry counter CC is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to grasp the number of AT counters C stored in the lottery information storage area 106f that correspond to cherry replays with smaller values within the update range, and the watermelon counter SC is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to grasp the number of AT counters C stored in the lottery information storage area 106f that correspond to watermelon replays with larger values within the update range.

As described above, in this embodiment, the pending display area Dr is not set, and the special image corresponding to the AT counter C is not displayed. Therefore, in the random number acquisition process in this embodiment, the process of outputting an AT command to the display control device 81 is not set.

Next, the random number shifting process in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 118.

In step S4901, the AT Counter C stored in the first memory area RE1 is shifted to the execution area AE. In the following step S4902, a determination is made as to whether the value of the AT Counter C shifted in step S4901, i.e., the value of the AT Counter C shifted to the execution area AE, is less than 65. If it is less than 65, the current AT Counter C is on the smaller side of the update range, and corresponds to a Cherry Replay, then in step S4903, the Cherry Counter CC is decremented by 1. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the AT Counter C shifted to the execution area AE is 65 or greater, the current AT Counter C is on the larger side of the update range, and corresponds to a Watermelon Replay, then in step S4904, the Watermelon Counter SC is decremented by 1. After the processing in step S4903 or S4904 is executed, the shift processing for each memory area is executed in step S4905, and then the random number shift processing is terminated. As mentioned above, since this embodiment does not display a hold using a special image, the random number shift process in this embodiment does not include a process for setting the output of a shift command.

Next, the special notification process executed in step S1524 of the push order role processing in the main control unit 101 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 119. The special notification process is executed in games in which Transition Replay 1 or Transition Replay 2 is won.

In step S5001, it is determined whether the currently winning transition replay is transition replay 1. If it is transition replay 1, in step S5002, the cherry counter CC and watermelon counter SC are compared to determine whether the values of the cherry counter CC and watermelon counter SC are the same. If the cherry counter CC is 5 and the watermelon counter SC is 5, it is determined in step S5002 that they are the same.

If the numbers are not the same, in step S5003, it is determined whether the cherry counter CC is greater than the watermelon counter SC. If the cherry counter CC is greater, in step S5004, the special notification A command is set as the output target to the display control device 81.

When the Cherry Counter CC is larger, this occurs when more than half of the AT Counters C for 10 games stored in the lottery information storage area 106f are AT Counters C corresponding to Cherry Replay, and transitioning to the 4th RT state A (Cherry RT) based on the current Transition Replay 1 win makes it easier to win the AT mode transition lottery. Upon receiving the special notification A command, the display control device 81 executes a process for notifying the auxiliary display unit 65 of the operation mode corresponding to the 11th replay win in the special notification execution process (step S2615) of the push order notification process (FIG. 60). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(a), it is recommended to notify the stop switches 42-44 that should be stopped first, such as "stop from left" (FIG. 113).

If the watermelon counter SC is greater than the cherry counter CC in step S5003, the special notification B command is set as the output target to the display control device 81 in step S5005.

When the watermelon counter SC is larger, it means that more than half of the AT counters C for 10 games stored in the lottery information storage area 106f are AT counters C corresponding to watermelon plays, and transitioning to the 4th RT state B (watermelon RT) based on the current Transition Replay 1 win makes it easier to win the AT mode transition lottery. Upon receiving the special notification B command, the display control device 81 executes processing for notifying the auxiliary display unit 65 of the operation mode corresponding to the 12th replay win in the special notification execution processing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(b), it is recommended to notify the stop switches 42-44 that should be stopped first, such as "Stop from the right" (FIG. 113).

If it is determined in step S5001 that Transition Replay 2 has been won rather than Transition Replay 1, or if it is determined in step S5002 that the Cherry Counter CC and Watermelon Counter SC are the same number, in step S5006, the Special Notification C command is set as the output target to the display control device 81.

When the display control device 81 receives the special notification C command, it executes a process for issuing a notification on the auxiliary display unit 65 in the special notification execution process, prompting the player to select whether to perform a stop operation corresponding to the 11th replay win or a stop operation corresponding to the 12th replay win. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(c), a message such as "Choose your destiny" may be displayed, and the player may be notified of the operation mode corresponding to the 11th replay win and the operation mode corresponding to the 12th replay win, and then be prompted to select which 4th RT state to transition to.

After executing the processing of either step S5004, step S5005, or step S5006, in step S5007, the push order notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the special notification processing is terminated.

In other words, the special notification when a transition replay is won notifies the player whether they should transition to 4th RT state A or 4th RT state B, which are both possible states, and this special notification can be considered one form of the status notification shown in the first embodiment above.

In this embodiment, when Transition Replay 1 or Transition Replay 2 is won, no push order notification is generated on the instruction monitor 68, and instead, as a push order notification effect, Special Notification A, Special Notification B, or Special Notification C is generated on the auxiliary display unit 65 as described above.

Next, we will explain the 4th RT transition process, which is executed when the 11th or 12th replay win is achieved, with reference to the flowchart in Figure 121. As described above, the 4th RT state transition process is performed in step S1623 of the winning result response process.

The 4th RT transition process determines the possibility of winning the AT mode transition lottery in the 4th RT state to be transitioned to based on the acquired AT counter C, and sets the start effects of the 4th RT state according to the expected value (possibility). Here, the start effects of the 4th RT state are set to 4th RT effect A, 4th RT effect B, and 4th RT effect C. Specifically, as shown in Figures 122(b1) to 122(b3), the start effects of the 4th RT state on the auxiliary display unit 65 are set to have different background colors. The 4th RT effect A in Figure 122(b1) is set to have a red background, the 4th RT effect B in Figure 122(b2) is set to have a green background, and the 4th RT effect C in Figure 122(b3) is set to have a blue background, allowing the player to distinguish between them. The order of likelihood of winning the transition to AT mode during the 4th RT state is 4th RT effect A, 4th RT effect B, and 4th RT effect C, with 4th RT effect A being set as the effect that indicates the highest probability of winning the transition to AT mode.

In the processing for transitioning to the 4th RT, first in step S5101, it is determined whether the cherry counter CC and the watermelon counter SC are the same number. If it is determined that they are not the same number, the process proceeds to step S5102. In step S5102, it is determined whether the cherry counter CC is greater than the watermelon counter SC. If the cherry counter CC is greater, the process proceeds to step S5103. In step S5103, it is determined whether an 11th replay win has been achieved. If an 11th replay win has been achieved in step S5103, this means that a transition to the 4th RT state A, which is the cherry RT, has occurred when the cherry counter CC is greater than the watermelon counter SC.

Figure 122(a) shows an example of the AT counter C stored in each memory area RE1 to RE10 of the lottery information memory area 106f when the cherry counter CC is larger than the watermelon counter SC. Specifically, the AT counter C stored in the six areas, the first memory area RE1, the second memory area RE2, the fourth memory area RE4, the sixth memory area RE6, the seventh memory area RE7, and the ninth memory area RE9, are values corresponding to a cherry replay, and the AT counter C stored in the four areas, the third memory area RE3, the fifth memory area RE5, the eighth memory area RE8, and the tenth memory area RE10, are values corresponding to a watermelon replay. In this case, in the fourth RT state, which is a fixed RT state of 10 games, if you win a Cherry Replay in any of the first, second, fourth, sixth, seventh, or ninth games, you will win the AT mode transition lottery, and if you win a Watermelon Play in any of the third, fifth, eighth, or tenth games, you will win the AT mode transition lottery. As mentioned above, there is a high probability of winning a Cherry Replay in the Cherry RT, and a high probability of winning a Watermelon Play in the Watermelon RT. In other words, in this example, there is a higher chance of winning the AT mode transition lottery if you transition to fourth RT state A, which is the Cherry RT, than if you transition to fourth RT state B, which is the Watermelon RT.

Therefore, if it is determined in step S5103 that a transition to the 4th RT state A, which is a cherry RT, has occurred when the cherry counter CC is greater than the watermelon counter SC, then in step S5104, a process is executed to set the 4th RT effect command A as the output target to the display control device 81, and then the 4th RT transition process is terminated. The 4th RT effect command A is a command that causes the display control device 81 to understand that there is a high probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery in the current 4th RT state, and is a command that causes the start effect of the current 4th RT state to be executed as the 4th RT effect A. As described above, the 4th RT effect A is a start effect that indicates there is a high probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery in the current 4th RT state.

If it is determined in step S5103 that the 11th replay win has not been achieved, it means that the 12th replay win has been achieved. This indicates that a transition to the 4th RT state B, which is the watermelon RT, has occurred. As shown in FIG. 122(a) above, if the cherry counter CC is greater than the watermelon counter SC, the possibility of winning the AT mode transition lottery is low. Therefore, in this case, in step S5105, a process is executed to set the 4th RT effect command C as the output target to the display control device 81, and then the 4th RT transition process is terminated. The 4th RT effect command C is a command that informs the display control device 81 that the possibility of winning the AT mode transition lottery in the current 4th RT state is low, and is a command that executes the start effect of the current 4th RT state as the 4th RT effect C. As described above, the 4th RT effect C is a start effect that indicates the low possibility of winning the AT mode transition lottery in the current 4th RT state.

If it is determined in step S5102 that the watermelon counter SC is greater than the cherry counter CC, this is the opposite situation to that shown in Figure 122(a), where the possibility of winning the AT mode transition increases if a transition to the fourth RT state B, which is the watermelon RT, occurs, while the possibility of winning the AT mode transition decreases if a transition to the fourth RT state A, which is the cherry RT, occurs.

In this case, step S5106 determines whether the 11th replay win has been achieved. If the 11th replay win has been achieved, that is, if a transition to the 4th RT state A, which is the Cherry RT, has occurred, step S5105 executes a process to set the 4th RT effect command C as the output target to the display control device 81, and then ends this 4th RT transition process. In this case, the 4th RT state start effect is performed with the 4th RT effect C, which indicates that there is a low possibility of winning the transition to AT mode.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5106 that a 12th replay win has been achieved rather than an 11th replay win, i.e., if a transition to the 4th RT state B, which is a watermelon RT, occurs, then in step S5104, a process is executed to set the 4th RT effect command A as the output target to the display control device 81, and then this 4th RT transition process is terminated. In this case, the 4th RT state start effect is performed with 4th RT effect A, which indicates a high possibility of a win to transition to AT mode.

If it is determined in step S5101 that the number of cherry counters CC and watermelon counters SC is the same, the process proceeds to step S5107, where a process is executed to set 4th RT effect command B as the output target to the display control device 81, and then the 4th RT transition process is terminated. 4th RT effect command B is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that there is a medium probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery in the current 4th RT state, and is a command for making the start effect of the current 4th RT state execute as 4th RT effect B. As described above, 4th RT effect B is a start effect that indicates that there is a medium probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery in the current 4th RT state.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a game state transition becomes possible, an AT mode transition lottery is held during that game state, and the details of that AT mode transition lottery are identified before the transition, and a special notification corresponding to the details of that transition lottery is issued. In this way, it is possible to transition the game state after determining the likelihood of winning the AT mode transition during that game state before the transition.

In particular, when Transition Replay 1 is won, whether a transition to 4th RT state A or 4th RT state B should occur is determined using the pre-acquired AT Counter C, and this information is displayed as a special notification. This allows the player to select which 4th RT state to transition to using the special notification. This makes it possible to realize new gameplay features, in which the player can select the game state to transition to in relation to the pre-acquired AT Counter C.

In this case, when Transition Replay 2 is won, Special Notification C is executed without specifying which 4th RT state should be transitioned to from the AT Counter C, which increases the number of situations where the player can select the game state to transition to, thereby improving gameplay.

In this embodiment, rather than using individual displays (special images as pending displays) corresponding to each AT counter C as in the first to third embodiments, notifications regarding the AT mode transition lottery for the AT counters C stored in the lottery information storage area 106f are sent all at once. This makes it possible to equalize expectations for the AT mode transition lottery in the games corresponding to each AT counter C, thereby evenly increasing the level of attention paid to each game.

After a special notification is issued when Transition Replay 1 or Transition Replay 2 is won, if a transition to the 4th RT state actually occurs, the expected probability of winning the AT mode transition in the 4th RT state is announced as a 4th RT state presentation. In this case, the Cherry Counter CC and Watermelon Counter SC are used to predict the expected value of winning the AT mode transition, and the 4th RT state presentation is based on that prediction. In 4th RT state A, a Cherry Replay is most likely to trigger a winning AT mode transition, while in 4th RT state B, a Watermelon Replay is most likely to trigger a winning AT mode transition. The Cherry Counter CC and Watermelon Counter SC represent the number of winning AT mode transitions, assuming that the AT mode transition lottery is conducted using the game results that are most likely to trigger a winning AT mode transition if a transition to the 4th RT state occurs. The Cherry Counter CC and Watermelon Counter SC are then used to announce the expected value of winning the AT mode transition lottery when the 4th RT state is presented. By doing this, it is possible to accurately predict the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery in the fourth RT state to which the transition will occur, based on the AT counter C that has been obtained in advance.

In other words, in a configuration in which the AT mode transition lottery is conducted using the AT counter C obtained in advance and the lottery results of the game when the AT mode transition lottery is held, the element of the game lottery results that occur ex post is included, making it difficult to predict 100% whether the AT mode transition lottery will be successful when held using only the AT counter C obtained in advance. Therefore, in the above fourth embodiment, the lottery results that are likely to be successful in each game in the gaming state to be transitioned are identified, and the result of the AT mode transition lottery is predicted assuming that the AT mode transition lottery is held using those lottery results that are likely to be successful. By doing this, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the prediction to a certain extent, even for predictions that include elements that occur ex post, and the reliability of notifications (special notifications) based on that prediction can be improved.

In this case, the lottery results for games in 4th RT state A and 4th RT state B are those with a higher probability of winning the AT, such as a strong cherry or middle bell, than a cherry replay or watermelon play. However, when considering the winning probability of each game, a cherry replay or watermelon play is more likely to trigger a win to transition to AT mode than a strong cherry or middle bell. Therefore, by configuring the system to use such cherry replays and watermelon plays to predict the AT mode transition lottery, the prediction can be more likely to match the actual possible results.

<Modification 1>
In this modified example, a predetermined calculation process is performed using the values of the AT counter C stored in each of the storage areas RE1 to RE10 of the lottery information storage area 106f, and then a special notification is made based on the calculation results.

Figure 123 is a flowchart showing the special notification processing in this modified example.

In step S5201, it is determined whether the currently winning transition replay is transition replay 1. If it is transition replay 1, the process proceeds to step S5202, where an accumulation process is performed on the AT counter C values stored in each of the storage areas RE1 to RE10 of the lottery information storage area 106f. In other words, a process is executed to calculate the total value of each AT counter C as a predetermined calculation process using the AT counter C values stored in each of the storage areas RE1 to RE10.

In the following step S5203, it is determined whether the calculation result of step S5202 is less than 650. 650 is a value equivalent to 10 games of "65," which is the boundary between the value that results in a win for transition to AT mode in a Cherry Replay and the value that results in a win for transition to AT mode in a Sugar Replay. In other words, the higher the AT counter C value that results in a win for transition to AT mode in a Cherry Replay, the less likely the total value of the AT counter C will be below 650. Therefore, if it is determined in step S5203 that the result is less than 650, processing is executed in step S5204 to set the special notification A command as an output target to the display control device 81. As already explained, the special notification A command is a command for notifying the operation mode corresponding to the 11th replay win, which will transition to the 4th RT state A, which is the Cherry RT.

If step S5203 determines that the value is 650 or higher, it means that there are likely to be many AT counter C values that will result in a win to transition to AT mode during watermelon play. In this case, step S5205 executes a process to set the special notification B command as an output target to the display control device 81. As already explained, the special notification B command is a command for notifying the operation mode corresponding to the 12th replay win, which will transition to the 4th RT state B, which is watermelon RT.

If it is determined in step S5201 that the replay is transition replay 2, the process proceeds to step S5206, where a process is executed to set the special notification C command as the target for output to the display control device 81. As already explained, the special notification C command is a command used to notify the player to select whether to transition to the fourth RT state A or the fourth RT state B.

After executing the processing of steps S5204, S5205, and S5206, in step S5207, the push order notification command is set as the output target to the display control device 81, and then the special notification processing is terminated.

The processing for transitioning to the fourth RT in this modified example will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 124.

In step S5301, the values of the AT counter C stored in each of the storage areas RE1 to RE10 of the lottery information storage area 106f are accumulated. The processing in step S5301 is the same as the processing in step S5202 described above.

In the following step S5302, it is determined whether the processing result of step S5301 is greater than 500 and less than 800. If a negative determination is made in step S5302, it is determined in step S5303 whether the processing result of step S5301 is 500 or less. If it is 500 or less, it means that most of the AT counters C stored in each memory area RE1 to RE10 are likely to be on the small side. In this case, in step S5304, it is determined whether an 11th replay win has been achieved and a transition to Cherry RT will occur. If a transition to Cherry RT will occur, in step S5305, a process is executed to set the 4th RT effect command A as the output target to the display control device 81 in order to perform 4th RT effect A as the start effect of this 4th RT state, and then this 4th RT transition process is terminated.

If a 12th replay win is achieved instead of an 11th replay win in step S5304, resulting in a transition to Watermelon RT, in step S5306, a process is executed to set the 4th RT effect command C as the output target to the display control device 81 in order to perform the 4th RT effect C as the start effect of this 4th RT state, and then this 4th RT transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S5303 that the total value of the AT counter C is not less than 500, this means that the total value of the AT counter C is greater than or equal to 800. In this case, it is highly likely that most of the AT counter C values stored in each memory area RE1 to RE10 are on the larger side. Therefore, if a negative determination is made in step S5303, it is determined in step S5307 whether an 11th replay win has been achieved. If an 11th replay win has been achieved, then in step S5306, a process is executed to set the 4th RT effect command C as the output target to the display control device 81, and then the 4th RT transition process is terminated. If a 12th replay win has been achieved, then in step S5305, a process is executed to set the 4th RT effect command A as the output target to the display control device 81, and then the 4th RT transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S5302 that the total value of the AT counter C is greater than 500 and less than 800, in step S5308, a process is executed to set the 4th RT effect command B as the output target to the display control device 81, and then the 4th RT transition process is terminated.

As described above, the smaller the AT Counter C value, the more likely it is that an AT mode transition will occur when a Cherry Replay is won, and the larger the AT Counter C value, the more likely it is that an AT mode transition will occur when a Sugar Candy Replay is won. Utilizing this configuration, the likelihood of an AT mode transition winning is predicted based on the accumulated value of the AT Counter C obtained in advance. In other words, the smaller the accumulated value of the AT Counter C, the more likely it is that more AT Counter C corresponding to a Cherry Replay has been acquired, and the larger the accumulated value of the AT Counter C, the more likely it is that more AT Counter C corresponding to a Cherry Replay has been acquired. Therefore, by utilizing this tendency to predict the likelihood of a transition winning, and taking advantage of the AT mode transition lottery, which is difficult to predict 100% in advance, and providing a somewhat approximate prediction notification, it becomes possible to collectively predict the likelihood of an AT mode transition winning for multiple AT Counter Cs stored in the lottery information storage area 106f when each of these AT Counter Cs is subjected to the AT mode transition lottery.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, the accumulated value of the AT counter C stored in each memory area RE1 to RE10 of the lottery information memory area 106f is calculated before transition to the fourth RT state becomes possible, and an announcement based on the calculation result is made before a transition replay is won that may result in transition to the fourth RT state.

Figure 125 is a flowchart showing the random number acquisition process in this modified example.

In step S5401, AT counter C acquisition processing is performed, and in step S5402, AT counter C storage processing is performed. In the following step S5403, an accumulation processing is performed on the AT counter C values stored in each of storage areas RE1 to RE10 of the lottery information storage area 106f. The processing in step S5403 is the same as the processing in step S5202 and step S5301 above.

After executing the processing of step S5403, in step S5404, an integrated value command including information on the processing result of step S5403 is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this random number acquisition processing is terminated.

Figure 126 is a flowchart showing the integrated value information processing in this modified example. The integrated value information processing is initiated by the display control device 81, for example, during other processing (step S2917) of the full stop effect setting processing.

In step S5501, it is determined whether the above-mentioned accumulated value command has been received. If an accumulated value command has not been received, the accumulated value information processing is terminated. If an accumulated value command has been received, the processing proceeds to step S5502. In step S5502, it is determined whether the accumulated value included in the accumulated value command is greater than 500 and less than 800. If a negative determination is made in step S5502, it is determined in step S5503 whether the accumulated value is 500 or less. If the accumulated value is 500 or less, as described above, it is highly likely that most of the AT counter C values are on the small side. In this case, in step S5504, processing is executed to display state A on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., and then the accumulated value information processing is terminated.

The State A effect is an effect that suggests that when comparing a cherry and a watermelon (cherry replay and watermelon replay), winning a cherry is more likely to result in a win to transition to AT mode. For example, as shown in Figure 127(b), a display effect can be displayed showing a cherry character and a watermelon character being compared in weight on a scale, and an effect can be displayed indicating that the cherry character is heavier in the weight comparison (the scale tilts toward the cherry).

If it is determined in step S5503 that the accumulated value is not 500 or less, this means that the accumulated value of the AT counter C is 800 or more. In this case, as described above, it is highly likely that most of the AT counter C values are on the larger side. Therefore, in step S5505, processing is executed to display state C on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., and then this accumulated value information processing is terminated.

The state C effect is an effect that suggests that when comparing cherry and watermelon (cherry replay and watermelon replay), winning the watermelon is more likely to result in a win to transition to AT mode. For example, as shown in Figure 127(c), a display effect can be displayed showing a cherry character and a watermelon character being compared in weight on a scale, and an effect can be displayed indicating that the watermelon character is heavier in the weight comparison (by tilting toward the watermelon).

If it is determined in step S5502 that the accumulated value of AT counter C is greater than 500 and less than 800, in step S5506, processing is executed to display state B on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., and then this accumulated value information processing is terminated.

State B is a presentation that suggests that, when comparing a cherry and a watermelon (cherry replay and watermelon replay), there is no or only a small difference in the likelihood of winning and transitioning to AT mode between winning a cherry and winning a watermelon. For example, as shown in Figure 127(a), a display presentation can be presented that shows a cherry character and a watermelon character being compared in weight on a scale, and an presentation can be presented that shows that the weights of the cherry character and the watermelon character are balanced in this weight comparison.

By doing this, it is possible to let players know in advance which 4th RT state transition is expected to occur before winning Transition Replay 1 or Transition Replay 2. This makes it possible to build anticipation for winning the lottery result (11th replay or 12th replay) that will trigger the transition to the 4th RT state that should be transitioned to.

In this case, the fourth embodiment was explained under the assumption that when Transition Replay 1 is won, either the 11th replay win or the 12th replay win is possible, and when Transition Replay 2 is won, either the 11th replay win or the 12th replay win is possible. However, when an announcement is made as to which of the fourteenth RT states a transition should occur, as in the above modified example, separate lottery results may be set to trigger a transition to each of the fourteenth RT states. Specifically, for example, when Transition Replay 1 is won, an 11th replay win is made, resulting in a transition to fourteenth RT state A, and when Transition Replay 2 is won, a 12th replay win is made, resulting in a transition to fourteenth RT state B.

Furthermore, as explained in the first embodiment, etc., in the first BB state, it is easier to win strong cherries, etc., and in the second BB state, it is easier to win strong watermelons, etc. By utilizing this configuration, the above state presentation may be configured to encourage the player as to which BB win is best.

<Modification 3>
In the fourth embodiment, the value of the AT counter C that results in the AT mode transition winning in the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B for each specific role, including cherry replay and watermelon replay, was set as a common value, but in this modified example, the value of the AT counter C that results in the AT mode transition winning is different between the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B. Figure 128 shows the AT mode transition lottery table in this modified example.

In this modified example, with regard to Cherry Replay and Suikari Play, the AT Counter C that results in an AT mode transition win is not associated with them in any state other than 4th RT State A and 4th RT State B. In 4th RT State A, the AT Counter C that results in an AT mode transition win during Cherry Replay is associated with "1" to "128", and regardless of which AT Counter C value is obtained, if Cherry Replay is won in 4th RT State A, an AT mode transition win is assumed. Also, in 4th RT State A, the AT Counter C that results in an AT mode transition win during Suikari Play is associated with "116" to "128", and if Suikari Play is won when these AT Counter C values are obtained, an AT mode transition win is assumed.

In the fourth RT state B, the AT counter C that wins the AT mode transition when a cherry replay occurs is associated with values from "1" to "13," and if a cherry replay is won when these AT counter C values are obtained, the AT mode transition is won. Also, in the fourth RT state B, the AT counter C that wins the AT mode transition when a watermelon play occurs is associated with values from "1" to "128," and regardless of which AT counter C value is obtained, if a watermelon play is won in the fourth RT state B, the AT mode transition is won.

In other words, in the fourth RT state A, if a Cherry Replay is won, there is a 100% chance of winning the AT mode transition, but if a Suika Play is won, there is approximately a 10% chance of winning the AT mode transition, and the AT mode transition lottery table is set so that in the fourth RT state A, winning a Cherry Replay is more advantageous to the player than winning a Suika Play.

In contrast, in the fourth RT state B, if you win a Suika Play, there is a 100% chance of winning the AT mode transition, but if you win a Cherry Replay, there is approximately a 10% chance of winning the AT mode transition. In the fourth RT state B, the AT mode transition lottery table is set so that winning a Suika Play is more advantageous for the player than winning a Cherry Replay.

As described above, in this modified example, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery varies depending on the RT state to which the transition occurs, even if the same lottery results are used. By utilizing this configuration, the degree of freedom in setting the state, the lottery results for each game, and the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is greatly increased, in order to vary the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery depending on the gaming state.

Figure 129 shows the difference in the probability of winning a specific role depending on the game state in this modified example.

In this modified example, the probability of winning a Cherry Replay and the probability of winning a Watermelon Play are the same for 4th RT state A and 4th RT state B. In other words, regardless of the 4th RT state, the chances of an AT mode transition lottery being held for a Cherry Replay are the same, and the chances of an AT mode transition lottery being held for a Watermelon Play are the same. By doing this, for example, if a presentation mode is used that makes it difficult to determine which 4th RT state the player has transitioned to or which 4th RT state they are currently in, it is possible to reduce the likelihood of determining the type of 4th RT state from the appearance rate of Cherry Replays and Watermelon Plays.

In addition, the probability of winning the AT mode transition during a Cherry Replay and a Suika Play is different between 4th RT State A and 4th RT State B. This allows players to predict the game state and look forward to winning the AT mode transition when a Cherry Replay or Suika Play is won, doubling the fun of the game.

Fifth Embodiment
In this embodiment, a determination is made in advance as to whether the random number for the AT mode transition lottery obtained in advance is a random number that is likely to result in an AT mode transition winning when it becomes the subject of the AT mode transition lottery. Figure 130 shows an AT mode transition lottery table in this modified example.

In this modified example, the AT Counter C value associated with each specific role to win the AT mode transition is set to include values within a predetermined range of the AT Counter C update range. More specifically, AT Counter C "3" is associated with normal replays, AT Counter C "5" is associated with push order replays, and AT Counter C "7" is associated with push order bells. Furthermore, AT Counter C values "1" to "64" are associated with strong cherries, AT Counter C values "1" to "18" are associated with weak cherries, AT Counter C values "1" to "34" are associated with strong watermelons, and AT Counter C values "1" to "13" are associated with weak watermelons. Furthermore, AT Counter C values "1" to "41" are associated with Chance A and Chance B, and AT Counter C values "1" to "99" are associated with the middle bell.

In this case, if the value obtained as AT Counter C is between "1" and "13," the AT mode transition lottery will be won regardless of whether it is triggered by a strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, Chance A, Chance B, or middle bell. If the value obtained as AT Counter C is between "3" and "13," the AT mode transition will be won even if triggered by a normal replay; if the value obtained is between "5" and "13," the AT mode transition will be won even if triggered by a push order replay; and if the value obtained is between "7" and "13," the AT mode transition will be won even if triggered by a push order bell.

In other words, when an AT mode transition lottery is held using AT Counter C values between "1" and "13," the AT mode transition is likely to be won regardless of which of the specific combinations that can be won during normal play triggers the transition lottery. In this embodiment, a situation in which an AT Counter C value that is likely to result in an AT mode transition win, as described above, is obtained is considered a specific situation, and a specific notification is issued in such a specific situation.

Figure 131 is a flowchart showing the random number acquisition process in this embodiment.

In step S5601, a process for acquiring AT counter C is executed, and in step S5602, a process for storing AT counter C is executed. In the following step S5603, it is determined whether the AT counter C acquired in step S5601 is a value included in the specific range of "1" to "13" described above, which is a value that is likely to result in an AT mode transition winning if it is subject to an AT mode transition lottery. If the value is included in the specific range, in step S5604 a specific range command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this random number acquisition process is terminated. The specific range command is a command that notifies the display control device 81 that an AT counter C with a value included in the specific range has been acquired in advance.

Figure 132 is a flowchart showing the CZ mode processing in this embodiment. The CZ mode processing is initiated, for example, by other processing in the all-stop effect setting processing in the display control device 81.

In step S5701, it is determined whether or not the system is in a favorable zone. If the system is not in a favorable zone, the system proceeds to step S5702, where it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned specific zone command has been received. Since the specific zone command is output during the random number acquisition process at the time of the third stop OFF operation, if a specific zone command has been received, it means that an AT counter C included in the specific zone has been acquired at the time of the current third stop OFF operation, and if a specific zone command has not been received, it means that an AT counter C not included in the specific zone has been acquired at the time of the current third stop OFF operation. If an AT counter C included in the specific zone has been acquired, step S5703 executes a process to increment the specific counter TC provided in the various counter area 183b by 1.

If it is determined in step S5702 that a specific area command has not been received, or after the specific counter TC increment process is executed in step S5703, the process proceeds to step S5704. In step S5704, the value of the AT counter C used in the currently ending game is determined, and it is determined whether that AT counter C is a value included in the specific area. If the AT counter C is a value included in the specific area, the process executes a process to decrement the specific counter TC by 1 in step S5705.

If it is determined in step S5704 that the AT Counter C does not have a value included in the specific area, or after the specific counter TC decrement process is performed in step S5705, the process proceeds to step S5706. In step S5706, it is determined whether the specific counter TC is equal to or greater than the predetermined value of 5. A specific counter TC of 5 or greater refers to a configuration capable of storing 10 AT Counters C, where more than half of the AT Counters C have values included in the specific area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 133(a), in a situation where AT Counters C with values included in the specific area are stored in each of the memory areas RE1 to RE10 of the lottery information memory area 106f, for example, the second memory area RE2, the fifth memory area RE5, the sixth memory area RE6, and the ninth memory area RE9, an AT Counter C with a value included in the specific area is stored in the tenth memory area RE10 in this acquisition process, causing the specific counter TC to become 5. In this case, in the next game, the AT counter C values stored in at least the first memory area RE1, fourth memory area RE4, fifth memory area RE5, eighth memory area RE8, and ninth memory area RE9 are included in the specific area, so the specific counter TC in the next game will also be 5 or greater. In the next game, if the AT counter C values stored in the third memory area RE3, fourth memory area RE4, seventh memory area RE7, and eighth memory area RE8 are included in the specific area, and the AT counter C values stored in the replenished ninth memory area RE9 and tenth memory area RE10 are not included in the specific area, the specific counter TC will be less than 5.

If the specific counter TC is 5 or greater in step S5706, then in step S5707, it is determined whether or not a CZ mode flag has been set in the various flag storage area 183a. The CZ mode flag is a flag that allows the CPU 181 to determine that a situation exists in which a CZ mode effect should be performed as a chance zone where it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery.

If the CZ mode flag is not set, processing is executed in step S5708 to set the CZ mode flag. Then, processing is executed in step S5709 to cause the CZ mode effect to be executed on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. As an example of the CZ mode effect, as shown in FIG. 133(b), it is recommended to display something like "AT winning probability increasing!!" at the top or bottom of the screen of the auxiliary display unit 65.

In the following step S5710, a process is executed to input 10 into the CZ counter ZC provided in the various counter area 183b. The CZ counter ZC is a counter that determines the minimum number of games that can be continued in the CZ mode as a chance zone. More specifically, in this embodiment, the CZ mode is started when the specific counter TC reaches 5 or more, and ends when the specific counter TC falls below 5 and remains below 5 for 10 games.

After executing the processing of step S5710, this CZ mode processing ends. Also, if the CZ mode flag is set in step S5707, the CZ mode processing ends immediately. In this case, the above CZ mode effects will continue.

If it is determined in step S5706 that the specific counter TC is less than 5, the process proceeds to step S5711. In step S5711, it is determined whether the CZ mode flag is set. If it is set, this means that the specific counter TC has become less than 5 during CZ mode. In this case, in step S5712, the CZ counter ZC is decremented by 1. Then, in step S5713, it is determined whether the CZ counter ZC is 0. If it is 0, the CZ mode flag is cleared in step S5714. Then, in step S5715, processing is performed to end the CZ mode effect, and the CZ mode processing is terminated. If the CZ mode flag is not set in step S5711, or if the CZ counter ZC has not yet reached 0 even during CZ mode in step S5713, the CZ mode processing is terminated.

If step S5701 determines that the game is in a favorable zone, step S5716 executes a process to clear the value of the specific counter TC to its initial value (0), and then terminates the CZ mode process. Note that if the value of the specific counter TC is already at its initial value, that state is maintained.

As described above, the CZ mode presentation is performed using the AT counter C obtained in advance, which provides a completely different gameplay experience from the conventional configuration in which the player transitions to a chance zone where it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery based on the lottery results of each game.

In other words, as already explained, the AT counter C is acquired in the random number acquisition process regardless of the lottery results of each game. Furthermore, the lottery results of the game performing the CZ mode processing are not taken into consideration when performing the CZ mode effects. In other words, the CZ mode effects are set using only the AT counter C. Therefore, for example, a CZ mode effect may occur even when the lottery result of a game is such that a win to transition to AT mode is unlikely (e.g., a normal replay). Conversely, a CZ mode effect may not occur even when the lottery result of a game is such that a win to transition to AT mode is likely (e.g., a strong cherry). This results in a CZ mode effect that is completely different from conventional chance zones, which can maintain a sense of anticipation in each game and increase the element of surprise when a CZ mode effect is performed.

When setting the CZ mode effect, a specific range is set as the range of AT counter C values that are likely to result in a win for AT mode transition, and the CZ mode effect is set based on the number of AT counters that fall within that specific range. By doing this, it is possible to create a CZ mode effect as a result of predicting with a certain degree of accuracy the likelihood of winning the AT mode transition, thereby increasing the effectiveness of the CZ mode effect.

By allowing the CZ mode presentation to continue for a number of games equal to or greater than the number of AT counters C that can be stored in the lottery information storage area 106f, it becomes difficult to tell which AT counter C is likely to be used in the AT mode transition lottery, and it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the AT mode transition lottery using any of the AT counters C stored in the lottery information storage area 106f.

It is now possible to perform the CZ mode effect before transitioning to the advantageous zone. This makes it possible to anticipate a transition to AT mode even before transitioning to the advantageous zone. Although the CZ mode effect is performed based on the AT counter C, the AT mode transition lottery itself is performed after transitioning to the advantageous zone. In other words, even if the CZ mode effect is performed, the AT mode transition lottery may not be held. In other words, the CZ mode effect in this embodiment occurs regardless of whether the AT mode transition lottery is actually held. This makes it possible to generate CZ mode effects from a completely different perspective than conventional gaming machines, which do not transition to chance mode unless a transition to an advantageous zone occurs, making it possible to increase the occurrence rate of CZ mode effects and improve normal gameplay.

<Other embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. The following configurations may be applied individually to the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be applied in combination with some or all of them to the above-described embodiments and modifications. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in the above-described embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be achieved) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. The following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration formed by combining the embodiments and modifications, or may be applied in combination with some or all of them.

(1) In a configuration in which a random number for the lottery is obtained in advance and a lottery is conducted using that random number and the lottery results for each game, the AT counter C used in the AT mode transition lottery has been described as an example of the random number for the lottery, but the above inventions may also be applied to random numbers used in other lotteries. For example, they may be applied to a configuration in which a lottery counter used in the advantageous zone transition lottery is obtained in advance, or a lottery counter used in the VB mode transition lottery is obtained in advance, or a lottery counter used in the specialized zone transition lottery is obtained in advance, or a lottery counter used in the additional lottery or additional game number lottery is obtained in advance, or a lottery counter used in the lottery for a predetermined effect (e.g., a setting value suggestion effect, a win content confirmation effect, etc.) is obtained in advance.

In other words, the specific event whose occurrence is determined by lottery based on specific information (random numbers) obtained in advance is not limited to a transition to AT mode, but may also be a transition to an advantageous zone, a transition to VB mode, a transition to a specialized zone, an addition of the number of games, an addition of a predetermined number of games (whether the number of added games is large or small), or the occurrence of a predetermined effect.

(2) As examples of game state transitions, states in which the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is high (first BB state, second BB state, fourth RT state) have been described, but this may also apply to states in which the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is low. Note that the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery may be determined by the probability of winning a specific role that triggers the AT mode transition lottery, or by the number of values of the AT counter C or the like associated with the specific role, or both.

(3) The AT mode transition lottery is based on the AT counter C, etc., the lottery results of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed, and the game state in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed. However, other parameters may also be used, as long as they use at least a random number (AT counter C) obtained in advance and the lottery results of that game. Other parameters may include, for example, the number of games played, the number of wins or prizes for a specified game result (e.g., a bell), the lottery results of games prior to the game in question (game history), etc.

(4) While the AT counter C, etc., used as a random number for the AT mode transition lottery is configured to be acquired when the third stop OFF operation is performed among the operations of the stop switches 42-44, it may also be configured to be acquired at other times. For example, it may be acquired when the first stop OFF operation, the second stop OFF operation, or the first to third stop ON operations. It may also be configured to be acquired based on the operation of the start lever 41, or based on the operation of the credit insertion switches 56-58. These operations may be valid operations that cause the game to progress based on the operation, or may be acquired based on invalid operations, such as during a period when the operation is invalid. Furthermore, it is not limited to being acquired immediately based on the operation, but may be acquired after a predetermined period of time based on the operation. It may also be acquired based on a combination of operations, such as acquiring when the center stop switch 43 is operated after the left stop switch 42 is operated, but not acquiring when the right stop switch 44 is operated after the left stop switch 42 is operated.

(5) While the configuration is such that one AT counter C, etc. is acquired as a random number for use in the AT mode transition lottery based on a single third stop OFF operation, the relationship between the operation and the number acquired does not have to be one-to-one, and may be one-to-multiple, multiple-to-one, or multiple-to-multiple. More specifically, the configuration may be such that multiple AT counters C, etc. are acquired based on a single operation, or one AT counter C, etc. is acquired based on multiple operations, or multiple AT counters C, etc. are acquired based on multiple operations. In the case of a one-to-multiple relationship, for example, two AT counters C, etc. are acquired upon the third stop OFF operation of a specified game, no AT counters C, etc. are acquired upon the third stop OFF operation of the game following the specified game, and two AT counters C, etc. are acquired upon the third stop OFF operation of the game following the specified game. In this way, the acquisition timing can be adjusted so that the number of AT counters C, etc. is always a constant number based on the relationship between the consumption frequency and acquisition frequency of AT counters C, etc. Furthermore, in a multiple-to-one relationship, it is advisable to adjust the number of AT counters C, etc. so that it is always a constant number, for example, by obtaining one AT counter C, etc. based on multiple operations such as the second stop OFF operation and the third stop OFF operation.

(6) The AT mode transition lottery is configured to be performed based on the operation of the start lever 41, but it can be performed at any time when the lottery result for at least the current game can be ascertained and the AT counter C, etc. has been acquired in advance. For example, the AT mode transition lottery may be performed based on the operation of the stop switches 42-44 (first to third stop ON operations, first to third stop OFF operations). Incidentally, in a configuration in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed upon the third stop OFF operation, both the acquisition of the AT counter C, etc. and the AT mode transition lottery are performed based on the third stop OFF operation, but the acquired AT counter C, etc. are AT counter C, etc. for use in the subsequent game, and the AT counter C, etc. used in the AT mode transition lottery are those acquired upon the third stop OFF operation in the game prior to the third stop OFF operation.

(7) The random number acquisition process may be configured to be performed before the lottery process (Figure 16). For example, the random number acquisition process may be configured to be started between step S210 and step S211 (lottery process) in the normal process (Figure 15). This makes it clearer that the AT counter C, etc. is acquired independently and without being affected by the game lottery results.

(8) When an AT Counter C or the like is acquired in the random number acquisition process, the AT Counter C or the like is acquired independently of the lottery results of the game at the time of acquisition and is not influenced by the lottery results of the game at the time of acquisition. However, the AT Counter C or the like acquired may be configured to differ based on the lottery results of the game. For example, if the lottery result of the game is a first result such as a strong cherry, an AT Counter C with a value of 1 within the first numerical range of "1" to "64" is acquired, and if the lottery result of the game is a second result such as a strong watermelon, an AT Counter C with a value of 1 within the second numerical range of "65" to "128" is acquired. In this way, the number acquired may be determined by the lottery results of the game.

(9) Although the winning modes for the first BB and the second BB are set to be those in which a miss may occur depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44, it is also possible to set a winning mode in which a win is achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. In this case, for example, the first BB may be set to be a winning mode in which a miss may occur, and the second BB may be set to be a winning mode in which a miss may not occur, so that the presence or absence of a miss may differ depending on the type of BB.

(10) For the 11th replay and 12th replay, which result in winning in the 4th RT state A or 4th RT state B, a winning mode has been set in which a winning is achieved as long as the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is correct, regardless of the operation timing. However, a winning mode may also be set in which a winning miss may occur depending on the operation timing. In this case, it is preferable to configure the system so that one of the replay winning modes is achieved, such as achieving the 1st replay winning mode if the 11th replay winning mode is not achieved.

(11) For the 11th and 12th replays that result in a win in the 4th RT state A or 4th RT state B, the winning flag may be carried over until a win occurs, as in the 1st BB and 2nd BB.

(12) While the termination condition for the first BB state and the second BB state is the occurrence of the payout of the maximum payout number of medals, other termination conditions may be specified. For example, the state may end after a predetermined number of games have been played, or after a predetermined number of winnings (with a predetermined result) have been achieved, or when the medal increase (decrease) - the difference between the number of medals paid out and the number of medals used - reaches a predetermined number, or when a predetermined end result (a so-called "breakout" combination) is achieved or a winning result with a predetermined result is achieved. In these cases, the first BB state and the second BB state may have different termination conditions, and the termination conditions may include ending after a number of games greater than the number (10) of the AT counter C, etc. stored in the lottery information storage area 106f, and ending after a number of games less than the number (10).

(13) As lottery results that can be won in a normal game, normal replays, push order replays, push order bells, etc. are provided, and these lottery results are not wins in a BB game, but they may also be wins during BB. In this case, the winning probability during BB may be set to be lower than the winning probability during normal play, or the number of AT counters C, etc. that result in an AT mode transition win during BB may be set to be lower than the number of AT counters C, etc. that result in an AT mode transition win during BB based on these lottery results during normal play. This makes it less likely that these lottery results will trigger an AT mode transition win during BB than during normal play. Furthermore, as lottery results that can be won in a BB game, the first role during BB, the second role during BB, and the third role during BB are provided, and although these lottery results are not wins in a normal game, they may also be wins during normal play. In this case, by setting the winning probability during normal times to be lower than the winning probability during BB, or by setting fewer AT counters C, etc. that will result in an AT mode transition winning in these lottery results during normal times than AT counters C, etc. that will result in an AT mode transition winning in these lottery results during BB, it becomes more difficult to win an AT mode transition triggered by these lottery results during normal times than during BB.

(14) Regarding the status display, if a status display for another special image is already being displayed, the start of the status display for the current special image is restricted. However, the status display that is already being displayed may be terminated before the status display for the current special image is started. Alternatively, the priority between the status display that is already being displayed and the current status display (whether to start the current status display) may be determined by lottery or the like. The priority of the status display may differ depending on the content of the target special image or status display.

(15) In a configuration in which a special image is used to display a pending display, the presentation may be different when an AT mode transition lottery is held based on the lottery result that is the subject of the pending display (when the AT mode transition lottery is won) and when an AT mode transition lottery is held based on a lottery result that is different from the lottery result that is the subject of the pending display (when the AT mode transition lottery is won). Furthermore, the presentation may be different when an AT mode transition lottery is held based on the lottery result that is the subject of the pending display (when the AT mode transition lottery is won) and when an AT mode transition lottery is held based on the lottery result when no pending display is held (when the AT mode transition lottery is won). For example, when an AT mode transition lottery is held with a strong cherry or weak cherry in a game that is the subject of the first special image P1 corresponding to a cherry, the presentation used to notify the game in which the AT mode transition lottery was held or the result of the transition lottery on the auxiliary display unit 65 may be different from when an AT mode transition lottery is held with a strong watermelon in a game that is the subject of the first special image P1.

(16) In a configuration in which a normal AT counter CA and a BB AT counter CB can be obtained, we have explained a configuration in which the AT counters CA and CB are consumed regardless of the state, such as in normal times the normal AT counter CA is used to draw the AT mode transition lottery and only consuming the BB AT counter CB, and in BB times the BB AT counter CB is used to draw the AT mode transition lottery and only consuming the normal AT counter CA, and a configuration in which the AT counters CA and CB consumed differ depending on the state, such as in normal times the normal AT counter CA is used to draw the AT mode transition lottery and not consuming (retaining) the BB AT counter CB, and in BB times the BB AT counter CB is used to draw the AT mode transition lottery and not consuming (retaining) the normal AT counter CA. However, a configuration in which the player can choose whether or not to consume them may also be used. In other words, for example, the configuration may be such that, after a lottery to transition to AT mode is conducted using the normal AT counter CA during normal play, the player can select whether or not to consume the BB AT counter CB by operating a specific operating unit (for example, one of the credit insertion switches 56-58).

(17) The update ranges of the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB may be different. Specifically, for example, the normal AT counter CA may be updated within the range of "1" to "128," while the BB AT counter CB may be updated within the range of "1" to "64." The update range may be set according to the probability of winning the AT mode transition. More specifically, the update range determines the minimum probability of winning the AT mode transition (with an update range of 1 to 128, the minimum probability is 1 in 128). If the minimum probability of winning the AT mode transition is desired to be lowered, the update range can be widened. However, a wider update range increases the number of random numbers that result in an AT mode transition win for the same winning probability, which may result in a more complex configuration and cumbersome processing. Therefore, by allowing the update ranges of the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB to be different as described above, it becomes possible to customize each counter for the game state in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed.

(18) If the game lottery result is a predetermined result, for example, a strong watermelon, then if the value of the normal AT counter CA is a predetermined value (65), the AT mode transition lottery will be won, but if the value of the BB AT counter CB corresponding to the predetermined value of the normal AT counter CA is (65), the AT mode transition lottery will not be won.However, in a configuration in which the update ranges of the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB are different, as in (15) above, it is preferable to configure the results of whether or not the AT mode transition lottery will be won when the AT mode transition lottery is held using values converted assuming the update ranges to be the same. More specifically, for example, in a configuration where the update range of the normal AT counter CA is "1" to "128" and the update range of the BB AT counter CB is "1" to "256," if the target is a strong watermelon where a normal AT counter CA of "65" results in an AT mode transition win, then the BB AT counter CB should be set to "130" and "131" so that an AT mode transition win does not occur in the case of a strong watermelon, and if the update range of the BB AT counter CB is "1" to "64," then the corresponding BB AT counter CB should be set to "32" or "33" so that an AT mode transition win does not occur in the case of a strong watermelon.

(19) The normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB may be configured to have different upper limit storage numbers. Specifically, the normal AT counter CA may be configured to be able to store a larger number of values than the BB AT counter CB, or the BB AT counter CB may be configured to be able to store a larger number of values than the normal AT counter CA. In these cases, although the upper limit storage numbers are different, the actual number of values stored may be the same.

(20) Although the configuration is such that a hold display corresponding to the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB are displayed separately, it is also possible to configure the configuration so that only the hold display corresponding to the normal AT counter CA is displayed during normal times, and only the hold display corresponding to the BB AT counter CB is displayed during BB times, or to configure the configuration so that only the hold display corresponding to the BB AT counter CB is displayed during normal times, and only the hold display corresponding to the normal AT counter CA is displayed during BB times. Furthermore, it is also possible to configure the configuration so that it is difficult or impossible to distinguish whether the displayed hold display corresponds to the normal AT counter CA or the BB AT counter CB.

(21) While the values for the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB that result in an AT mode transition win during normal play and BB play are different, the above configuration may also be applied to a form in which a common AT counter C is used during normal play and BB play. That is, for example, in an AT mode transition lottery based on a predetermined specific combination, the values of the AT counter C that result in an AT mode transition win during normal play and BB play may be different.

(22) We have explained a configuration in which the game transitions to the normal game state after the end of either the first BB state or the second BB state, and a configuration in which the game transitions to the normal game state after the end of the first BB state and transitions to the fourth RT state after the end of the second BB state. However, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the game transitions to the fourth RT state after the end of either the first BB state or the second BB state, or to have a configuration in which the game transitions to the fourth RT state after the end of the first BB state and transitions to the normal game state after the end of the second BB state, or to have a configuration in which the game transitions to another game state (for example, the first RT state to the third RT state).

(23) Although the configuration has been described in which the initial random number acquisition process is executed when the winning probability setting process is activated during main processing upon power-on, the initial random number acquisition process may be executed upon power-on regardless of whether the winning probability setting process is activated, or whether the RAM 106 initialization process is executed upon power-on. In this case, if an AT counter C, etc. is stored in the lottery information storage area 106f during the initial random number acquisition process, the AT counter C, etc. may be cleared and new AT counter C, etc. acquisition process may be performed, or the stored AT counter C, etc. may be retained and new AT counter C, etc. acquisition process may not be performed, or whether new AT counter C, etc. acquisition process (clearing the stored AT counter C) may be performed may be determined by lottery, etc.

Furthermore, for example, if the initialization process at the end of the advantageous period is configured to clear the acquired AT counter C, etc., the process for acquiring the initial random number may be configured to be performed at the start of the normal period, triggered by the end of the advantageous period.

(24) In the initial random number acquisition process, a configuration has been described in which random numbers for other lotteries are acquired and converted into AT counters C, etc., but a configuration in which random numbers for other lotteries are acquired and converted into AT counters C, etc., may also be applied in the normal random number acquisition process.

(25) When converting random numbers for other lotteries into AT counter C, etc., a conversion table is stored in advance and conversion is performed according to that conversion table, but it may also be configured to convert randomly when acquired.

(26) Although the configuration is such that random numbers for other lotteries are converted into AT counters C, etc., it is also possible to obtain multiple AT counters C, etc. with the same value, and then convert and store these AT counters C, etc. with multiple types of values. In this case, it is preferable that the conversion be permissible for the AT counters C, etc. to have the same value. In other words, the above conversion process is not limited to a configuration in which random numbers for other lotteries are converted into AT counters C, etc., and also includes a configuration in which the AT counter C, etc. itself is converted into an AT counter C, etc. (with a different value).

(27) Although the configuration is such that random numbers for other lotteries are converted into AT counters C, etc., it is also possible to obtain a random number dedicated to that purpose and convert it into AT counters C, etc., or to obtain a random number dedicated to that purpose and store it as AT counters C, etc. without going through the conversion process.

(28) Although the configuration is such that random numbers for other lotteries are converted into AT counters C, etc., it is also possible to select random numbers that do not require conversion, acquire those random numbers, and store them as is. It is preferable that random numbers that do not require conversion have at least the same update range as AT counters C, etc.

(29) While the configuration described above converts random numbers for other lotteries into AT counters C, etc., it is also possible to store the random numbers for other lotteries as AT counters C, etc., as they are. In this case, for example, if a random number (1-64) with a narrower update range than the AT counter C's update range (1-128) is obtained for random numbers with different update ranges, an AT mode transition lottery will not be held for values outside the random number's update range. Therefore, if there is a lottery result (e.g., Strong Watermelon) that sets that value as an AT mode transition winning result, the AT mode transition lottery result will not be held. Therefore, it is advisable to set the AT mode transition lottery table so that, in an AT mode transition lottery with a value outside such update range, no AT mode transition winning result will be held regardless of the lottery result. Furthermore, if a random number (1-256) with a wider update range than the AT counter C's update range (1-128) is obtained, an AT mode transition lottery with a value outside the AT counter C's update range will not be held regardless of the lottery result. Therefore, in such cases, it is advisable to hold an AT mode transition lottery using a lottery table that is set so that a value outside the update range of the AT counter C can result in an AT mode transition win.

(30) Although the configuration is such that random numbers for other lotteries are converted into AT counters C, etc., it is also possible to store the random numbers for other lotteries as AT counters C, etc., and, for example, to set an AT mode transition lottery table for each random number. This makes it possible to perform the AT mode transition lottery in an optimal manner even when performing an AT mode transition lottery using random numbers whose update range is different from that of AT counters C, etc.

(31) When a transition replay is won, a special notification is issued to indicate whether a transition should occur between the 4th RT state A and the 4th RT state B. However, when a transition replay is won, a notification may be issued only to the effect that a transition between the 4th RT state A and the 4th RT state B is possible (for example, Figure 120(c)), and when a transition actually occurs, the expected probability of winning the AT mode transition is announced based on the AT counter C, etc. stored in the lottery information storage area 106f (Figure 122(b)).

(32) When transitioning to the 4th RT state A or 4th RT state B, the expected probability of winning the AT mode transition is reported collectively based on the AT counter C, etc. stored in the lottery information storage area 106f (Figure 122 (b)). However, as in the first embodiment, etc., it is also possible to report individually which games are more likely to win the AT mode transition using a pending display, etc.

(33) It may be possible to make it difficult or impossible to distinguish between the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B from the effects of the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., which state the player is currently in. This configuration may be applied to a configuration in which the probability of winning a cherry replay and a watermelon play is the same in the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B, but the probability of winning an AT mode transition during a cherry replay and a watermelon play differs between the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B by associating the AT counter C.

(34) The configuration is such that the results of the AT mode transition lottery are predicted in advance using a cherry replay, which is most likely to trigger a win for AT mode transition in the fourth RT state A, and a watermelon play, which is most likely to trigger a win for AT mode transition in the fourth RT state B, assuming that the AT mode transition lottery will be held at the cherry replay or watermelon play. However, the lottery result that is most likely to trigger a win for AT mode transition may be set separately from the cherry replay or watermelon play.

(35) The cherry replay with the highest probability of winning in each game in the fourth RT state A and the watermelon play with the highest probability of winning in each game in the fourth RT state B are used to predict the results of the AT mode transition lottery, assuming that the AT mode transition lottery will be held at the cherry replay or watermelon play. However, the lottery result with the highest probability of winning may be set separately from the cherry replay or watermelon play.

(36) In a configuration in which the AT Counter C that results in a winning AT mode transition is the value associated with a cherry replay as the smaller value of the update range and the value associated with a watermelon replay as the larger value, and which AT Counter C corresponding to which replay is stored is predicted based on the integrated value of each AT Counter C, the AT Counter C corresponding to which replay is stored may be predicted by calculating an average value instead of an integrated value. In this case, if the AT Counter C value associated with the lottery result to be predicted is within a predetermined range (e.g., 1 to 64), and the calculated average value of the stored AT Counter C falls within that predetermined range, it is possible to predict that the lottery result to be predicted is likely to result in a winning AT mode transition. Furthermore, it is also possible to predict that the closer the calculated average value of the stored AT Counter C value associated with the lottery result to be predicted is to the average value of the predetermined range (e.g., 1 to 64), the more likely it is that the lottery result to be predicted will result in a winning AT mode transition.

(37) In a configuration in which the results of an AT mode transition lottery are predicted by performing arithmetic processing on stored AT counters C, etc., the arithmetic processing is not limited to the accumulation processing of each AT counter C, but may be the processing of calculating an average value as described above, the arithmetic processing may be the processing of counting the number as in the fourth embodiment, the arithmetic processing may be the processing of calculating a difference, or the arithmetic processing may be the processing of performing other arithmetic operations. For example, if the arithmetic processing is the processing of calculating a difference, if the difference is small, the values of the AT counters C that are the subject of the arithmetic processing will be similar, and if the difference is large, the values of the AT counters C that are the subject of the arithmetic processing will be significantly different. If the values are similar, it is predicted that the same result will likely occur in an AT mode transition lottery using the same lottery result, and therefore consecutive wins or consecutive losses will be predicted. Furthermore, if the values are significantly different, it is predicted that different results will likely occur in an AT mode transition lottery using the same lottery result, and therefore a win (loss) will be predicted in one of the AT mode transition lotteries.

(38) In a configuration for performing arithmetic processing on stored AT counters C, instead of or in addition to a configuration in which all AT counters C stored in the lottery information storage area 106f are the subject of arithmetic processing, a configuration may be adopted in which a specific AT counter C and other AT counters C are selected for arithmetic processing. The AT counter C to be selected may be an AT counter C in a predetermined storage area, such as the smallest numbered one of the storage areas RE1 to RE10 (RE1 and RE2), or the storage area to be selected may be determined by lottery. Furthermore, the number of AT counters C to be the subject of arithmetic processing may be two or more, and may be three or more. The number may also be a predetermined number, or may be determined by lottery.

Furthermore, the number of AT counters C to be processed and the memory area in which they are stored may vary depending on the timing of the calculation process, the game status, and the lottery results of the game.

(39) Within the update range of the AT counter C, a specific range that is likely to result in a win for AT mode transition is defined, the number of values within that specific range is determined, and the CZ mode is set based on the result of this determination. However, as in the fourth embodiment, it is also possible to assume that the AT mode transition lottery is held based on the lottery result with the highest probability of winning in each game during the game state, determine the number of values that will result in AT mode transition wins, and set the CZ mode based on the result of this determination, or to set the CZ mode based on the calculation processing of each AT counter C.

(40) Although the configuration is such that the CZ mode is set when the number of stored AT Counter C values within a specific range reaches a predetermined number (5) or more, multiple CZ modes may be provided, and the CZ mode may be set in stages depending on the number of stored AT Counter C values within the specific range. For example, a first CZ mode, a second CZ mode, and a third CZ mode may be provided in order of decreasing expected value for winning the AT mode transition, and the configuration may be such that when the number of stored AT Counter C values within the specific range reaches three or more, the first CZ mode is transitioned to, when it reaches five or more, the second CZ mode is transitioned to, and when it reaches seven or more, the third CZ mode is transitioned to.

(41) In a configuration in which CZ mode is set when the number of stored AT counter C values within a specific range reaches a predetermined number or more, CZ mode may also be set when the number reaches the predetermined number or more and a predetermined start condition is met. The predetermined start condition may be, for example, a situation in which the number of stored AT counter C values within a specific range reaches a predetermined number or more for a predetermined number of games, or the game lottery result being a predetermined result (any rare combination), etc.

(42) A specific role is set as the lottery result that triggers the AT mode transition lottery, and the winning probability for that specific role does not differ depending on the set value. However, the AT mode transition lottery may be configured to be held based on lottery results in which the winning probability differs depending on the set value. Also, a transition trigger role is set as the lottery result that triggers the advantageous zone transition lottery, and the winning probability for that transition trigger role does not differ depending on the set value. However, the advantageous zone transition lottery may be held based on lottery results in which the winning probability differs depending on the set value.

(43) The AT mode transition lottery may be configured to be executed when there is a combination of BB and BB (such as a strong cherry combination with an index value IV of 34 to 51), when BB is won alone (index value IV = 52, 53), or when CB is won or when a lottery result occurs during a CB state (index value IV = 54 to 58). Even in these cases, the trigger for the AT mode transition lottery may be a lottery result with a different winning probability depending on the set value.

(44) In the above description, the inventions are described as cases in which a gaming state occurs when the first BB or second BB is won, or when transition replays 1 and 2 are won. However, the inventions may also be applied to cases in which, for example, a CB is won and a transition to the CB state occurs, a MB (middle bonus) is won and a transition to the MB state occurs, or a REG (regular bonus) is won and a transition to the REG state occurs. Furthermore, the inventions may also be applied to cases in which a state transition occurs when the first BB state, second BB state, fourth RT state, fourth RT state A, fourth RT state B, or other states end. Furthermore, the types and occurrence conditions of the hold display, special notification, and specific notification may be varied depending on the type of gaming state transition that is possible. For example, when the second BB is won, a hold display may be displayed without a hold display lottery (variant 1 in the first embodiment), while when the first BB is won, only the hold display for the winning items may be displayed.

(45) The ball payout rate is configured to change depending on each setting value, with setting 1 having the lowest ball payout rate and setting 6 having the highest ball payout rate. However, any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease in ball payout (game media) or the manner of increase or decrease changes depending on the setting value. For example, the ball payout rates of some setting values may be the same, such as setting 1 and setting 2 being the same, while the ball payout rates of other setting values may be different. Furthermore, settings 1, 3, and 5 may be configured to have a high rate of increase or decrease in ball payout, while settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low rate of increase or decrease in ball payout. Furthermore, settings 1 and 5 may be configured to increase ball payout by a predetermined amount in a short time and decrease by a predetermined amount over a long time, settings 2, 3, and 4 may take longer to increase by a predetermined amount than settings 1 and 5 and take less time to decrease by a predetermined amount than settings 1 and 5, and setting 6 may have almost no increase or decrease in ball payout. In these cases, the ball payout rate of each setting value may be the same.

(46) While a slot machine has been described that has three reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel, it is not limited to this configuration and may, for example, be a slot machine that has five reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel. From the perspective of preventing erroneous operation when stopping the reels, it is sufficient to have at least two reels and corresponding stop switches. Also, while a slot machine has been described that has one active line when the number of bets is three, it is not limited to this configuration and may, for example, have five active lines.

(47) While a specific example has been given of a slot machine 10, the present invention may also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a slot machine and a pachinko machine. That is, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions of a slot machine, the gaming machine may have ball insertion and ball payout functions like a pachinko machine (a so-called ball-using reel gaming machine). If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, the amusement hall can handle only balls as gaming value, thereby eliminating problems seen in current amusement halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls as gaming value.

For example, in pachinko machines or ball-operated reel gaming machines, the configuration may have multiple settings that change the payout rate, etc., and the above-mentioned inventions may be applied to suggest or teach these settings. In this case, in pachinko machines that have high-probability and low-probability states where the probability of winning a jackpot is high and low, the advantageous zone in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high-probability state, and in pachinko machines that have high-ball entry states and low-ball entry states where the rate of balls entering a predetermined entry section is high and low, the advantageous zone in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high-ball entry state, and the above-mentioned inventions may be applied.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, while indicating, as necessary, their effects, etc. Note that, for ease of understanding, the following will appropriately indicate corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiments in parentheses, etc. However, the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses, etc.

The inventions described in the following feature groups address the following background art: "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held when predetermined lottery conditions are met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, with slot machines, when a start lever is operated while medals are bet as gaming media, an internal lottery is held and the reels begin to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus is awarded according to the result (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A). The inventions address the following problem: "The gaming machines exemplified above need to be designed to enhance the gaming experience, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

<Features Group A>
Feature A1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction,
Display units (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allow some of the patterns on each rotating body to be visible;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) that can award a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an active position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
Equipped with
A first gaming state (e.g., a normal gaming state) and a second gaming state (e.g., a first BB state, a second BB state, a fourth RT state A, and a fourth RT state B) are set, in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be a predetermined special result (e.g., a strong cherry, a cherry replay, or a watermelon replay) differs,
A gaming machine equipped with a gaming state transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing or RT state processing by a main control device 101) that transitions from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition,
A specific information acquisition means (a function for executing a random number acquisition process in the main control device 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter C) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
a specific information storage means (lottery information storage area 106f in the main control device 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
A specific lottery means (a function of executing an AT mode transition lottery by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event (AT mode transition) will occur using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the lottery result by the lottery means;
and specific execution means (a function of executing processing for transitioning to the AT mode by the main control device 101) for causing the specific event to occur based on the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means being a specific result (winning a transition to the AT mode) corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific lottery means is capable of performing the specific lottery using predetermined specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means in the first gaming state and stored in the specific information storage means, and the lottery result by the lottery means in the second gaming state.

In this so-called slot machine, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is conducted by the lottery means and the orbiting body begins to rotate; when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body stops, and if the resulting number corresponds to the lottery result for this game, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. The lottery result by the lottery means and specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means and stored in the specific information storage means are used to conduct a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event will occur, thereby achieving a completely different level of playability from conventional slot machines, which simply match the lottery result by the lottery means with the stopping result of the orbiting body.

Furthermore, a first gaming state and a second gaming state are provided, each with a different probability that the lottery result obtained by the lottery means will result in a special outcome. A specific lottery can be executed using specific information acquired in the first gaming state and the lottery result of the game in the second gaming state. Therefore, in a game using a specific lottery, an element such as whether or not a transition in gaming state occurs after acquisition of specific information is added, diversifying elements that attract players' interest and making the game more engaging and interesting. More specifically, for example, if the acquired specific information corresponds to information indicating that a specific lottery will be won if the lottery result obtained by the lottery means results in a special outcome (the result of the specific lottery will be the specific outcome), a transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state occurs after acquisition of the specific information, resulting in a subsequent change in the probability of winning the specific lottery. Therefore, a player who wants a specific event to occur can hope for a transition to a state where the probability of a special result is high, or hope for no transition to a state where the probability of a special result is low, while a player who does not want a specific event to occur can hope for a transition to a state where the probability of a special result is low, or hope for no transition to a state where the probability of a special result is high. In this way, it is possible to realize innovative gameplay that allows players to anticipate whether or not a transition will occur in the game state in relation to the specific information that has already been acquired.

The "specific lottery means" may also be expressed as "specific lottery means capable of executing a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event will occur, using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the special result among the lottery results obtained by the lottery means."

Furthermore, by configuring the above as follows: "The specific lottery means is capable of executing the specific lottery using specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means in a specific game and stored in the specific information storage means, and the lottery result by the lottery means in a specific game that is a game subsequent to the specific game," it can be made clearer that a specific lottery may be executed in relation to the acquired specific information and the game result in the subsequent game.

Note that "specific information storage means capable of storing the specific information" can also be expressed as "specific information storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of the specific information" or "specific information storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of the specific information, which is a predetermined plurality." Such changes in expression can also be applied to other features and other groups of features.

Feature A2. A destination specifying means (for example, a function of executing a pending display process by the display control device 81) that can specify the predetermined specific information stored in the specific information storage means before the predetermined specific information becomes the subject of the specific lottery;
A specific notification execution means (a function of executing a process to display a special image in a hold display process by the display control device 81) that can execute a specific notification corresponding to the identification result by the destination identification means by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65);
The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized by comprising:

With the above configuration, a specific notification corresponding to the acquired specific information is issued by a predetermined notification means, allowing the player to play while checking the specific notification and determining whether or not to transition to a new gaming state. This allows the game with Feature A1 to be played optimally.

Feature A3. A gaming machine according to Feature A2, wherein the specific notification execution means is capable of executing, as the specific notification, a notification corresponding to a lottery result by the lottery means that will result in the specific result or is likely to result in the specific result when the specific lottery is conducted using the predetermined specific information.

With the above configuration, it is possible to understand from the specific notification what kind of lottery results obtained by the lottery means will result in a specific result or are likely to result in a specific result for the specific information that has already been acquired. This allows the player to determine whether a transition in game state will be advantageous to the player in relation to the specific notification, and the lottery results for each game will attract more attention than the bonuses awarded by the bonus awarding means based on those lottery results. This increases the enjoyment of the game.

Feature A4. The specific lottery means
The specific result is obtained when the specific lottery is performed using a first result (for example, a strong cherry) among the lottery results by the lottery means and first specific information (for example, 5 on the AT counter C) among the specific information,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A3, characterized in that the specific result can be obtained when the specific lottery is conducted using a second result (e.g., a weak cherry) different from the first result among the lottery results obtained by the lottery means and the first specific information.

With the above configuration, in a game in which a specific lottery is conducted using previously acquired specific information and the lottery result of a game, if the result of the specific lottery is a specific result, the relationship between the specific information and the lottery result of the game is not one-to-one; multiple lottery results are associated with one specific information. This increases the diversity of specific lotteries, and even if specific information associated with a game lottery result that is unlikely to occur is acquired, there remains a possibility that the specific result will occur in relation to other lottery results, making the game more interesting.

Feature A5. The specific lottery means
The specific result is obtained when the specific lottery is performed using a first result (for example, a strong cherry) among the lottery results by the lottery means and first specific information (for example, 5 on the AT counter C) among the specific information,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that the specific result can be obtained when the specific lottery is conducted using the first result among the lottery results by the lottery means and second specific information (for example, 6 on AT counter C) that is different from the first specific information among the specific information.

With the above configuration, in a game in which a specific lottery is conducted using previously acquired specific information and the lottery results of a game, when the result of that specific lottery is a specific result, the relationship between the specific information and the lottery result of the game is not a one-to-one relationship; multiple pieces of specific information are associated with one lottery result. This allows for the diversification of specific lotteries while preventing the lottery results of the game related to that specific lottery from becoming too complicated.

Feature A6. The specific lottery means is configured to obtain the specific result when the specific lottery is performed using a third result (for example, a strong cherry or the third combination among BB) among the lottery results by the lottery means and third specific information (for example, 1 of the AT counter C) among the specific information,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A5, characterized in that when a lottery is conducted by the lottery means in the second gaming state, the third result is obtained, whereas when a lottery is conducted by the lottery means in the first gaming state, the third result is not obtained or the third result is less likely to be obtained than in the second gaming state.

According to the above configuration, when third specific information is acquired by the specific information acquisition means, if the game lottery result is the third result, the specific lottery is won. While the third result will be obtained in the second gaming state, the first gaming state is set so that the third result will not be obtained or will be less likely to be obtained than in the second gaming state. With this configuration, in a game in which a specific lottery is conducted using specific information previously acquired by the specific information acquisition means and the result of a subsequent game lottery, if the previously acquired specific information is the third specific information, a transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state can be desired. This increases the interest in the game by drawing attention to whether or not the gaming state will transition in relation to the specific information.

Feature A7: The specific lottery means is configured to obtain the specific result when the specific lottery is performed using a fourth result (e.g., normal replay) among the lottery results by the lottery means and fourth specific information (e.g., 3 on the AT counter C) among the specific information,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A6, characterized in that when a lottery is conducted by the lottery means in the first gaming state, the fourth result is obtained, whereas when a lottery is conducted by the lottery means in the second gaming state, the fourth result is not obtained or the fourth result is less likely to be obtained than in the first gaming state.

According to the above configuration, when fourth specific information is acquired by the specific information acquisition means, if the game lottery result is the fourth result, the specific lottery is won. While the fourth result will be obtained in the first gaming state, the second gaming state is set so that the fourth result will not be obtained or will be less likely to be obtained than in the first gaming state. This configuration allows for a game in which a specific lottery is performed using specific information previously acquired by the specific information acquisition means and the result of a subsequent game lottery, and if the previously acquired specific information is the fourth specific information, it is possible to encourage players to hope that a transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state will not occur. This increases the player's interest in whether or not a transition will occur in relation to the specific information.

Feature A8. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A7, wherein the second gaming state includes a first specific state (first BB state, fourth RT state A) and a second specific state (second BB state, fourth RT state B), which have different probabilities that the lottery result obtained by the lottery means will be the special result.

With the above configuration, in a game feature that provides the enjoyment of whether a transition to a game state will occur after specific information is acquired, the content of the lottery drawn by the lottery means will differ depending on whether the transition occurs to the first specific state or the second specific state. For example, in relation to the acquired specific information, a transition to the first specific state will be more advantageous than a transition to the second specific state, thereby drawing interest in the transition destination in the above game feature.

Feature A9. The transition condition is set such that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result (first BB win, second BB win), and a transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result stops at the valid position;
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A8, characterized in that it is equipped with a reservation means (a function that executes processing to carry over a bonus winning flag by the main control unit 101) that can reserve information that the transition result is a winning one until the transition pattern combination stops at the valid position.

In the above configuration, where a transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state occurs when a winning transition result occurs and the transition symbol combination stops, the winning transition result is carried over until the transition symbol combination stops. By applying this configuration to Feature A1, in a gameplay where specific information is acquired in advance and a specific lottery is held based on the game lottery results, the player is prompted to determine whether a transition to the second gaming state is appropriate in relation to the acquired specific information, and the transition symbol combination is stopped when a transition is appropriate.

Feature A10. The transition condition is set such that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result (transition replay 1 win, transition replay 2 win), and a transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result stops at the valid position;
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A8, characterized in that it is configured to have an erasure means (a function of executing a process to erase the winning flag of each game by the main control unit 101) that can erase information that the transition result is a winning result if the transition pattern combination does not stop at the valid position in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means results in the transition result, or is configured so that the transition pattern combination can be stopped at the valid position in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means results in the transition result regardless of the stop operation mode of the stop operation means.

In the above configuration, where the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state occurs when a winning transition result occurs and the transition symbol combination stops, the information about the winning transition result is valid only for that game. In this way, in a game where specific information is acquired in advance and a specific lottery is conducted based on the lottery results of the game, while a decision is made as to whether a transition to the second gaming state should occur in relation to the acquired specific information, whether or not the transition actually occurs is heavily influenced by luck. Therefore, for example, in a situation where a transition to the second advantageous state would be advantageous in relation to the specific information, there will be great interest in the results of the lottery means for each game, making for a thrilling game experience.

Feature A11. The gaming machine described in Feature A9 or Feature A10, wherein the drive control means is configured to be able to stop the transitional symbol combination at the valid position when the stop operation means is operated in a predetermined operation mode, but is unable to stop the transitional symbol combination at the valid position when the stop operation means is operated in an operation mode different from the predetermined operation mode.

With the above configuration, if it is better not to transition to the second gaming state even if the transition results in a win, the player can prevent the transition pattern combination from stopping by operating the stop operation means in a manner different from the predetermined operating manner. This gives the player more room to choose the content of the specific lottery, making the game more interesting.

Feature A12. The second gaming state is configured to transition to the first gaming state or another gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined termination condition (such as the payment of an upper limit payout amount or the consumption of a fixed number of games),
the specific information storage means is configured to be able to store a predetermined number of pieces of specific information;
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11, wherein the termination condition can be met with a number of games less than the predetermined number.

With the above configuration, the second gaming state can end after fewer games than the predetermined number, which is the upper limit for the number of specific information stored by the specific information storage means, and therefore the second gaming state can end before all of the specific information acquired before the transition to the second gaming state is consumed. This allows for a game in which, for example, if the specific information corresponds to a situation in which the first gaming state is more preferable, the transition to the second gaming state is prevented, or a game in which the transition to the second gaming state occurs and the second gaming state is ended before the specific information becomes the subject of a specific lottery. This makes it possible to more effectively enhance the enjoyment of the game, which relies on the enjoyment of whether or not the gaming state transitions in relation to the specific information.

Feature A13. The second gaming state is configured to transition to the first gaming state or another gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined termination condition (such as the payout of an upper limit payout amount or the consumption of a fixed number of games),
the specific information storage means is configured to be able to store a predetermined number of pieces of specific information;
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12, wherein the termination condition can be met when the number of games played is greater than the predetermined number.

With the above configuration, the second gaming state can end after a number of games greater than the predetermined number, which is the upper limit of the number of specific information that can be stored in the specific information storage means, and therefore the second gaming state can end after all of the specific information acquired before the transition to the second gaming state has been consumed. In this way, for example, if the specific information corresponds to a situation in the second gaming state that is more preferable than the situation in the first gaming state, by transitioning to the second gaming state, that specific information becomes the subject of a specific lottery before the end of the second gaming state. This makes it possible to more appropriately enhance the enjoyment of the gameplay, which is enjoyed by whether or not the gaming state will transition in relation to the specific information.

Feature A14. A gaming machine as described in Feature A12 or Feature A13, wherein the termination condition is such that the number of games in the second gaming state may vary depending on the result of the lottery drawn by the lottery means in the second gaming state.

With the above configuration, an element of luck is added to the number of games that can be played in the second gaming state. For example, whether specific information favorable to the player becomes the subject of a specific lottery during the second gaming state or becomes the subject of a specific lottery after the second gaming state ends will depend on the lottery results for each game in the second gaming state. This makes it possible to attract great interest in each game in the second gaming state not only in the result of the specific lottery, but also in the lottery results for that game in relation to the specific information that follows.

Feature A15. An end result (for example, a strong cherry as a payout) is set as the lottery result by the lottery means in the second gaming state,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the end result and a final symbol combination stops at the valid position, a bonus corresponding to the end result is awarded by the bonus awarding means,
The configuration may be such that whether or not the termination condition is met may differ depending on whether or not the reward corresponding to the termination result is awarded by the reward awarding means,
The gaming machine described in any one of features A12 to A14, characterized in that the drive control means is capable of controlling the stop operation means to stop the end pattern combination at the valid position when the stop operation means is operated in an operation mode for ending, and to prevent the end pattern combination from stopping at the valid position when the stop operation means is operated in an operation mode different from the operation mode for ending.

With the above configuration, the operation of the stop operation means for the game that ended during the second gaming state is related to whether the termination conditions for the second gaming state are met. More specifically, if the stop operation means is operated in the termination operation mode in the game that ended, the termination symbol combination will stop in a valid position and the game will be eligible for a bonus. However, if the stop operation means is operated in an operation mode other than the termination operation mode, the termination symbol combination will not stop in a valid position and the game will not be eligible for a bonus. Because the configuration allows the fulfillment of the termination conditions to differ depending on whether or not a bonus is awarded, whether or not the second gaming state is terminated can differ depending on the operation mode at the time of the winning termination result. This allows the player to influence whether or not the second gaming state is terminated in relation to the specific information by operating the stop operation means, encouraging active participation in the game and making operating the stop operation means more enjoyable.

Specific examples of the above configuration include the following:

The termination condition is established when the number of gaming media paid out in the second gaming state reaches a predetermined specific number,
The end result is that a predetermined number of game media is awarded as the bonus by the bonus awarding means.

Feature A16. The second gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A15, characterized in that the probability of obtaining the specific result in the specific lottery using the same specific information is more likely to be higher in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state.

With the above configuration, transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state is advantageous for the player, and furthermore, given the same specific information, the probability of achieving a specific result is higher if a specific lottery is taken in the second gaming state than if a specific lottery is taken in the first gaming state. With this configuration, it is possible to match the gameplay that encourages anticipation of transitioning to the second gaming state, i.e., a transition to a jackpot state, with the gameplay of conducting a specific lottery during the second gaming state using specific information obtained before transitioning to the second gaming state. This makes it possible to make the second gaming state, as a jackpot state, even more enjoyable.

Feature A17. The game state includes a normal game state (normal section) and a first specific game state (advantageous section) that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the normal game state.
A second specific gaming state (AT mode) that is more likely to be advantageous to a player than other states in the first specific gaming state is set as a state included in the first specific gaming state,
A first transition lottery means (a function of executing a favorable zone transition lottery by the main control device 101) that executes a first transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the first specific gaming state in the normal gaming state;
A first specific transition means (a function of executing a process to transition to the advantageous zone by the main control device 101) that transitions to the first specific gaming state based on the result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means being a first transition result (winning the advantageous zone) that corresponds to transitioning to the first specific gaming state;
A second transition lottery means (a function of executing an AT mode transition lottery by the main control device 101) for executing a second transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the second specific gaming state;
A second specific transition means (a function of executing a process for transitioning to the AT mode by the main control device 101) for transitioning to the second specific gaming state based on the lottery result of the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means being a second transition result (AT mode transition winning) corresponding to transitioning to the second specific gaming state;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A16, characterized in that the specific lottery means executes the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means as the specific lottery, and the specific event causes a transition to the second specific gaming state.

The above configuration provides a first specific gaming state that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and a second specific gaming state that is even more advantageous as a state included in the first specific gaming state. Therefore, in a game that is premised on a gradual transition to a more advantageous state, such as transitioning from the normal gaming state to the first specific gaming state and then aiming for the second specific gaming state, the lottery for transitioning to the second specific gaming state is conducted based on specific information obtained in advance, resulting in an innovative game.

Feature A18. The lottery results by the lottery means include a first result in which a prize is won when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, and a second result in which a prize is won when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode,
The device is provided with a mode notification means (a function of executing a push order role process by the main control device 101) that can execute mode notification (push order notification) regarding operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode on a predetermined notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the instruction monitor 68) based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A17, characterized in that the specific event causes a transition to a state in which a mode notification can be executed by the mode notification means.

With the above configuration, the specific lottery conducted based on the specific information acquired in advance will draw for a specific event that will cause a transition to a state in which a navigation of a stop operation mode can occur. This makes it possible to create a lottery method in which specific information for the lottery is acquired in advance for games using navigation of a stop operation mode, and to create innovative gameplay in which the specific information acquired in advance can be effectively used even after the transition to a new game mode.

<Features Group B>
Feature B1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction,
Display units (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allow some of the patterns on each rotating body to be visible;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) that can award a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an active position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
Equipped with
a first gaming state (e.g., a normal gaming state) and a second gaming state (e.g., a first BB state, a second BB state) are set, in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be a predetermined special result (e.g., a strong cherry) differs;
A gaming machine including a gaming state transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing by a main control device 101) that transitions from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition,
a first specific information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring a normal AT counter CA in a random number acquisition process in the main control device 101) for acquiring first specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined first acquisition condition;
a first identification information storage means (a normal storage area REA in the main control device 101) capable of storing the first identification information acquired by the first identification information acquisition means;
a first specific lottery means (a function of executing an AT mode transition lottery based on a normal AT counter CA by the main control device 101) that executes a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event (AT mode transition) will occur, using at least the first specific information stored in the first specific information storage means and the lottery result by the lottery means in the first gaming state;
A second specific information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring the BB AT counter CB in the random number acquisition process in the main control device 101) for acquiring second specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined second acquisition condition;
a second identification information storage means (a BB storage area REB in the main control device 101) capable of storing the second identification information acquired by the second identification information acquisition means;
A second specific lottery means (a function of executing an AT mode transition lottery based on the BB AT counter CB by the main control device 101) that executes a specific lottery to determine whether or not to cause the specific event by using at least the second specific information stored in the second specific information storage means and the lottery result by the lottery means in the second gaming state;
A specific execution means (a function of executing a process for transitioning to an advantageous zone by the main control device 101) that causes the specific event to occur based on the result of the first specific lottery by the first specific lottery means or the result of the second specific lottery by the second specific lottery means being a specific result (winning an AT mode transition) corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In this so-called slot machine, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means draws a game and the orbiting body begins to rotate; when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body stops, and if the resulting number corresponds to the lottery result for this game, the bonus awarding means awards a bonus. In this configuration, a first specific lottery is conducted to determine whether a specific event will occur using the lottery result from the lottery means and first specific information acquired by the first specific information acquisition means and stored in the first specific information storage means; and a second specific lottery is conducted to determine whether a specific event will occur using the lottery result from the lottery means and second specific information acquired by the second specific information acquisition means and stored in the second specific information storage means. This provides a completely different level of playability from conventional slot machines, which simply match the lottery result from the lottery means with the stopping result of the orbiting body.

Here, a first gaming state and a second gaming state are provided in which the probability that the result of the lottery drawn by the lottery means will be a special result differs. In this case, if both specific lotteries are configured to be conducted using the same specific information, the probability that the result of the first specific lottery in the first gaming state and the second specific lottery in the second gaming state will be a special result may differ due to the different probabilities that the result of the lottery will be a special result. This may impose limitations on the configuration of the lottery means in both gaming states, such as the need to adjust the probability of winning a special result in order to prevent the probability of the result of the specific lottery from becoming too high. Furthermore, for example, depending on the probability that the result of the specific lottery will be a special result, it may be necessary to adjust the update range of the specific information, and there may be circumstances in which the update range should be set according to the probability of the specific result tailored to the gaming state.

In the above configuration, specific information is acquired separately for each specific lottery in both game states, and the specific lottery is conducted based on the specific information and the lottery results for each game state. This makes it possible to set specific lotteries that suit the actual circumstances of each game state, and makes it possible to achieve excellent gameplay using specific lotteries.

The "first specific lottery means" may also be expressed as "first specific lottery means that executes a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event will occur, using at least the first specific information stored in the first specific information storage means and the special result among the lottery results by the lottery means," and the "second specific lottery means" may also be expressed as "second specific lottery means that executes a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event will occur, using at least the second specific information stored in the second specific information storage means and the special result among the lottery results by the lottery means."

Feature B2: The first specific information acquisition means is capable of acquiring the first specific information based on the first acquisition condition being satisfied in the second gaming state,
A gaming machine described in feature B1, characterized in that the second specific information acquisition means is capable of acquiring the second specific information based on the second acquisition condition being met in the first gaming state.

With the above configuration, in a configuration in which specific information for each game state is provided, it is possible to obtain the specific information for the other game state in advance before transitioning to the other game state. In this way, it is possible to determine, before the transition, whether transitioning to the other game state would be advantageous in terms of specific lottery results, based on the specific information corresponding to the other game state.

The above configuration may also be expressed as follows.
"The first acquisition condition can be met in the second gaming state,
A gaming machine described in feature B1, characterized in that the second acquisition condition can be met in the first gaming state.

Feature B3: The first specific information acquisition means is capable of acquiring the first specific information based on the first acquisition condition being satisfied in the first gaming state,
A gaming machine described in feature B1 or feature B2, characterized in that the second specific information acquisition means is capable of acquiring the second specific information based on the second acquisition condition being met in the second gaming state.

With the above configuration, in a configuration in which specific information for each gaming state is provided, a specific lottery is conducted based on the specific information corresponding to the current gaming state, preventing the specific information from being consumed and depleted by the specific lottery. In other words, a specific lottery is conducted based on the specific information corresponding to the current gaming state, and specific information corresponding to that gaming state is acquired, allowing the specific information to be constantly replenished, making it possible to optimally realize gameplay using specific information acquired in advance.

The above configuration may also be expressed as follows.
"The first acquisition condition can be met in the first gaming state,
A gaming machine described in feature B1 or feature B2, characterized in that the second acquisition condition can be met in the second gaming state.

Feature B4: When the first specific lottery based on the first specific information is held in the first gaming state, among the second specific information stored in the second specific information storage means, the second specific information that would be the subject of the second specific lottery if the second specific lottery had been held in the game is erased from the second specific information storage means;
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B3, characterized in that it is equipped with an erasure means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4301 to S4309 in the main control unit 101) that, when the second specific lottery based on the second specific information is held in the second gaming state, erases from the first specific information storage means the first specific information that is the subject of the first specific lottery if the first specific lottery has been held in the game, among the first specific information stored in the first specific information storage means.

According to the above configuration, when a first specific lottery based on the first specific information is held in the first gaming state, the second specific information is also consumed, and when a second specific lottery based on the second specific information is held in the second gaming state, the first specific information is also consumed. In other words, specific information that is not the subject of a specific lottery is also consumed, and specific information is consumed as the game progresses, regardless of the gaming state. By doing this, for example, if the acquired second specific information for the second gaming state is undesirable to the player, retaining that second specific information prevents an unpleasant situation from continuing indefinitely even after transitioning to the second gaming state. In other words, for example, if the acquired second specific information for the second gaming state is desirable to the player, retaining that second specific information prevents an unpleasant situation from continuing indefinitely even after transitioning to the second gaming state, and instead realizes a gameplay feature in which a transition to the second gaming state needs to occur before the second specific information is consumed.

Feature B5: When the first specific lottery based on the first specific information is performed in the first gaming state, the second specific information stored in the second specific information storage means is held;
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B3, characterized in that it is equipped with a storage means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4201 to S4205 in the main control unit 101) for storing the first specific information stored in the first specific information storage means when the second specific lottery based on the second specific information is conducted in the second gaming state.

According to the above configuration, when a first specific lottery based on the first specific information is held in the first gaming state, the second specific information is not consumed, and when a second specific lottery based on the second specific information is held in the second gaming state, the first specific information is not consumed. In other words, the specific information that is not the subject of the specific lottery is not consumed, and the specific information consumed varies depending on the gaming state. In this way, for example, the second specific information already acquired for the second gaming state can be used to suggest the likelihood of a second specific lottery in the next second gaming state. For example, if the second specific information already acquired is favorable, the player will likely continue playing until the suggestion triggers a transition to the second gaming state. However, if the second specific information already acquired is not favorable, the player can continue playing while hoping for a transition to the next second gaming state.

Here, the first specific lottery and the second specific lottery are conducted using the specific information and the lottery results of the game. Therefore, even if the second specific information is not favorable as described above, the result of the second specific lottery may differ depending on the outcome of the game, and hopes for the second specific lottery are not completely dashed. Therefore, even if the above is done, it is unlikely to discourage players from playing, and excellent effects can be expected when the second specific information is favorable.

Feature B6. A gaming machine described in any one of Features B1 to B5, wherein the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition can be met in the same game.

With the above configuration, it is possible for the first specific information and the second specific information to be obtained in the same game. This makes it possible to replenish both the first specific information and the second specific information in a single game, for example, when the first specific information is consumed in the first game state and there is available second specific information, or when the second specific information is consumed in the second game state and there is available first specific information. This makes it possible to effectively avoid situations where specific information runs out.

Feature B7: The first specific lottery means is configured to obtain the specific result when the first specific lottery is performed using a first result (e.g., strong watermelon) among the lottery results obtained by the lottery means and first specific information corresponding to the first result (e.g., 65 on the normal AT counter CA) among the first specific information,
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B6, characterized in that the second specific lottery means is set so that the specific result will not be obtained when the second specific lottery is conducted using the first result among the lottery results by the lottery means and the first result-corresponding second specific information corresponding to the first result-corresponding first specific information among the second specific information (for example, 65 of the BB AT counter CB corresponding to 65 of the normal AT counter CA).

According to the above configuration, when first specific information corresponding to the first result is acquired by the first specific information acquisition means, if the game lottery result is the first result, the specific lottery is won. In the first gaming state, if the game lottery result is the first result as described above, the specific lottery is won. However, if second specific information corresponding to the first result corresponding to the first specific information corresponding to the first result is acquired by the second specific information acquisition means, the specific lottery is not won even if the game lottery result is the first result in the second gaming state. With this configuration, even if similar specific information (first specific information corresponding to the first result and second specific information corresponding to the first result) is used, the success or failure of the specific lottery will differ depending on the gaming state, enhancing the significance of separately preparing specific information according to the gaming state and making it possible to draw great interest in which special information corresponding to the first result is acquired.

Note that "first result-corresponding second identification information corresponding to the first result-corresponding first identification information" may be expressed as "first result-corresponding second identification information that has the same value as the first result-corresponding first identification information," assuming that "the update ranges of the first identification information and the second identification information are the same." Alternatively, it may be expressed as "first result-corresponding second identification information in which the value of the second identification information, when converted using the update range of the first identification information, is the same as the value of the first result-corresponding first identification information," assuming that "the update ranges of the first identification information and the second identification information are different."

Feature B8. The first specific lottery means is configured to obtain the specific result when the first specific lottery is performed using a second result (e.g., strong cherry) among the lottery results by the lottery means and first specific information corresponding to the second result (e.g., 1 of the normal AT counter CA) among the first specific information,
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B7, characterized in that the second specific lottery means is set so that the specific result is obtained when the second specific lottery is conducted using the second result among the lottery results by the lottery means and second result-corresponding second specific information corresponding to the second result-corresponding first specific information among the second specific information (for example, 1 of BB AT counter CB corresponding to 1 of normal AT counter CA).

According to the above configuration, when first specific information corresponding to the second result is acquired by the first specific information acquisition means, if the game lottery result is the second result, the specific lottery is won. In the first gaming state, if the game lottery result is the second result as described above, the specific lottery is won. If second specific information corresponding to the second result corresponding to the first specific information corresponding to the second result is acquired by the second specific information acquisition means, the specific lottery is won if the game lottery result is the second result in the second gaming state. This configuration, assuming that the win or loss of the specific lottery is the same depending on the gaming state when similar specific information (first specific information corresponding to the second result and second specific information corresponding to the second result) is acquired, enhances the effect of a configuration with an element of surprise, such as feature B7, where the win or loss of the specific lottery differs depending on the gaming state even with similar specific information. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability of a game by providing separate specific information for each gaming state.

Feature B9. A first specific notification means (a function that executes a process to display a special image as a hold display in the normal hold display area Dra by the display control device 81) that can execute a first specific notification (a hold display in the normal hold display area Dra) for the first specific information stored in the first specific information storage means by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65);
A second specific notification means (a function of executing a process of displaying a special image as a hold display in the BB hold display area Drb by the display control device 81) that can execute a second specific notification (a hold display in the BB hold display area Drb) for the second specific information stored in the second specific information storage means by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65);
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, characterized in that it is provided with:

With the above configuration, the player can confirm the acquired first specific information for the first gaming state and the second specific information for the second gaming state as the first specific notification and the second specific notification, respectively. This allows the player to progress through the game while understanding which gaming state's specific information will give them an advantage if they enter a specific lottery, increasing their interest in whether the transition conditions are met.

Feature B10. A gaming machine described in any one of Features B1 to B9, wherein the second gaming state includes a first specific state (first BB state) and a second specific state (second BB state) in which the probability that the lottery result obtained by the lottery means will be the special result differs.

In the above configuration, in which a second specific lottery is conducted using second specific information for the second gaming state that has been acquired in advance, the second gaming state further includes a first specific state and a second specific state, which have different probabilities of the game lottery result being a special outcome, and depending on which specific state is transitioned to, the likelihood of a specific outcome may differ in relation to the acquired second specific information. This makes it possible to draw interest in the gaming state transition regarding the second specific information, thereby enhancing the game's depth and increasing its enjoyment.

<Feature Group C>
Feature C1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction,
Display units (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allow some of the patterns on each rotating body to be visible;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) that can award a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an active position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
A specific information acquisition means (a function for executing a random number acquisition process in the main control device 101) for acquiring specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
a specific information storage means (lottery information storage area 106f in the main control device 101) capable of storing a predetermined number of pieces of specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
A specific lottery means (a function of executing an AT mode transition lottery by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event (AT mode transition) will occur using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the lottery result by the lottery means;
A specific execution means (a function of executing a process for transitioning to the AT mode by the main control device 101) that causes the specific event to occur based on the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means being a specific result (winning the transition to the AT mode) corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event;
a second specific information acquisition means (a function of executing an initial random number acquisition process by the main control device 101) that can acquire the specific information based on the establishment of a specific condition different from the acquisition condition in a specific situation in which the specific information stored in the specific information storage means has not reached the predetermined number;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In this so-called slot machine, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is conducted by the lottery means and the orbiting body begins to rotate; when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body stops, and if the resulting number corresponds to the lottery result for this game, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. The lottery result by the lottery means and the specific information acquired by the first specific information acquisition means and stored in the specific information storage means are used to conduct a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event will occur, thereby achieving a completely different level of playability from conventional slot machines, which simply match the lottery result by the lottery means with the stopping result of the orbiting body.

The above configuration also includes a second specific information acquisition means that acquires specific information when a specific condition different from the acquisition condition is met in a specific situation where the specific information storage means does not store a predetermined number of specific information pieces, which is the storage limit. This minimizes situations where specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means, and makes it possible to optimally realize gameplay that uses acquired specific information.

Feature C2. The gaming machine described in Feature C1, wherein the specific condition is met before each of the orbiting bodies begins to rotate based on operation of the start operating means.

With the above configuration, the second specific information acquisition means acquires specific information before the operation of the start operation means becomes valid at the start of the game. This makes it possible to conduct a specific lottery using at least the specific information acquired by the second specific information acquisition means at the start of the game, preventing an event in which the specific lottery cannot be conducted.

In addition, by limiting the above configuration to "the specific lottery means executes the specific lottery based on operation by the start operation means," the significance of obtaining specific information before operation of the start operation means at the start of the game is further enhanced.

Feature C3. Equipped with a startup process execution means (a function of executing main processing by the main control device 101) that executes startup processing that is started when the gaming machine is powered on,
The specific condition is met during the startup process (the initial random number acquisition process is executed when the winning probability setting process is started),
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, wherein the second specific information acquisition means acquires the specific information during the startup process.

With the above configuration, the specific information is acquired during the startup process when the power is turned on, so when the startup process is complete and the game can be started, the specific information is already stored. This prevents situations such as the specific lottery not being able to be played due to the lack of specific information during the game.

Feature C4: The startup process by the startup process execution means includes a specific deletion means (a function of executing an initialization process during the main process in the main control device 101) that can execute deletion of at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means,
The gaming machine according to feature C3, wherein the specific condition is met when the specific erasure means performs the erasure process of the specific information.

With the above configuration, if specific information is deleted during the startup process, new specific information is acquired. In other words, if specific information is not deleted, there is no need to acquire specific information during the startup process. By configuring it so that it is acquired only when necessary, it is possible to minimize the processing load during the startup process, which involves a large number of processes.

Feature C5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features C1 to C4, wherein the specific condition is met based on a predetermined operation for progressing the game.

With the above configuration, the event is established based on a predetermined operation during the game's progress, and even when specific information is acquired due to the establishment of a specific condition, the player's operation is still involved. This makes it possible to include the operation to acquire the specific information in the game of a specific lottery, and to attract interest in the game, including the player's involvement in the operation.

Feature C6. The predetermined operations for progressing the game include a first progress operation (e.g., a first stop ON operation) and a second progress operation (e.g., a second stop ON operation) that is performed later than the first progress operation and in the same game as the first progress operation,
A gaming machine described in feature C5, characterized in that the specific condition is met based on the first advancement operation being performed and is met based on the second advancement operation being performed.

With the above configuration, specific information is acquired with each progression operation during a single game. This increases the likelihood of acquiring the amount of specific information needed to fill the available space in a single game, even in situations where the specific information storage means has multiple available spaces. Furthermore, each acquisition involves the player's operation at a different time, which keeps the player interested in the acquisition operation and allows the acquisition operation to be completed more quickly.

Feature C7: A first updating means (a function of executing a process of updating the AT counter C by a timer interrupt process by the main control unit 101) capable of updating the specific information at a predetermined cycle;
A second update means (a function of executing the processing of step S4404 by the main control device 101) capable of executing the update processing of the specific information based on the establishment of the specific condition;
A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, characterized in that it is equipped with:

With the above configuration, when specific information that is updated at a predetermined cycle is acquired based on the fulfillment of a specific condition rather than on the acquisition condition, it is possible to avoid acquiring similar specific information if the acquisition occurs before the start of the update at the predetermined cycle, if multiple acquisitions are made and the acquisition cycle is synchronized with the predetermined cycle, or if the acquisition cycle is shorter than the predetermined cycle.

In particular, in a configuration such as Feature C2 where specific information is acquired during startup processing, the timing of acquisition may occur before the first update means begins updating at a predetermined interval, which could result in the acquired specific information being an initial value. In this regard, by updating the specific information by the second update means upon acquisition, as described above, it is possible to avoid such inconveniences.

The above configuration may also be expressed as follows.
"A first updating means (a function for executing a process for updating the AT counter C by a timer interrupt process by the main control unit 101) capable of updating the specific information at a predetermined period;
a second updating means (a function of executing processing such as step S4404 by the main control device 101) that can execute an update process of the specific information before the specific information is acquired by the second specific information acquiring means based on the establishment of the specific condition;
It is equipped with..."

Feature C8. The second specific information acquisition means is capable of acquiring a plurality of pieces of specific information based on the establishment of the specific condition;
The gaming machine described in feature C7 is characterized in that the second update means is capable of executing an update process for the specific information each time the second specific information acquisition means acquires the specific information.

With the above configuration, the second specific information acquisition means can acquire multiple pieces of specific information at once. Therefore, if there is multiple free areas in the specific information storage means, the second specific information acquisition means can acquire the amount of specific information equivalent to that amount. However, as mentioned above, it is undesirable for specific information with similar values to be acquired. In this regard, with the above configuration, an update process is performed each time the second specific information acquisition means acquires information, making it possible to avoid such inconveniences and acquire multiple pieces of specific information at once.

The above configuration may also be expressed as follows.
"The second specific information acquisition means is capable of acquiring a plurality of pieces of specific information based on the establishment of the specific condition,
The second updating means is capable of executing an update process for the specific information before the second specific information acquiring means acquires the specific information each time the second specific information acquiring means acquires the specific information.

Feature C9. Equipped with a predetermined operation means (e.g., a stop switch 44) operated by the player,
the acquisition condition is satisfied based on the operation of the predetermined operation means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C8, characterized in that the specific condition is met based on the operation of the specified operating means or another operating means (e.g., start lever 41).

The above configuration is based on the premise that the specific information used in the specific lottery is acquired based on the player's operation of a predetermined operating means, and even when specific information is acquired by the second specific information acquisition means, it is acquired based on the operation of the predetermined operating means or another operating means. This ensures the transparency of the specific lottery compared to a configuration in which the information is acquired automatically by the gaming machine.

Feature C10. The gaming machine described in Feature C9, wherein the second specific information acquisition means acquires one piece of specific information based on a single operation of the predetermined operating means or another operating means, even in a situation where, among the specific situations, there are multiple free areas in the specific information storage means where no specific information is stored.

With the above configuration, even if there are multiple free areas, the acquisition operation is performed once for each, which increases the likelihood that the specific information will be updated and makes it possible to prevent the acquisition of similar specific information as much as possible.

Feature C11. The gaming machine described in Feature C9, wherein the second specific information acquisition means is configured to be able to acquire multiple pieces of the specific information based on a single operation of the predetermined operating means or another operating means.

The above configuration makes it possible to improve work efficiency, for example, when a manager or other person performs acquisition work before the amusement hall opens.

Feature C12: Having predetermined information used in a predetermined lottery for a game (for example, a lottery counter used in a VB mode transition lottery),
A gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C11, characterized in that the second specific information acquisition means is capable of acquiring the specified information and storing it in the specific information storage means.

With the above configuration, alternative measures can be taken, such as acquiring other specified information, in cases where, for example, specific information cannot be acquired due to reasons such as the update not being completed in time, or where acquiring the information would be meaningless, or where the acquired value would be undesirable. Furthermore, since the other specified information is used for the specified game lottery, specific lotteries using specific information can be performed efficiently without putting a strain on memory capacity, compared to a configuration in which a dedicated piece of information is provided for alternative measures.

<Feature Group D>
Feature D1. A first specific random number acquisition means (a function for executing a random number acquisition process in the main control device 101) that acquires a specific random number (e.g., an AT counter C) based on the establishment of a predetermined first specific condition;
a specific random number storage means (lottery information storage area 106f in the main control device 101) capable of storing information corresponding to the specific random numbers acquired by the first specific random number acquisition means, with a predetermined upper limit;
A specific lottery means (a function of executing an AT mode transition lottery by the main control device 101) that executes a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event (AT mode transition) will occur using at least information corresponding to the specific random number stored in the specific random number storage means;
A specific execution means (a function of executing a process for transitioning to the AT mode by the main control device 101) capable of causing the specific event based on the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means being a specific result (winning the transition to the AT mode) corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event;
A gaming machine comprising:
providing a predetermined random number (for example, a counter for lottery used in lottery processing of a game) different from the specific random number;
a second specific random number acquisition means (a function of executing the processing of step S4605 by the main control device 101) for acquiring the predetermined random number based on the establishment of a predetermined second specific condition;
A conversion means (a function of executing the process of step S4606 by the main control device 101) for converting the predetermined random number acquired by the second specific random number acquisition means into the specific random number;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, when a first specific condition is met, a specific random number is obtained and stored in a specific random number storage means up to a predetermined number. A specific lottery is then conducted based on that specific random number to determine whether or not a specific event will occur. When a second specific condition is met, a predetermined random number different from the specific random number is obtained, and that predetermined random number is converted into a specific random number.

Here, for example, in situations where the number of specific random numbers not stored in the specific random number storage means is less than the predetermined number, it is desirable to quickly replenish the specific random numbers. On the other hand, if multiple specific random numbers are obtained at the same time, the same specific random numbers may be obtained, which could result in consecutive specific results that result in winning the specific lottery, or conversely, consecutive results that do not result in the specific result, which is undesirable from the perspective of fairness in the lottery. In this regard, the above configuration obtains a predetermined random number as another random number and converts it into a specific random number, making it possible to quickly replenish specific random numbers while reducing the inconvenience of obtaining similar specific random numbers.

Feature D2. A predetermined random number acquisition means (a function in which a hardware circuit in the main control device 101 latches a counter value for lottery use from a free-running counter) that acquires the predetermined random number based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
a predetermined lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that executes a predetermined lottery to determine whether or not a predetermined event (BB state) different from the specific event will occur based on the predetermined random number acquired by the predetermined random number acquisition means;
A predetermined execution means (a function of executing a bonus state process by the main control device 101) capable of causing the predetermined event based on the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the predetermined lottery means being a predetermined result (BB win) corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event;
A gaming machine according to feature D1, characterized in that it is equipped with:

The above configuration clarifies that the predetermined random numbers are used in a predetermined lottery to determine whether or not a predetermined event will occur, and are not prepared separately for the purpose of replenishing specific random numbers. In this way, by making good use of existing configuration and creating a configuration that quickly replenishes specific random numbers, it is possible to quickly replenish specific random numbers without complicating the configuration.

Feature D3. A specific update means for updating the specific random number at a predetermined specific period (a function for executing a process for updating the AT counter C by a timer interrupt process by the main control unit 101);
a predetermined updating means (a hardware circuit that updates a lottery counter used in lottery processing) that updates the predetermined random number at a predetermined cycle;
Equipped with
A gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, characterized in that the specific period and the predetermined period are different periods.

With the above configuration, the predetermined random number that is converted into a specific random number is updated at a different cycle than the specific random number. By doing so, even if the initial value is the same and the specific random number and the predetermined random number are obtained at the same time, the values are likely to be different. As a result, it is possible to effectively avoid the situation feared in feature D1, where a specific lottery is held with the same value.

Feature D4: The specific random number is updated within a range from an initial value (1) to a specific maximum value (128),
The predetermined random number is updated within a range from an initial value (0) to a predetermined maximum value (65535) that is greater than the specific maximum value,
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D3, characterized in that the conversion means converts a first predetermined random number among the predetermined random numbers into a first specific random number among the specific random numbers, and converts a second predetermined random number among the predetermined random numbers that is different from the first predetermined random number into the first specific random number.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the numerical range of the predetermined random numbers is wider than the numerical range of the specific random numbers, multiple predetermined random numbers are associated with one specific random number, and conversion is performed by the conversion means. In this way, even when converting a random number with a wide numerical range to a specific random number, the inconvenience of having no conversion destination does not occur, and it is possible to preferably replenish specific random numbers using predetermined random numbers.

Feature D5: The specific random number is updated within a range from an initial value to a specific maximum value,
the predetermined random number is updated within a range from an initial value to a predetermined maximum value that is smaller than the specific maximum value,
the conversion means is capable of converting a first predetermined random number among the predetermined random numbers into a first specific random number among the specific random numbers, and converting the first predetermined random number among the predetermined random numbers into a second specific random number different from the first specific random number,
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D4, characterized in that the rate at which the first predetermined random number is converted to the first specific random number and the rate at which the first predetermined random number is converted to the second specific random number are predetermined.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the numerical range of the predetermined random numbers is narrower than the numerical range of the specific random numbers, multiple specific random numbers are associated with one predetermined random number, and conversion is performed by the conversion means, with the ratio of specific random numbers to be converted being predetermined. In this way, when converting a random number with a narrow numerical range into a specific random number, there is no need to perform processing to determine the conversion destination each time, and it is possible to suitably replenish specific random numbers using predetermined random numbers without increasing the processing load.

Feature D6. A gaming machine described in any one of Features D1 to D5, characterized in that the predetermined random numbers include different types of first predetermined random numbers (e.g., a lottery counter used in lottery processing) and second predetermined random numbers (e.g., a lottery counter used in VB mode transition lottery).

By providing multiple types of predetermined random numbers that can be converted into specific random numbers, as in the above configuration, it becomes possible to replenish specific random numbers more efficiently, for example, when there are multiple free spaces in the specific random number storage means.

Feature D7. A gaming machine as described in Feature D6, in which the different types of predetermined random numbers are equal to or greater than the predetermined number minus 1.

With the above configuration, even if no specific random numbers are stored in the specific random number storage means, it is possible to acquire and store a predetermined number of random numbers (the upper limit of the number that can be stored) at one time, including acquiring and storing specific random numbers as they are. This makes it possible to replenish specific random numbers more quickly.

Feature D8. A gaming machine as described in Feature D6 or Feature D7, in which the same number of different types of predetermined random numbers as the predetermined number are provided.

With the above configuration, even if no specific random numbers are stored in the specific random number storage means, it is possible to acquire and store a predetermined number of random numbers, which is the maximum number that can be stored at one time. Furthermore, because the same number of predetermined random numbers as the predetermined number are provided, even if a specific random number cannot be acquired or acquiring one would be meaningless, it can be substituted with another predetermined random number. This makes it possible to replenish specific random numbers more quickly.

Feature D9. The update period of the first predetermined random number is shorter than the update period of the second predetermined random number;
A gaming machine described in any one of features D6 to D8, characterized in that the second specific random number acquisition means is configured to be able to acquire the first specified random number before the second specified random number.

With the above configuration, the predetermined random number (first predetermined random number) with a short update cycle is acquired first, which reduces the chance of problems such as always obtaining the same value even after converting it to a specific random number, for example, in a situation where the number has not been updated from its initial value at the time of acquisition.

<Feature Group E>
Feature E1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of symbols are attached in the circumferential direction,
Display units (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allow some of the patterns on each rotating body to be visible;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) that can award a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an active position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As the game state, a normal game state (normal section) and a first specific game state (advantageous section) which is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the normal game state are provided,
A second specific gaming state (AT mode) that is more likely to be advantageous to a player than other states in the first specific gaming state is set as a state included in the first specific gaming state,
A first transition lottery means (a function of executing a favorable zone transition lottery by the main control device 101) that executes a first transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the first specific gaming state in the normal gaming state;
A first specific transition means (a function of executing a process to transition to the advantageous zone by the main control device 101) that transitions to the first specific gaming state based on the result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means being a first transition result (winning the advantageous zone) that corresponds to transitioning to the first specific gaming state;
A specific information acquisition means (a function for executing a random number acquisition process in the main control device 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter C) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
a specific information storage means (lottery information storage area 106f in the main control device 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
a second transition lottery means (a function of executing an AT mode transition lottery by the main control device 101) for executing a second transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the second specific gaming state by using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the lottery result by the lottery means;
A second specific transition means (a function of executing a process for transitioning to the AT mode by the main control device 101) for transitioning to the second specific gaming state based on the lottery result of the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means being a second transition result (AT mode win) corresponding to transitioning to the second specific gaming state;
A destination specifying means (for example, a function to execute a pending display process by the display control device 81, a function to execute a process such as step S4802 by the main control device 101) that can specify the predetermined specific information stored in the specific information storage means before the predetermined specific information becomes the subject of the second transition lottery;
A specific notification execution means (a function of executing a process to display a special image in a hold display process by the display control device 81, a function of executing a special notification process by the main control device 101) that can execute a specific notification corresponding to the identification result by the destination identification means by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In this so-called slot machine configuration, when the start operating means is operated, a lottery is conducted by the lottery means and the orbiting body begins to rotate. When the stop operating means is operated, the orbiting body stops, and if the resulting stop result corresponds to the lottery result for this game, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. A first specific game state is provided that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the normal game state. A second specific game state, which is even more advantageous, is provided as a state within the first specific game state. This provides a gameplay experience based on a gradual transition from the normal game state to the first specific game state and then to the second specific game state, greatly enhancing the player's enjoyment. Furthermore, the second transition lottery to the second specific game state is conducted using specific information previously acquired by the specific information acquisition means and the lottery result by the lottery means. This provides a gameplay experience that is completely different from that of conventional slot machines, which simply match the lottery result by the lottery means with the stopping result of the orbiting body.

The specific notification regarding the previously acquired specific information may then be executed by a predetermined notification means before the specific lottery for that specific information is held. This allows the player to participate in the lottery for that game after knowing, for example, what lottery results in that game will result in a win in the second transition lottery. This makes it possible to play while providing an intense sense of excitement regarding the transition lottery to the second specific game state, which is the ultimate goal in games that transitions from the normal game state to the first specific game state and then to the second specific game state. This increases the player's interest.

Feature E2. The gaming machine described in Feature E1, wherein the specific information acquisition means is configured to acquire the specific information during the normal gaming state.

With the above configuration, it is possible to obtain the specific information used in the second transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition from the first specific gaming state to the second specific gaming state in the normal gaming state before transitioning to the first specific gaming state. This prevents situations where specific information is obtained in advance and a specific notification is made based on that previously obtained specific information, even when a situation arises where a specific notification should be made, the specific information that serves as the basis for the specific notification has not been obtained, and achieves innovative gameplay, in which the specific information for the second transition lottery is obtained before the first specific gaming state in which the second transition lottery is made.

Feature E3. A gaming machine as described in Feature E1 or Feature E2, characterized in that it is equipped with erasure means (a function that executes processing to clear the AT counter C in the execution area AE in processing such as step S3401 by the main control device 101) that can erase the oldest specific information stored in the specific information storage means each time a game is played, regardless of whether the specific information is used in the second transition lottery.

With the above configuration, the specific information stored in the specific information storage means is erased as the game progresses, and it is made clear that it is not retained indefinitely just because the second transition lottery is not held. This allows the specific information to be always up to date in a configuration where the specific information is acquired in advance and used in the second transition lottery. Therefore, the specific information changes from moment to moment depending on the timing (game) of the second transition lottery, and the timing of winning the first transition lottery and the transition to the first specific game state after winning the first transition lottery can be involved in the game, making it more engaging and exciting to play.

Feature E4. A gaming machine described in any one of Features E1 to E3, wherein the specific notification execution means is capable of executing, as the specific notification, a notification corresponding to a lottery result by the lottery means that results in the second transition result or is likely to result in the second transition result when the second transition lottery is conducted using the predetermined specific information.

With the above configuration, it is possible to understand from the specific notification what kind of lottery results obtained by the lottery means will result in the second transition result or are likely to result in the second transition result, for the specific information that has already been acquired. This will attract more interest in the lottery results for each game than in the bonuses corresponding to those results, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Feature E5. A first gaming state (normal gaming state, first BB state, fourth RT state A) and a second gaming state (any BB state, second BB state, fourth RT state B) are set, in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be a special result (for example, strong cherry) is different,
the second transition lottery means is capable of executing the second transition lottery using the specific information and the special result as a lottery result by the lottery means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E4, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function to execute status display start processing and status display update processing by the display control device 81, and a function to execute special notification processing by the main control device 101) capable of performing status notification (status display) including information on whether the specific information that is the subject of the specific notification should be the subject of the second transition lottery in the first gaming state or the second gaming state.

With the above configuration, the player can determine whether or not to transition to a new game state from the state notification in addition to the specific notification regarding the specific information that is the subject of the second transition lottery. This adds an element of whether the second transition lottery should be held in the first or second game state to a game in which the player transitions from the normal game state to the first specific game state and then takes part in the second transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the second specific game state. This can help players understand complex games in which the probability of winning the second transition lottery can change moment by moment depending on the transition between the different states. This allows even players who are unfamiliar with the game to easily understand the complex gameplay and enjoy the game.

Feature E6. A gaming machine as described in Feature E5, characterized in that it is equipped with means for updating the status notification in accordance with the progress of the game (a function for executing status display update processing by the display control device 81).

With the above configuration, in a game where the probability of winning the second transition lottery can change moment by moment due to transitions between states, the status notification is updated as the game progresses. This makes it possible to further enhance the effectiveness of the status notification in helping players understand the game.

Feature E7: The game device is provided with a special state transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) that transitions the gaming state to a special gaming state (first BB state, second BB state) when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result (first BB win, second BB win) and a transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result stops at the valid position,
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, characterized in that the specific notification execution means executes the specific notification when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result.

With the above configuration, a so-called bonus is set as the transition result that causes the game state to transition to a special state, and a specific notification is issued when the bonus is won. In this way, the gameplay of aiming to win a bonus is added to the gameplay of transitioning from the normal game state to a first specific game state and then to a second specific game state, and a specific notification indicating the likelihood of transitioning to the second specific game state is issued when a bonus is won, thereby linking the two gameplays and increasing interest.

Feature E8. Special state transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) that transitions the gaming state to a special gaming state (first BB state, second BB state) when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result (first BB win, second BB win) and a transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result stops at the valid position;
A means for retaining information indicating that the transition result has been won until the transition pattern combination stops at the valid position (a function for executing a process for carrying over a bonus winning flag by the main control device 101);
a means (a function of executing a process for displaying a delayed winning result by the display control device 81) capable of executing, by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65), a notification that the picture combination for the transition will not be stopped when the destination specification means specifies that the result of the second transition lottery based on the specified information will not be the second transition result or is unlikely to be the second transition result when the second transition lottery based on the specified information is executed in a game during the special game state;
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E7, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, a so-called bonus is set as the transition result that causes the game state to transition to a special state. If a bonus is won and a second transition lottery is conducted using specific information obtained in advance, and it is determined that the second transition result will not occur or is unlikely to occur during that bonus state, a notification is issued to prevent the transition to the bonus state. In this way, in a configuration in which specific information is consumed and updated as needed, delaying the transition to the bonus state until specific information that makes the second transition result more likely during the bonus state is obtained can increase the likelihood of the second transition result occurring during that bonus state.

Feature E9. A gaming machine described in any one of Features E1 to E8, wherein the destination determination means is capable of determining the predetermined specific information in the first specific gaming state before the predetermined specific information becomes the subject of the second transition lottery.

With the above configuration, in a game in which a game is transitioned from a normal gaming state to a first specific gaming state and then to a second specific gaming state, some of the information regarding the second transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the second specific gaming state can be ascertained from the specific notification in the first specific gaming state. In other words, by winning the first transition lottery, a specific determination is made by the destination determination means, and a specific notification regarding the second transition lottery is made. In this way, it is possible to make specific notifications within the scope of the gameplay, which transitions to the second specific gaming state through multiple stages, such as transitioning from the normal gaming state to the first specific gaming state and then from the first specific gaming state to the second specific gaming state.

Feature E10. A gaming machine described in any one of Features E1 to E9, wherein the destination specification means is capable of specifying the predetermined specific information in the normal gaming state before transition to the first specific gaming state, before the predetermined specific information becomes the subject of the second transition lottery.

With the above configuration, in a game in which the game is transitioned from the normal gaming state to the first specific gaming state and then to the second specific gaming state, some of the information regarding the second transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the second specific gaming state can be ascertained from the specific notification in the normal gaming state. In other words, if a transition to the first specific gaming state is successful, it becomes possible to ascertain before the transition to the first specific gaming state whether or not a transition to the second specific gaming state will occur. In this way, in a gaming machine that undergoes the above-mentioned gradual transitions, even if a transition to the first specific gaming state does not actually occur, it becomes possible to make calculations as to whether or not a transition to the second specific gaming state will occur, thereby stimulating the player's desire to play.

Feature E11. A gaming machine as described in Feature E10, wherein the specific notification execution means is capable of executing the specific notification before the result of the first transition lottery becomes the first transition result.

In accordance with the above configuration, in the configuration of feature E9, the specific notification can be made before the transition to the first specific game state, and even before the transition lottery to the first specific game state is won. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the normal game state, which is the starting point for games that transition from the normal game state to the first specific game state and then to the second specific game state.

Feature E12. The lottery results by the lottery means include a first result in which a prize is won when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, and a second result in which a prize is won when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode,
The device is provided with a mode notification means (a function of executing a push order role process by the main control device 101) that can execute mode notification (push order notification) regarding operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode on a predetermined notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the instruction monitor 68) based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E11, wherein the second specific gaming state is a state in which a state notification can be executed by the state notification means.

In the above configuration, in a configuration in which the player's advantage can change by transitioning to a second specific game state that generates a navigation of a stop operation mode, specific information acquired in advance is used in the second transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the second specific game state. In this way, it is possible to create innovative gameplay in which specific information for the lottery is acquired in advance for games that use navigation of a stop operation mode.

<Feature Group F>
Feature F1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are attached in the circumferential direction,
Display units (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allow some of the patterns on each rotating body to be visible;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) that can award a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an active position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
Equipped with
A first gaming state (e.g., a normal gaming state) and a second gaming state (e.g., a first BB state, a second BB state, a fourth RT state A, and a fourth RT state B) are set, in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be a predetermined special result (e.g., a strong cherry, a cherry replay, or a watermelon replay) differs,
A gaming machine equipped with a gaming state transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing or RT state processing by a main control device 101) that transitions from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on a predetermined trigger,
A specific information acquisition means (a function for executing a random number acquisition process in the main control device 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter C) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
a specific information storage means (lottery information storage area 106f in the main control device 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
A specific lottery means (a function of executing an AT mode transition lottery by the main control device 101) that executes a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event (AT mode transition) will occur, using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the special result among the lottery results by the lottery means;
A specific execution means (a function of executing a process for transitioning to the AT mode by the main control device 101) capable of causing the specific event based on the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means being a specific result (winning the transition to the AT mode) corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event;
specific notification execution means (a function of executing a process to display a special image in a pending display process by the display control device 81, a function of executing a special notification process by the main control device 101) that can execute a specific notification regarding the specific lottery when a transition to the second gaming state occurs based on the specific information stored in the specific information storage means in a specific situation that is a situation before a transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state becomes possible, by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In this so-called slot machine, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is conducted by the lottery means and the orbiting body begins to rotate; when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body stops, and if the resulting number corresponds to the lottery result for this game, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. The lottery result by the lottery means and specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means and stored in the specific information storage means are used to conduct a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event will occur, thereby achieving a completely different level of playability from conventional slot machines, which simply match the lottery result by the lottery means with the stopping result of the orbiting body.

Furthermore, the above configuration provides a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which the probability of the lottery result obtained by the lottery means being a special result differs. In a specific situation before transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state is possible, a specific notification regarding the specific lottery to be executed in the second gaming state is executed by a predetermined notification means based on the specific information already acquired. This dramatically enhances the playability of the first gaming state, for example, by making it possible to determine before transitioning to the second gaming state whether the specific lottery will be advantageous due to the different lottery contents of each game upon transition to the second gaming state. This makes it possible to appropriately increase interest.

Feature F2. A gaming machine as described in Feature F1, wherein the specific notification execution means is capable of executing the specific notification regarding the specific information when the specific lottery is held in the second gaming state as a notification that compiles multiple pieces of the specific information.

With the above configuration, when a specific lottery is held in the second gaming state, specific notifications of multiple pieces of specific information are made together. At points where players are likely to be concentrating on their game, such as when it becomes possible to transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, if each piece of specific information were to be notified individually, there is a possibility that their attention would be scattered. However, with the above configuration, it is possible to effectively increase the level of attention to the game by consolidating the areas that require attention. Furthermore, by notifying multiple pieces of specific information together as described above, it is possible to equalize the sense of anticipation for the games corresponding to each piece of specific information, and to evenly increase the level of attention to each game.

Feature F3. A gaming machine as described in Feature F1 or Feature F2, wherein the specific notification execution means is capable of executing, as the specific notification, a notification regarding the likelihood of obtaining the specific result in one of the specific lotteries respectively performed in the second gaming state, based on each of the specific information stored in the specific information storage means.

With the above configuration, when a specific lottery is held in the second gaming state where a transition is possible, the player can grasp the likelihood of a specific result in that specific lottery before transitioning to the second gaming state. This allows the player to determine whether it is desirable to transition to the second gaming state, improving the playability of the specific situation before the transition.

Feature F4. A gaming machine described in any one of Features F1 to F3, wherein the specific notification execution means is capable of executing, as the specific notification, a notification corresponding to the number of specific information stored in the specific information storage means when the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means using the special result becomes the specific result.

With the above configuration, as long as information regarding what specific information will result in a specific lottery using a special result is stored in advance, when issuing a specific notification, it is only necessary to count the number of pieces of specific information, making it possible to realize specific notifications before transitioning to the second gaming state with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature F5. A gaming machine according to Feature F4, wherein the specific notification execution means is capable of executing the specific notification based on the probability that the lottery result drawn by the lottery means in the second gaming state will result in the special result.

With the above configuration, the special notification is made based not only on the number of specific information items that will result in a specific result in a specific lottery using the special result, but also on the probability of winning the special result. This makes it possible to predict, to some extent, in advance what the probability of a special result actually occurring in the second gaming state will be, and what the specific result will be in a specific lottery using the specific information.

Feature F6. As the second gaming state, a first specific state (fourth RT state A) and a second specific state (fourth RT state B) are set,
A gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F5, characterized in that the probability that the lottery result drawn by the lottery means will be the special result differs between the first specific state and the second specific state.

According to the above configuration, if the probability of winning the special result in the specific lottery varies, the probability of achieving the specific result in the specific lottery may also vary. In this configuration, the specific notification execution means issues a specific notification when the specific lottery is held in the first specific state or the second specific state. This allows the player to understand the content of the specific lottery, which may have different probabilities of achieving the specific result depending on which specific state is transitioned to, before the state transition.

Feature F7. The special results include a first special result (cherry replay) and a second special result (watermelon replay),
In the first specific state, the lottery result by the lottery means is more likely to be the first special result than the second special result;
A gaming machine according to feature F6, characterized in that in the second specific state, the lottery result by the lottery means is more likely to be the second special result than the first special result.

With the above configuration, when a transition to the first specific state occurs, a specific lottery based on the first special result is more likely to be held, and when a transition to the second specific state occurs, a specific lottery based on the second special result is more likely to be held. This means that the specific state to transition to will differ depending on whether specific information corresponding to the first special result or the second special result has been acquired. This makes it possible to optimally realize gameplay in which the destination game state transitions to differ depending on the specific information acquired in advance.

Feature F8. The specific result is obtained when the specific lottery is conducted using the first special result and first specific information among the specific information, and the specific result is not obtained when the specific lottery is conducted using the first special result and second specific information different from the first specific information among the specific information,
A gaming machine described in feature F7, characterized in that the specific result is obtained when the specific lottery is conducted using the second special result and the second specific information, and is configured so that the specific result is not obtained when the specific lottery is conducted using the second special result and the first specific information.

With the above configuration, the outcome of the specific lottery will differ between the first special result and the second special result, depending on whether the special information acquired in advance is the first specific information or the second specific information. This configuration also determines the type of specific state to transition to depending on which specific information has been acquired, further enhancing the importance of the specific notification.

Feature F9. A gaming machine described in any one of Features F6 to F8, wherein the specific situation allows transition to either the first specific state or the second specific state.

With the above configuration, it is possible to transition to either specific state in a specific situation in which a specific notification is issued, so it may be possible to understand from the specific notification whether it is more advantageous to transition to the first specific state or the second specific state.

Feature F10. The predetermined trigger is configured such that a transition to the first specific state is possible when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a first transition result, and a transition to the second specific state is possible when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a second transition result,
A gaming machine according to feature F9, characterized in that the lottery result by the lottery means is an overlapping result of the first transition result and the second transition result.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature F9.

Feature F11. A gaming machine as described in Feature F9 or Feature F10, configured to allow a player to select whether to transition to the first specific state or the second specific state in the specific situation.

With the above configuration, in a specific situation, the player can select which specific state to transition to in accordance with the specific notification. This allows the player to select and transition to the specific state to transition to after understanding the content of the specific lottery to some extent in advance, regarding the specific lottery that uses specific information obtained in advance.

Feature F12. The configuration is such that, as the predetermined trigger, a transition to the first specific state is possible when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a first transition result, and a transition to the second specific state is possible when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a second transition result,
a result of overlapping the first transition result and the second transition result is set as a result of the lottery by the lottery means,
A gaming machine described in feature F11, characterized in that if the lottery result by the lottery means is the duplicate result, a transition to the first specific state occurs when the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, and a transition to the second specific state occurs when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature F11.

Feature F13: The predetermined trigger occurs when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined transition result (a transition replay 1 win, a transition replay 2 win),
A gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F12, characterized in that the specific notification execution means is capable of executing the specific notification regarding the specific lottery in the second game state when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specified transition result in a game prior to the game in which the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specified transition result (for example, state A presentation, state B presentation, state C presentation of Figure 127).

With the above configuration, the specific situation occurs before transition to the second gaming state becomes possible, and a specific notification is made before that transition becomes possible. This allows the player to understand whether or not being able to transition to the second gaming state is advantageous to the player, and to anticipate a predetermined transition result that will result in a transition to the second gaming state.

Feature F14. A gaming machine described in any one of Features F1 to F13, wherein the specific information when the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means using the special result is the specific result is common to the first gaming state and the second gaming state (for example, AT counter C associated with cherry replay or watermelon replay in FIG. 116).

With the above configuration, among the parameters of the specific lottery, the probability that the lottery result obtained by the lottery means used for the specific lottery will be a special result differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state, but the specific information is common to the first gaming state and the second gaming state. In this way, it is possible to vary the winning probability of the specific lottery without having to associate specific information (lottery table) with each gaming state. This makes it possible to make specific notifications regarding the specific lottery in advance with a relatively simple configuration, such as by understanding the probability of a special result when making the specific notification.

<Feature Group G>
Feature G1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are attached in the circumferential direction,
Display units (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allow some of the images on each rotating body to be visible;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) that can award a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an active position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
A specific information acquisition means (a function for executing a random number acquisition process in the main control device 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter C) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
a specific information storage means (lottery information storage area 106f in the main control device 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
A specific lottery means (a function of executing an AT mode transition lottery by the main control device 101) that executes a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event (AT mode transition) will occur, using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the lottery result by the lottery means;
A specific execution means (a function of executing a process for transitioning to the AT mode by the main control device 101) capable of causing the specific event based on the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means being a specific result (winning the transition to the AT mode) corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event;
Equipped with
As the lottery results by the lottery means, high winning results (e.g., cherry replay in cherry RT) and low winning results (e.g., watermelon replay or strong cherry in cherry RT) are set, which have relatively high and low winning probabilities in a predetermined game state,
A gaming machine characterized by having a destination identification means (a function of executing specific notification processing by the main control unit 101) that can identify information corresponding to the result of a specific lottery when the specific lottery is held using the high winning result and the specific specific information stored in the specific information storage means before the specific specific information becomes the subject of the specific lottery.

In this so-called slot machine, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is conducted by the lottery means and the orbiting body begins to rotate; when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body stops, and if the resulting number corresponds to the lottery result for this game, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. The lottery result by the lottery means and specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means and stored in the specific information storage means are used to conduct a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event will occur, thereby achieving a completely different level of playability from conventional slot machines, which simply match the lottery result by the lottery means with the stopping result of the orbiting body.

Furthermore, with the above configuration, information corresponding to the outcome of a specific lottery that assumes a relatively easy win in the lottery results of each game is determined for the specific information acquired in advance, before the specific lottery itself is even executed. This makes it possible to predict with a certain degree of accuracy the outcome of a specific lottery that is conducted using the specific information acquired in advance and the lottery results of each game. Therefore, for example, it is possible to change the notification content based on the predicted result, or change the lottery content based on the predicted result. This effectively increases the enjoyment of the game.

Feature G2. A gaming machine as described in Feature G1, wherein the high winning result is the result most likely to trigger the specific result among the lottery results drawn by the lottery means in the specified gaming state.

With the above configuration, the lottery result obtained by the lottery method that is most likely to result in a win in a specific lottery will be the most likely winning result, and by using such results to predict the outcome of a specific lottery, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the prediction.

Feature G3. A gaming machine described in Feature G1 or Feature G2, wherein, in the specified gaming state, the probability of the specific result being obtained when the specific lottery is conducted using the low winning result is higher than the probability of the specific result being obtained when the specific lottery is conducted using the high winning result.

With the above configuration, the probability of a specific lottery using a low winning result is higher than that of a high winning result. On the other hand, a high winning result is more likely to be the result selected by the lottery selection means, resulting in more opportunities for the specific lottery. By predicting the outcome of a specific lottery using a high winning result among lottery results with this relationship, the result is more likely to be closer to what could actually occur.

Feature G4. The game state has a first game state (normal game state) and a second game state (fourth RT state),
the predetermined gaming state is the second gaming state,
The high winning result is a result in which the winning probability is different between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G3, characterized in that the destination determination means is capable of determining, in the first gaming state, information corresponding to the result of the specific lottery when the specific lottery is conducted in the second gaming state.

With the above configuration, the result of a specific lottery is determined by the result determination means while taking into account transitions in the game state, which will change the probability of winning. In this way, it is possible to accurately predict the result of a specific lottery while also taking into account transitions in the game state.

Feature G5. The high winning result is
The lottery result of the specific lottery among the lottery results by the lottery means in the second gaming state is the result that is most likely to become the specific result,
A gaming machine described in feature G4, characterized in that the result of the specific lottery among the lottery results by the lottery means in the first gaming state is not the result that is most likely to become the specific result.

With the above configuration, in the second gaming state, the lottery result obtained by the lottery means that is most likely to trigger a win in the specific lottery will be the likely winning result, and by using this result to predict the outcome of the specific lottery, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the prediction. On the other hand, in the first gaming state, which is before the transition to the second gaming state, the lottery result obtained by the lottery means that is most likely to trigger a win in the specific lottery will not be the likely winning result. In other words, while the prediction of the outcome of the specific lottery by the destination determination means can be made with high accuracy in the second gaming state, the accuracy will be lower in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state. In this way, by skillfully customizing the determination by the destination determination means for the second gaming state, it is easier to improve the prediction accuracy compared to general-purpose prediction means.

Feature G6. A gaming machine described in any one of Features G1 to G5, characterized in that it is equipped with a specific notification execution means (a function of executing special notification processing by the main control unit 101) that can execute, by a specified notification means, a specific notification corresponding to the result of a specific lottery when the specific lottery is held using the high winning result and the specified specific information based on the result specified by the advance specification means.

With the above configuration, the player can understand the predicted results of the specific lottery by the advance determination means, and can play the game after understanding the predicted results. In this way, the prediction of the specific lottery can be reflected in the gameplay.

Feature G7. A gaming machine according to Feature G6, wherein the specific notification execution means is capable of varying the notification mode of the specific notification depending on the number of times that the result of the specific lottery, when the specific lottery is conducted using the high winning result and the predetermined specific information, becomes the specific result.

In the above configuration, when a specific lottery is held using a high-yield result that is likely to be won in a specified gaming state and specific information that has been acquired in advance, the number of times that the specific result is likely to occur is determined, and the notification mode of the specific notification is changed depending on that number. By doing this, for example, if a specific notification is made in a notification mode that corresponds to a high number of times that the specific result is likely to occur, it becomes possible to predict that the specific result will be more likely to occur in the future. Conversely, if a specific notification is made in a notification mode that corresponds to a low number of times that the specific result is likely to occur, it becomes possible to predict that the specific result will be less likely to occur in the future.

Feature G8. A gaming machine as described in Feature G6 or Feature G7, wherein the specific notification execution means is capable of executing the specific notification so that a game corresponding to the specific information identified by the advance identification means as being the specific result when the specific lottery is held using the high winning result and the specific information is difficult to distinguish from games corresponding to other specific information.

With the above configuration, if a high lottery result is achieved, it becomes difficult to identify the game that is predicted to have a specific result. This makes it difficult to know which game will have a high lottery result, making it possible to increase attention across all games that are the subject of the specific notification.

Feature G9. A gaming machine as described in Feature G6 or Feature G7, wherein the specific notification execution means is capable of executing the specific notification so that a game corresponding to the specific information identified by the advance identification means as having a specific result when the specific lottery is held using the high winning result and the specific information can be distinguished from games corresponding to other specific information.

With the above configuration, if a high lottery result is achieved, it becomes possible to identify games that are predicted to produce specific results. This makes it easier to understand which games should produce high lottery results, making it possible to focus attention on those games.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction,
Display units (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allow some of the images on each rotating body to be visible;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) that can award a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an active position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
A specific random number acquisition means (a function for executing a random number acquisition process in the main control device 101) for acquiring a specific random number (AT counter C) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
a specific random number storage means (lottery information storage area 106f in the main control device 101) capable of storing the specific random number acquired by the specific random number acquisition means;
A specific lottery means (a function of executing an AT mode transition lottery by the main control device 101) that executes a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event (AT mode transition) will occur, using at least the specific random number stored in the specific random number storage means and the lottery result by the lottery means;
A specific execution means (a function of executing a process for transitioning to the AT mode by the main control device 101) capable of causing the specific event based on the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means being a specific result (winning the transition to the AT mode) corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event;
a specific calculation means (a function of executing an accumulation process of the AT counter C by the main control unit 101) capable of executing a calculation process using a predetermined specific random number stored in the specific random number storage means and another specific random number different from the predetermined specific random number and stored in the specific random number storage means;
a specific notification execution means (a function of executing integrated value information processing by the display control device 81) that can execute a specific notification corresponding to the calculation result by the specific calculation means on a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In this so-called slot machine, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means draws a game lottery and the orbiting body begins to rotate; when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body stops, and if the resulting number corresponds to the lottery result for this game, the bonus awarding means awards a bonus. The lottery result by the lottery means and the specific random number acquired by the specific random number acquisition means and stored in the specific random number storage means are used to conduct a specific lottery to determine whether or not to cause a specific event. This provides a completely different level of playability from conventional slot machines, which simply match the lottery result by the lottery means with the stopping result of the orbiting body.

Furthermore, in the above configuration, a specific calculation means may perform an arithmetic operation on the stored specific random number and another specific random number, and then a specific notification corresponding to the calculation result may be executed by a specific notification means. Specific examples of arithmetic operations include summation, averaging, and subtraction. In a lottery using numerical information (specific random numbers), the results of the arithmetic operation can be useful information for predicting the outcome of the lottery. More specifically, if, for example, the smaller the numerical information value (the larger the numerical information value), the easier it is to win, the results of the summation operation will be very useful in determining whether or not the overall likelihood of winning is high. Furthermore, for example, if the numerical information is such that a win is likely if it is a specific number, the averaging operation will be very useful in determining whether or not it is close to that specific number. Furthermore, for example, if the result of the subtraction process is a small value, it is determined that similar numerical information has been obtained, and if that numerical information corresponds to a win, there is a high possibility of consecutive wins (if it corresponds to a loss, there is a high possibility of both winning); conversely, if the difference in the subtraction process is large, there is a large variation in the numerical information already obtained, and there is a higher chance of one of them winning rather than a chance of consecutive wins. In this way, the result of the subtraction process can also be useful information when predicting the content of subsequent games.

As a result, for specific lotteries using specific random numbers, it becomes possible to predict in advance from the results of the calculation process whether or not the situation is favorable for winning a specific lottery, providing players with information that can be useful as they play, making the game more entertaining.

Feature H2. A gaming machine according to Feature H1, wherein the specific calculation means is capable of performing a multiplication process between the predetermined specific random number and the other specific random number as the calculation process.

With the above configuration, by setting up an accumulation process that has a relatively low processing load among the calculation processes, it is possible to avoid increasing the processing load while using the calculation results to help predict the outcome of a specific lottery. Incidentally, in a configuration where, for example, the larger the specific random number, the more likely it is to win the specific lottery, or the smaller the specific random number, the more likely it is to win the specific lottery, the accumulated value of a specific random number and another specific random number is very useful information for predicting the likelihood of winning the specific lottery using either the specific random number or another specific random number.

Feature H3. A gaming machine according to Feature H2, characterized in that the smaller the value of the specific random number, the more likely the specific result will be obtained in the specific lottery, or the larger the value of the specific random number, the more likely the specific result will be obtained in the specific lottery.

By applying the configuration of Feature H2 to a gaming machine with the above configuration, the advantages of performing accumulation processing as a calculation process can be utilized.

Feature H4. The gaming machine described in Feature H3 is configured such that, in the specific lottery conducted using a first result (e.g., a cherry replay) as the lottery result drawn by the lottery means, the smaller the value of the specific random number, the more likely the specific result will be obtained, and, in the specific lottery conducted using a second result (e.g., a watermelon replay) different from the first result as the lottery result drawn by the lottery means, the larger the value of the specific random number, the more likely the specific result will be obtained.

With the above configuration, depending on the game results, the larger the specific random number, the more likely it is that a specific result will be achieved, or the smaller the specific random number, the more likely it is that a specific result will be achieved.This configuration makes it less likely that an event will occur where the results of the accumulation process mean that there is no hope of winning a specific lottery at all.

Feature H5. The first gaming state (fourth RT state A) and the second gaming state (fourth RT state B) are provided as gaming states,
In the first gaming state, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the first result is higher than the probability that the lottery result will be the second result;
A gaming machine described in feature H4, characterized in that in the second gaming state, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the second result is set to be higher than the probability that the lottery result will be the first result.

With the above configuration, depending on the game state, the larger the result of the accumulation process, the more likely it is that a specific result will be achieved, and vice versa. In this way, in a configuration that issues a specific notification corresponding to the result of the accumulation process, it is possible to understand the game state to which the player should transition from that notification. Therefore, in games that utilize specific lotteries using specific random numbers obtained in advance, an element of the game state is added, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Feature H6: The specific random number is updated within an update range from an initial value to a maximum value,
A gaming machine described in any one of features H1 to H5, characterized in that if the specific random number is a value included in a specific range (e.g., 1 to 13) that is included in the update range, the specific lottery makes it more likely that the specific result will be obtained.

With the above configuration, the specific random number is set so that it is likely to result in a specific result if its value falls within a specific range. Therefore, if a calculation process is performed, such as counting the number of specific random numbers whose value falls within that specific range, it is possible to determine with a relatively simple configuration whether each specific random number that has been obtained is likely to result in a winning result. This makes it possible to make the specific notification of the results of the calculation process more useful.

Feature H7. The gaming machine described in Feature H6, wherein the specific calculation means is capable of counting the number of specific random numbers whose values fall within the specific range as the calculation process.

In the above configuration, where a specific random number is likely to result in a specific result if its value is within a specific range, the specific calculation means performs a calculation process to count the number of specific random numbers within the specific range. In this way, it becomes possible to determine from the specific notification how many of the specific random numbers stored in the specific random number storage means are likely to result in a specific result.

Feature H8. A gaming machine described in any one of Features H1 to H7, wherein the specific calculation means performs the calculation process on all of the specific random numbers stored in the specific random number storage means.

The above configuration does not select specific random numbers from among those already obtained and perform calculations on them, but instead subjects all specific random numbers to calculations. This makes it difficult to tell which specific random number obtained in advance corresponds to a specific notification, and as a result, it is possible to evenly increase attention to all of the games corresponding to these specific random numbers.

<Feature Group I>
Feature I1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction,
Display units (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allow some of the images on each rotating body to be visible;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) that can award a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an active position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
A specific information acquisition means (a function for executing a random number acquisition process in the main control device 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter C) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
a specific information storage means (lottery information storage area 106f in the main control device 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
A specific lottery means (a function of executing an AT mode transition lottery by the main control device 101) that executes a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event (AT mode transition) will occur, using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the lottery result by the lottery means;
A specific execution means (a function of executing a process for transitioning to the AT mode by the main control device 101) capable of causing the specific event based on the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means being a specific result (winning the transition to the AT mode) corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event;
specific notification execution means (a function of executing a CZ mode process by the display control device 81) that can execute, on a specific notification means (auxiliary display unit 65), a notification corresponding to a specific state in which it is easy to win the specific lottery, based on the specific specific information stored in the specific information storage means, before the specific specific information becomes the subject of the specific lottery;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In this so-called slot machine, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is conducted by the lottery means and the orbiting body begins to rotate; when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body stops, and if the resulting number corresponds to the lottery result for this game, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. The lottery result by the lottery means and specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means and stored in the specific information storage means are used to conduct a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event will occur, thereby achieving a completely different level of playability from conventional slot machines, which simply match the lottery result by the lottery means with the stopping result of the orbiting body.

Furthermore, with the above configuration, a notification corresponding to a specific state in which a specific lottery is likely to be won may be issued based on predetermined specific information acquired in advance, before the predetermined specific information becomes the subject of the specific lottery. This makes it possible to detect in advance that a specific result is likely to be achieved in a game in which a specific lottery is held using predetermined specific information acquired in advance, and can contribute to the creation of a new level of gameplay that is different from gameplay that uses the lottery results drawn by lottery means executed every game.

Feature I2. A gaming machine according to Feature I1, wherein the specific information acquisition means acquires the specific information regardless of the lottery result of the lottery means in the game in which the acquisition condition is met.

With the above configuration, in games using specific information obtained in advance, the lottery results for each game are affected by the lottery results for the game when the specific lottery is held, but not by the lottery results for the game when the specific information is obtained in advance. This prevents the specific information obtained in advance from being revealed by the lottery results for each game, and makes it possible to increase the unexpectedness of the specific state notified based on the specific information.

Feature I3. A gaming machine according to Feature I1 or Feature I2, wherein the specific notification execution means notifies the user of the specific state based on predetermined specific information stored in the specific information storage means, regardless of the lottery result of the lottery means.

With the above configuration, in a game in which a specific state that makes it easier to win a specific lottery is announced based on specific information acquired in advance, the lottery results for each game are related to the lottery results for the game when the specific lottery is held, but the lottery results for each game are not related to the announcement of the specific state. This prevents situations in which the lottery results for each game make it impossible to expect a specific state, and makes it possible to increase the surprise of the announced specific state.

Feature I4. A gaming machine described in any one of Features I1 to I3, wherein the specific notification execution means is capable of notifying the specific state based on a plurality of predetermined specific information stored in the specific information storage means.

With the above configuration, a specific state is not notified simply when one piece of specific information that makes it easier to win a specific lottery is acquired, but rather a specific state is notified based on multiple pieces of specific information. This increases the significance of establishing a specific state that makes it easier to win a specific lottery, and can be expected to have an effect of increasing attention across multiple games.

Feature I5. The specific information storage means is configured to be able to store a predetermined number of the specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, wherein the specific notification execution means notifies the specific state so that the game can be continued for the predetermined number of games or more.

The above configuration makes it difficult to determine which of the specific information stored in the specific information storage means is more likely to win the specific lottery, and makes it possible to draw the player's attention to all of the specific information that has been previously acquired at the time notification of the specific state begins.

Feature I6. A gaming machine described in any one of Features I1 to I5, wherein when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a special result, the specific information by which the result of the specific lottery becomes the specific result is the same in the specific state and in a non-specific state.

With the above configuration, even if a specific state is set, the probability of winning a specific lottery does not increase; rather, the specific state is notified simply because the specific information acquired in advance corresponds to a win. This makes it possible to create a novel state that is completely different from the conventional so-called chance zone, which increases the probability of winning a specific lottery.

Feature I7. As a gaming state, a normal gaming state (normal section) and a first specific gaming state (advantageous section) that is more likely to be advantageous to a player than the normal gaming state are provided,
A second specific gaming state (AT mode) that is more likely to be advantageous to a player than other states in the first specific gaming state is set as a state included in the first specific gaming state,
A first transition lottery means (a function of executing a favorable zone transition lottery by the main control device 101) that executes a first transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the first specific gaming state in the normal gaming state;
A first specific transition means (a function of executing a process to transition to the advantageous zone by the main control device 101) that transitions to the first specific gaming state based on the result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means being a first transition result (winning the advantageous zone) that corresponds to transitioning to the first specific gaming state;
A second transition lottery means (a function of executing an AT mode transition lottery by the main control device 101) for executing a second transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the second specific gaming state;
A second specific transition means (a function of executing a process for transitioning to the AT mode by the main control device 101) for transitioning to the second specific gaming state based on the lottery result of the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means being a second transition result (AT mode win) corresponding to transitioning to the second specific gaming state;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features I1 to I6, characterized in that the specific lottery means executes the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means as the specific lottery, and the specific event causes a transition to the second specific gaming state.

The above configuration provides a first specific gaming state that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and a second specific gaming state that is even more advantageous as a state included in the first specific gaming state. Therefore, in a game that is based on a gradual transition to more advantageous states, such as transitioning from the normal gaming state to the first specific gaming state and then aiming for the second specific gaming state, it is possible to realize a game that has not been seen before, in which the lottery for transitioning to the second specific gaming state is conducted based on specific information obtained in advance.

In addition, by announcing the so-called chance zone, which indicates a situation where it is easier to win the second transition lottery, based on specific information acquired in advance, the gameplay is completely different from conventional gaming machines in which the chance zone is set based on the lottery results obtained by the lottery means, etc. For example, even a lottery result that would not normally result in a chance zone can become a chance zone, making it possible to create a sense of anticipation for the chance zone (specific state) regardless of the lottery results of each game.

Feature I8. A gaming machine as described in Feature I7, wherein the specific notification execution means is capable of notifying the specific state during the normal gaming state.

With the above configuration, notification of a specific state that makes it easier to win the lottery to transition to the second specific game state is made in the normal game state before transitioning to the first specific game state, in which the lottery to transition to the second specific game state is held. This makes it possible to notify of a specific state that makes it easier to transition to the final stage, the second specific game state, in the early normal game state, even while assuming a game that involves gradual transitions, such as transitioning from the normal game state to the first specific game state and then to the second specific game state. This allows players to play while calculating the results of the next lottery to transition to the second specific game state if the game transitions to the first specific game state before even transitioning to the first specific game state, providing a new level of enjoyment in the normal game state.

In addition, to each of the configurations of Feature Group A to Feature Group I described above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configurations of other Feature Groups A to I individually, or to apply the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying the respective technical ideas in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

Below is the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-mentioned features can be applied.

Pachinko gaming machine: A gaming machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a gaming ball launching means that launches gaming balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched gaming balls to a specified gaming area, and various gaming components arranged within the gaming area, and that awards a bonus to the player when the gaming ball passes through a specified passage section of each of the gaming components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a fluctuating series of symbols consisting of multiple symbols and then displays the series of symbols as it stops. The symbol fluctuations are initiated by operating a start operating means, and the symbol fluctuations are stopped by operating a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed. A special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the fluctuations is a specific symbol.

Ball-operated belt-type gaming machine: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a fluctuating pattern sequence consisting of multiple symbols and then displays the symbol sequence as a final stop; the pattern change begins when a start operating means is operated, and the pattern change is stopped when a stop operating means is operated or after a predetermined time has passed; a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol; further equipped with a ball receiving device that performs a loading process to take gaming balls from the ball receiving device, and a payout device that pays out gaming balls to the ball receiving device; and configured so that operation of the start operating means is valid when gaming balls are inserted by the loading device.

10... slot machine as gaming machine, 32... reels as rotating body, 41... start lever as start operation means, 42-44... stop switches as stop operation means, 64... speaker constituting auxiliary performance section, 65... auxiliary display section constituting auxiliary performance section, 68... indication monitor, N8... eighth display segment as interval indicator, 81... display control device as sub-control board, 101... main control device as main control board, 102... CPU constituting various control means such as lottery means and main control means.

Claims (1)

A plurality of rotating bodies on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be visible;
a start operation means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a drive control means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and for stopping rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a lottery means for holding a lottery to determine whether or not to award a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus corresponding to a result of the lottery drawn by the lottery drawing means;
A gaming machine comprising:
a specific information acquisition means for acquiring specific information when a predetermined acquisition condition is met;
a specific information storage means capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
a specific determination means for executing a specific determination of causing a specific event to occur by using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the lottery result by the lottery means;
a means for executing specific notification of the specific information stored in the specific information storage means by a predetermined notification means before the specific information becomes a target of the specific determination;
Equipped with
The specific information acquisition means
a first means for acquiring the specific information when a first condition is met based on an operation by a player as the acquisition condition;
a second means for acquiring the specific information when a second condition different from the first condition is established based on an operation by a player as the acquisition condition;
Equipped with
the specific determination means is capable of making the specific determination based on a lottery result by the lottery means and the specific information acquired in a game prior to the lottery being performed by the lottery means;
The identification information includes first identification information and second identification information,
The lottery results by the lottery means include a first result and a second result,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the specific judgment is made using the first specific information and the first result, a result corresponding to causing the specific event is more likely to be obtained than when the specific judgment is made using the second specific information and the first result.